GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

In this tutorial, you learn the fundamental concepts of Revit® Structure 2008. You learn how Revit Structure works, the terms used when working with the product, and how to navigate the user interface.

In the lesson that follows, you learn many of the important features in Revit Structure that contribute to a user-friendly design environment, enhanced productivity, and faster construction documents. You begin with the fundamental concepts that Revit Structure is built upon. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, and how to navigate the user interface.

1

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit Structure is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work.

What is Autodesk Revit Structure?
The Revit Structure platform for building information modeling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modeling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit Structure model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit Structure collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit Structure parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Structure provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This concept is important because it is this capability that delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Structure: change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit Structure coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:
■

Pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

■

How does Revit Structure keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit Structure immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit Structure uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating structural changes. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
Revit Structure uses 5 software element classes: host, component, annotation, view, and datum elements. This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Structure elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit Structure. Hosts include slabs, walls, and roofs. Components include beams, columns, and braces. Annotations are 2D, view-specific elements that help you produce your documentation. Views are dynamic representations of the model and are always up-to-date. Datum elements are non-physical items used to establish project context. In Revit Structure, behavior of elements is largely governed by their context in the structure. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning two walls, for example.

Understanding Revit Structure terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Structure are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. However, there are some terms that are unique to Revit Structure, and understanding them is crucial to understanding the software. This section defines the basic terms used in Revit Structure.

2 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

These families. such as a text note. roofs. section views. identical use. Each different size would be a new type within the same family. views of the project. For example. All elements are considered categories. and so forth). Instances are the actual items that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. Revit Structure makes it easy for you to alter your design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. Another important term to understand is “level”. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. Families are classes of elements in a category that group elements with a common set of parameters (properties). top of wall. such as a beam. the term “project” refers to the single database of information for your design—the building information model. Each family can have different types. or roof. or bottom of foundation. etc.In Revit Structure. such as a 30 X 42 title block. a column could come in several different sizes. from geometry to construction data. although the web supports that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. A type can also be a style. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. such as roofs. which means you can load them into your project and create them from family templates. By using a single project file. slabs. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same.. Other families are called system families. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. loaded tag. elevation views. A model component element. a truss could be considered one family. represents the actual 3D geometry of the building. you must be in a section or elevation view. you add Revit Structure parametric building elements to the design. and similar graphical representation. which include slabs. Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements.
Understanding the Basics | 3
. Most families are component family files. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. Most often. and drawings of the design. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. or symbol. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. A family can have several types. Revit Structure classifies elements by model component elements and annotation elements. levels. Revit Structure predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. helps document the model. dimensions. beams. A type can be a specific size of a family. first floor. The project file contains all the information for your structural design. To place levels. An annotation structural element. footings.
South Elevation View of Structure
When creating your project. For example. schedules. brace. etc. for example. are not available for loading or creating as separate files. This information includes components used to design the model.

The Revit Structure window is arranged to make navigation easy. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. In addition. you will soon feel comfortable learning this interface. making it easy to understand what each button represents.
This creates a new project based on the default template. you navigate and become familiar with the Revit Structure user interface. the Level 2 structural plan view is the default open view. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name.
The Menu Bar
3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom. Revit Structure uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions.Revit Structure terms
Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface
One of the advantages of Revit Structure is its ease of use.
Start a new project
1 On the Standard toolbar.
By default. TIP The project template determines which view is opened and the view names as well. specifically its clear user interface. click .
The Title Bar
2 Place your cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. In the steps that follow.
4 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts
.

Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 5
. While working in the drawing area. the shortcut key for Zoom To Fit is ZF. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. Edit. You can choose commands by placing the cursor over the menu name and clicking. The buttons on the toolbar represent some of the more common commands. click Structural Wall. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar.
The Options Bar
5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. These shortcut keys are listed next to the command on the menu. You then click the command name to run the command. The context menu changes depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. Many of the commands also have shortcut keys to speed up the design process.The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command.
The Toolbar
4 On the Window menu. click Toolbar.
There are 6 toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. and View. TIP For example. Another timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. Notice the bar beneath the toolbars contains design options used to draw the structural wall.

You use the Type Selector in 2 ways. Notice the design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to beams.
6 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts
. The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. click Structural Column. you can select any component and then change the type using the Type Selector. If you select the Beam tool. 6 On the Design Bar. the Type Selector displays a list of beams available within the project. you can select a component type before you add it to the building model. 9 In the Type Selector.
The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. click Beam. the beam type active in the Type Selector is the beam type that is added when you insert it into the building model.
The Design Bar
10 On the Window menu. You can also use the Type Selector to change a component type after it has been added to the building model. click Design Bars. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. notice the list of columns that are available. Select the drop-down list to view the list of beams. Within the drawing area.
The Type Selector
7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. if you intend to add a beam. For example.The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. First. notice a beam type is specified. On the left side of the Options Bar.

Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 7
. There are 9 tabs in the Design Bar. and the respective commands are displayed on the Design Bar.The Show Design Bars dialog box is displayed.
■ ■ ■ ■
Basics tab—includes commands for creating most basic structural model components View tab—commands for creating different views in the project Architectural tab—commands for adding architectural components to your project Drafting tab—commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the project construction documents Rendering tab—commands for creating rendered 3D images Site tab—commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab—commands for executing conceptual massing commands Modelling tab—all the commands to create structural model elements Construction tab—includes commands for creating construction industry information
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
To access the commands within a tab. containing buttons grouped by function. immediately below the Type Selector. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog box. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the Menu Bar. TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the context menu.
The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. click the tab. 11 Click OK.

You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. You can right-click in the browser to add. elevations. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. 3D). You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. and group name. click Browser Organization. scroll through the sorting available for the Project Browser. select Views (all). reports. and groups. In the Project Browser. You can expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or . and rename views. 13 In the Type Selector. 14 On the Settings menu. walls). so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. sheets. schedules. family category (beams. To open a view. families. families. The browser is also dockable.sign next to the name.The Project Browser
12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser.
8 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts
. and groups of your current project. columns. double-click the name. The browser is conveniently organized by view type (structural plans. delete.

it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. Do not click.
Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 9
. In this case. The cursor is displayed as a pencil." TIP The cursor tooltip that displays is identical to the note on the Status Bar.
The Status Bar
16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area.You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for both views and sheets. 18 On the Design Bar. in conjunction with tooltips. When you place the cursor over a component. After you create a browser organization scheme. click Structural Wall. it highlights and the status bar displays the component name. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. click Modify. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog box. You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu. The Status Bar also provides information. notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you should do next. click Cancel.
In the bottom left corner of the window. regarding selected components within a view.

20 Press TAB. You can access Help in the following ways:
■
Dialogs: Dialog include Help buttons. notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: Building Elevation. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Structure session. the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows. Click the Help button. Make sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol so that it is highlighted. press F1 to get help on that dialog.
10 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts
. Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. and the topic specific to the dialog opens.TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol at the bottom of the drawing area. You can use this tri-pane.
■
■
■
22 Close the Revit Structure Help window. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. click . and then click on a specific menu command or command button for Help. If there is no Help button displayed. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. There are several tools that help you find information. press F1 to get the topic associated with the window. Windows: From any window. The elevation symbol consists of two parts. You can also press SHIFT+F1. and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol.
In the Status Bar. Context-sensitive help is also available to provide instant help on any menu command. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print.
Revit Structure Help
21 Click Help menu ➤ Autodesk Revit Help. Toolbar: From the Toolbar. find a keyword on the Index tab. use the Tab key to alternate between nearby components. Tooltips: To see tooltips. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu.

In the second lesson. you modify the system environment. you create an office template. and set it as your default template. Finally.
11
.Modifying Project and System Settings
2
In this tutorial. you modify project settings to control the appearance of the components and subcomponents within that project. which is independent of the project settings. you learn how to modify your Revit Structure 2008 working environment. In the first lesson.

select One hour. select Invert background color.Modifying System Settings
In this lesson. 6 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Structure project. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects.
17 Click OK. click OK. and click OK. 5 Under Colors. click Training Files. 9 Select i_Tutorial_Default. For Save to Central Reminder Interval. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 20 On the Design Bar. they are not saved to project or template files. and click OK. 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. journal cleanup options. click the value for Selection Color. the elements causing the error display using this color. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Structure working environment. Notice that the drawing area is black. 14 In the Color dialog. click the Graphics tab. 7 In the New Project dialog. and your username when using worksets. click Structural Wall. 18 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Template file. 4 In the Options dialog.
12 | Chapter 2 Modifying Project and System Settings
.
Set graphics settings
1 Open Revit Structure. 13 Under Colors. selection default options. select None. 16 Under Notifications. select One hour.
Modifying General System Options
In this exercise. click Modify. you learn how to control the system settings within Revit Structure. 2 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects. select yellow. click the Graphics tab. click Browse. and click Open. 10 In the New Project dialog. For Tooltip Assistance. 15 Click the General tab. notification preferences. 19 Sketch a simple straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 8 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog.rte in the Imperial folder. When an error occurs. and select the wall. specify the following options:
■ ■ ■
For Save Reminder interval. These settings control the graphics. 12 In the Options dialog.

Under Journal File Cleanup.
Setting Options
26 Click File menu ➤ Open. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. For Selection Color. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). 23 Place the cursor over any of the icons on the toolbars. Your login name displays by default. Journals can be run in order to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. select Red. 25 When prompted to save.rvt file located in the Imperial folder. and select Normal for Tooltip Assistance. click the Graphics tab and make the following changes:
■ ■
Under Graphics. click Modify. These files are used primarily in the software support process. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. select your preferred Save Reminder interval.
■
■
Modifying General System Options | 13
. 21 On the Design Bar. clear Invert background color.
31 Click the General tab and make the following changes:
■
Under Notifications. 30 In the Options dialog. 28 Open the i_RST_Settings. 29 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Under Windows Username. This setting controls only the tooltips that display within the drawing area. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. 22 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is displayed even though you set Tooltip Assistance to None. 27 In the left pane of the Open dialog. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Structure session.Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. click the Training Files icon. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Structure sessions. click No. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close.

you can start a new project with that template. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Under Default template file. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. notice the list of library names. click Browse. click the File Locations tab. 7 In the Options dialog. you specify your default file locations. 2 In the Options dialog. This path is set automatically during the installation process. Save. Each library path points Revit Structure to a folder of families or training files. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. under Libraries. You can modify the existing library names and path.
Specify library settings and create a new library
9 In the Options dialog. select the folder to save your files to by default. “Specifying File Locations” on page 14.
14 | Chapter 2 Modifying Project and System Settings
. These settings control location of important Revit Structure files such as your default project template. click Browse. 33 Click File menu ➤ Close. do not save the changes. Load. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Structure Open. 8 Click Cancel. and Import dialogs. 6 In the Browse for Folder dialog. However. and click OK. TIP To view a template.
32 Click OK. The path may vary depending on your operating system or where you installed Revit Structure. the family libraries. and the family template files. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. as well as the material and rendering libraries. and click Browse to select a template. structural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path.
Specifying File Locations
In this exercise. If prompted. 5 Under Default path for user files. centralized. Notice that there are industry-specific templates that you can set as your default template. and you can create new libraries. 4 Click Cancel.
Set file locations
1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options.NOTE Revit Structure Journal files are normally found in C:\Program Files\Autodesk Revit Structure\Journals. click Browse. under Default path for family template files. such as in a large.

or loading a Revit Structure file. or families. 20 Click the File Locations tab. If you work in a large office. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. click the My Library icon. templates. 19 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 18 Click Cancel.
The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Structure Open. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. TIP The library icons display in the order that they are listed in the Options dialog.
16 Click File menu ➤ Open. 15 Click until My Library is at the top of the list. 14 Under Library Name. and change the name to My Library. and click the arrow that displays on the right side of the field. 12 Click in the Library Path column for My Library. and Import dialogs.
Specifying File Locations | 15
. saving.
13 Navigate to C:\My Documents or any other folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Structure projects. Notice that Revit Structure navigates directly to the library path. Save. 17 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you may want to set up an office library on a network path in order to increase productivity and maintain office standards. and click OK. and select it as the library path.
10 Under Libraries. click
. click My Library. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane. Load.
11 Click in the Library Name field of the new library.When you are opening. and click OK. In the following illustration.

specify the new location here. This resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. 11 In the Options dialog. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. enter sheetmtl-Cu. click Text. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. This path specifies the location of the AccuRender® texture library. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 9 In the text editor. select My Library. scroll down the list of building industry terms. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Structure. 19 In the Options dialog.
16 | Chapter 2 Modifying Project and System Settings
. Notice that there is also a building industry dictionary. “Specifying Spelling Options” on page 16. click to open a new Revit Structure project using the default template. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. click OK. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 5 In the text editor. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 12 On the Standard toolbar. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. 14 Click in the drawing area.
Specifying Spelling Options
In this exercise. click Edit. 4 Under Personal dictionary. click Restore Defaults. This path is determined during installation. click Modify.21 Under Libraries. 22 Click to delete the library. 20 Under Settings.
Specify rendering settings
23 Click the Rendering tab. 25 Click OK. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. click the Spelling tab. 17 Click OK.
Modify spelling settings
1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. click Edit.
13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 3 Under Settings. 2 In the Options dialog. 18 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 21 Under Personal dictionary. click Edit. 24 Under AccuRender resource location. If you want to relocate this path. click the Spelling tab. view the current path.

Revit Structure uses the largest increment that represents less than 2 mm in the drawing area.
7 Under Dimension Snaps. work with snapping turned off. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. click OK. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. do the following:
■ ■ ■
Delete sheetmtl-CU.
8 Under Object Snaps. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it.
Modify snap increments
1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Structure project. As you zoom in and out within a view. under Template file. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. 4 Select i_Tutorial_Default. You can turn snap settings on and off. you modify snap increments. “Modifying Snap Settings” on page 17. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis.
Modifying Snap Settings | 17
. and click Open. do not save the changes. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4'.
23 In the Options dialog. 2 In the New Project dialog. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. 5 In the New Project dialog. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. you modify snap settings. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file.The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. In this exercise. Click File menu ➤ Save. and enter 1.
Modifying Snap Settings
In this exercise. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click Training Files.rte in the Imperial folder.. 22 In the text editor. click OK. click Browse. Click File menu ➤ Exit. If prompted.

TIP To zoom while in the act of sketching. zoom out until it does so. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1'. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall.
Notice that the dimension snaps at 4' increments.These are shortcut keys that you can use at any time when working on the design. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys such as ZO to zoom out. use the wheel button on your mouse. click OK. it refers specifically to the dimension that appears while you are in the act of sketching. 10 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. If it does not. For example. 9 In the Snaps dialog. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. While sketching. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right.
18 | Chapter 2 Modifying Project and System Settings
. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area.
Notice that snapping is once again active. snapping reverts to the system default settings. If you do not have a wheel button. Do not set the wall end point. enter SM and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you perform an action. This is the increment that you added previously. and move the cursor to the right. This kind of dimension is called a listening dimension. click Structural Wall. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. The listening dimension reacts to the movement of your cursor and to numerical keyboard entries. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. and move the cursor to the right. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint.
Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the context menu.
Sketch without snapping
13 While sketching the wall.

and delete the value 1". it will snap to the endpoints. the midpoint.
Modifying Project Settings | 19
. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. you create a new material and apply it to a model component. Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. Finally.rvt located in the Imperial folder. 2 Scroll down. 24 Click OK. Open i_RST_Proj_Settings. annotations. it defines the appearance of that component in shaded and rendered views. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety.Use snapping shortcut keys
16 On the Design Bar. When you apply a material to a component. click in the Length dimension snap increments box.
Modifying Project Settings
In this lesson. 25 Click File menu ➤ Close. and do not save the file. click the Training Files icon.
20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. 18 Enter SM. Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog. You create and modify materials. If you move the cursor along the wall. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. click Modify.. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. 3 Click Duplicate. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 21 Move the cursor downward. fill patterns. and click Wall. and use it to complete the exercises. save the project file with a unique name. all materials that are part of that component family are also loaded into the project.Precast Concrete for Name. and select Concrete .
Create a new material
1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. and specify the wall endpoint. This list includes all materials available for use on model components.
Creating and Applying Materials
In this exercise. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. and the wall edges. lines. you modify the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. Using these options. When a model component is loaded into a project. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. and object styles. “Modifying Project Settings” on page 19. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings.

click Edit/New. 10 In the Save Material As dialog. 9 Under Offset. Fnd. Layer #2 is the exterior finish of the wall. and click OK. 8 In the Material Editor dialog.
20 | Chapter 2 Modifying Project and System Settings
. The AccuRender texture Concrete . and click . 16 Enter the new wall name. 11 In the Material Library dialog. and double-click T. click Edit. enter 0. 4 In the New Material dialog. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. Wall. enter Concrete . 18 Click in the Material field for Finish 2. click the Orientation tab. In the steps that follow. 7 In the Material Library dialog.75 for X and Y. It is currently assigned the material Concrete Cast-in-place concrete.
Apply the new material
12 In the Project Browser. Tan.Precast.This creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point.O. click OK. By offsetting the X and Y values of the image map. 17 In the Value field for Structure.
6 Navigate to AccuRender\Concrete\Exposed Aggregate. 13 Select the lower exterior wall.Tan is now part of your AccuRender User library. 15 Click Duplicate.Custom. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated.Tan for the name. select user from the list of libraries. and click OK.
Modify material settings
5 Under AccuRender. you help prevent the appearance of repetitive patterns within the rendering. and click OK. enter Concrete . expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans.
14 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. on the Material menu. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model component in this project. select New ➤ Use Current Material as Template. Foundation . click to select a texture.

select Basic Wall: Foundation-Custom. 27 In the drawing area. select Exterior for type. and click OK. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. “Creating and Applying Fill Patterns” on page 22. 22 Select the left foundation wall. click . and click OK. you create a pattern and apply it to this material.
Creating and Applying Materials | 21
. 21 Click OK 3 times. select Concrete-Precast for Name. drag a rectangle around the entire 3D image.19 On the right side of the Material field. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the material was defined.
20 In the Materials dialog. 25 On the View Toolbar.
28 In the Scene Selection dialog. All of the exterior walls of this project are now Foundation-Custom.
Notice that the foundation walls are no longer gray and there is no material pattern applied in this view. click
. 23 Press TAB to select the remaining exterior walls. click Region Raytrace. 24 In the Type Selector. The lower wall now uses the Concrete AccuRender texture when you render it. In the following exercise. This is the material you created previously. right-click the Design Bar. 26 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. and select Rendering.

click Import. and double-click West. select Region Raytrace.After you draw the rectangle around the 3D model. you create a new pattern and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a structure. 7 Under Custom. rotate. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. and drag a rectangle around the area you want to render. Drafting pattern density is fixed. choose Model. the material that you created is displayed. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. When it is finished. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save As. You can align. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form.rvt. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. such as steel. TIP On the View Control bar. the rendering process begins.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. i_Settings-in progress. expand Elevations. “Creating and Applying Fill Patterns” on page 22. click Display Model on the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the wall. TIP Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. and move model patterns. and save the file as i_Settings-in progress. click Model Graphics Style. 5 Click New.
Creating and Applying Fill Patterns
In this exercise. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns.
NOTE If you want to see the material in greater detail.rvt. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog.
22 | Chapter 2 Modifying Project and System Settings
. Zoom into the model. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. 29 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 31 Navigate to a folder of your preference. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. 3 Under Pattern Type. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. click Display Model. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. click Custom.
Create a new fill pattern
1 In the Project Browser. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Notice that a concrete surface model pattern is not available. and click Hidden Line to return to the previous view. 32 Proceed to the next exercise.

pat from the Common folder. 23 Select the Concrete Surface model pattern. TIP Typically. select Model Graphics Style: Wireframe. 12 Click OK. The location of these files can vary depending on the path you set during installation. select Model. and click OK. The new model pattern is available in the Name list in the Fill Patterns dialog. 24 In the Materials dialog. expand Elevations. 25 Click OK 3 times.
Apply the concrete surface pattern
13 In the Project Browser. click 21 Under Surface Pattern.
22 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 26 On the Design Bar. click Edit. 20 On the right side of the Materials field. click
.
. click OK. 19 In the Edit Assembly dialog.
16 On the Options Bar. click . and double-click West.
17 In the Element Properties dialog. click in the Material field for Finish 2.
Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 23
. and click Open. your training files can be found on C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RST 2008\Training. 27 On the View Toolbar. 18 In the Value field for Structure. click Edit/New. 9 Select Concrete_Surface.8 Navigate to the training folders installed with your Revit Structure software. Finish 2 is the exterior finish of the wall. The west wall of the building displays as solid fill. under Pattern Type. 15 Select the wall. It is currently assigned the material Concrete-Precast. 10 Under Custom. select Concrete and enter 30 for Import scale. click . click Modify. and click OK. 11 Enter Concrete Surface for Name. 14 On the View Control Bar. to select a fill pattern.

rvt. you can change the type properties center chase width of one truss and then apply the change to all trusses. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.TIP If the pattern does not display. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.
29 Click File menu ➤ Save. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple components of the same type. 28 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears.
Apply object styles
1 In the Project Browser. i_Settings-in progress. use the shortcut keys ZF (Zoom to Fit) so the entire model fits in the drawing area. “Controlling Object Styles” on page 24. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each truss.
24 | Chapter 2 Modifying Project and System Settings
. Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. 2 On the keyboard. adjust your zoom settings as needed.
Controlling Object Styles
You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. and double-click 3D. For example. expand 3D Views. there are often multiple trusses within a project.

“Modifying Line Patterns and Styles” on page 26. and click OK. under Custom Colors. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. click Model Graphics Style.3 On the View Control Bar. Notice the line color is applied to the wall. 8 In the Color dialog. double-click the Line Color field. and click Hidden Line. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save.
9 In the Object Styles dialog. select Blue. click OK. click Show categories from all disciplines. 6 Under Category. 7 Under the Walls category. expand Walls. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.
Controlling Object Styles | 25
. 5 In the Object Styles dialog.

i_Settings-in progress.
Apply the new line pattern
7 In the Project Browser. expand Structural Framing.
26 | Chapter 2 Modifying Project and System Settings
.
Create a new line pattern
1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. or you can use Object Styles to apply the change to all views. double-click T.rvt. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. Under Line Pattern. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration:
6 Click OK twice.O. Click OK. You can use the Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the truss appearance in a specific view. select Truss. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. under Floor Plans.Modifying Line Patterns and Styles
In this exercise. i_Settings-in progress. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the truss in plan view. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog. You have created a new line pattern.rvt. (example: plan view). click Model Graphics Style. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. Fnd. enter Truss for Name. 10 In the Object Styles dialog:
■ ■ ■
Under Category. now you must apply it. and click Hidden Line. and select Web Joist. 8 On the View Control Bar. is open with the 3D view active. There are 2 ways to apply the line style to the truss. Wall. click New. You then create a new line style to represent underslab drainage.

Slab. 12 Click the Model Categories tab. under Floor Plans. double-click T. select Override and specify the following options:
■ ■ ■
Select 2 for Line Weight. 14 In the Select Line Style dialog.11 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. 18 In the Line Styles dialog.
Create a new line style
16 In the Project Browser.
15 Click OK twice. Select Blue for Line Color. expand Structural Framing. Select Truss for Line Pattern. under Modify Subcategories. This overrides the appearance of the truss only in the current view. and select Web Joist for Visibility. click New.O.
Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 27
. 13 Click Override for Line Style Projection.

31 In the Project Browser. is open with the 3D View active. “Modifying Annotations” on page 29. 36 Proceed to the next exercise. and clear Underslab Drainage. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save.
Modifying Annotations | 29
. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings.
Modifying Annotations
In this exercise. 30 Click OK. i_Settings-in progress. 28 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 5 Under Text.rvt.27 On the View Toolbar. click Duplicate. expand Lines. i_Settings-in progress. under Floor Plans. 4 Enter the name Linear . 32 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. expand Lines. double-click Level 1. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. click
. 33 On the Model Categories tab.rvt. You also load a new beam annotation symbol and apply it to show the beam instance number rather than the beam type number. 29 On the Model Categories tab. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. This turns off the visibility of the underslab drainage lines only in this view. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.Imperial and click OK. click the default value for Units Format. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear.
Notice the underslab drainage lines appear in this view.
Create a new dimension style
1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. 34 Click OK. and clear Underslab Drainage.

navigate to the Annotations/Structural folder of the Imperial Library. 15 In the Tags dialog. notice that the label displays 1i.Imperial dimension available. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 20 On the Options Bar. 17 Click OK.O. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You have created a new dimension style. double-click T. 19 Click By Category. clear Leader. In the preview image. click Tag. click Modify. 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. Notice that you can choose between the 2 beam tag types loaded into this project. 12 Click Load. 21 Click a beam.
30 | Chapter 2 Modifying Project and System Settings
. under Floor Plans. scroll to Structural Framing Tag and notice that Structural Framing Tag is now the assigned tag.
14 Click Open. Select Feet and fractional inches for Units. This tag is used when tagging using the Beams By Category option. 16 Under Loaded Tags. This indicates this tag is designed to display the beam instance value rather than the type value. click Structural Framing Tag.
7 Click OK twice.6 In the Format dialog:
■ ■
Clear Use project settings. and select Structural Framing Tag. and select the drop-down arrow that displays. click Dimension. Fnd. Wall. notice that there is a Linear . 13 In the Open dialog.
Load a new beam tag
10 In the Project Browser. In the Type Selector. 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

you specify the project units of measurement . you modify the detail level assignments. dimension values display using this setting. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. 23 Select the structural framing tag category with the loaded tag. 4 In the Project Units dialog.A beam instance tag displays on the selected beam. 3 In the Format dialog.unless there is an override.Temporary Dimensions. you modify the temporary dimension settings. dimensions use these project settings. you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. select Centerlines
Specifying Units of Measurement. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Unless there is an override. Structural Framing Tag. . 6 Click OK. click 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. click the default value for Format. the other displays the instance value. i_Settings-in progress. 24 Under Leader. “Specifying Units of Measurement. 8 Under Walls. under Area.Temporary Dimensions. In the first section. 2 In the Project Units dialog. In the final section.
Specify temporary dimension properties
7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. select To the nearest 1/16" for Rounding. notice the structural framing tag appears twice. 25 On the View Toolbar. and click OK. Temporary Dimensions.
Set units of measurement
1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units.rvt. The remaining untagged beams are tagged. and click OK. under Length. and Detail Level Options | 31
. 5 In the Format dialog.
22 On the Design Bar. click the default value for Format. select SF for Unit suffix. In the second section. and Detail Level Options
In this exercise. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Each tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. click Tag All Not Tagged.
Specifying Units of Measurement. and Detail Level Options” on page 31. select 0 decimal places for Rounding. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. verify that Create is clear. Under Category.

you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. 15 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt from the Common folder.
11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. In this table. click the Training Files icon.
Notice the 1/4" = 1' 0" view scale moved to the Medium column. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. you open a project that was created using Revit Architecture to better demonstrate different phases of construction. When you create a new view and specify its view scale. Revit Structure project files do not include ceiling plans. You do not select a view scale to move it. 12 Click OK. Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open.
32 | Chapter 2 Modifying Project and System Settings
. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. click
. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. temporary dimensions now snap to the centerline faces and to the openings. Open c_Project_Browser. select Openings. and double-click Completed Project. “Modifying Project Browser Organization” on page 32. In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE In this exercise.
Modifying Project Browser Organization
In a typical project.9 Under Doors and Windows. In this project.
Organize the Project Browser by views
1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. and click OK. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating the lengthy Project Browser list is cumbersome. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog.
Specify detail levels
10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level.

4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. expand both the Architectural and Structural category of views. On the Project Browser. and notice the progression of each view:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Main Bldg . 10 In the Project Browser.2 In the Project Browser.Phase 1-Structure East Wing . In the Project Browser.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project
Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. select Type/Discipline. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. and click Apply. expand Sheets (all). 8 Select Phase. select Discipline. 5 On the Views tab.
Modifying Project Browser Organization | 33
. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. notice that views are grouped based on phase. and click OK. and notice that each is grouped by discipline. expand each view type. 6 In the Project Browser.Phase 2-Structure West Wing . and click OK.
7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization.

click the Folders tab. expand Complete ➤ 3D Views and then expand Architectural and Structural. named print settings. 13 Select Sheet Prefix. levels. When you create new projects. View Type (Family and Type). 12 Click the Sheets tab. and view names. preloaded families. When you create a new template based on an existing template. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. you select the starting point for your structural template. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. a group of settings are used to specify the project environment. and specify the following:
■ ■ ■
Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline
19 Click OK. and rendered scenes in a template. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization.
Creating a Structural Template
In this lesson. For example. 14 In the Project Browser. 16 Click the Views tab. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project.
Create a new browser organization name
15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. In this lesson. you create an office template. and click OK.Organize Project Browser by sheets
11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. If you want to save this file. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. You can use an existing template
34 | Chapter 2 Modifying Project and System Settings
. Whenever you create a new project or template. you create a Revit Structure template file and set it as your default template. and Discipline. under Views. the same rules apply. dimensions styles. Although Revit Structure provides many templates to choose from. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. This lesson is intended to provide you with a blueprint of how to create your structural template. You can also save these settings in a template file. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. The lesson begins with choosing the right base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you would consider in order to make a template unique to your situation.
Choosing the Base Template
In this exercise. 21 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. A well designed template will ensure office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. You can save Project Browser organization schemes. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. navigate to your preferred directory. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. enter a unique file name. when you create a new project. and click OK. under Sheets. expand each sheet set. and click OK. It is mostly conceptual and is designed as a road map with options for your consideration. and click New. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. 20 In the Browser Organization dialog. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. In the lesson that follows. and click OK.

The template selection may vary depending on your installation. you can establish the settings that are common to most projects.
Review existing templates
1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. 13 Click Open. 4 In the New Project dialog. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. If your work requires a variety of templates. choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. Other templates. in the drawing area. each is modified in a way to make it useful to a particular industry. are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. click Browse. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. 2 Under Template File. 5 Click OK. 11 Under Template File. If you want to use a template other than the default. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. such as the structural template. In this exercise. select Project Template. 6 In the Project Browser. expand Views ➤ Elevations. 14 Under Create New. and click OK. you can select it now. Other than the default template. you modify the following:
■ ■ ■
Materials Fill patterns Object styles
Modifying Project Settings | 35
. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of the structural tools. you can dictate its appearance in all views and renderings. 9 Click File menu ➤ Close. 8 In the Project Browser. close them. and double-click Building Elevation. drag a zoom region around the level heads. Notice there are a number of different templates to choose from. you modify the project settings for your new template. “Modifying Project Settings” on page 35. Notice that the structural analysis template is more complex than the default template. If you have additional projects open. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. In order to maintain office standards and reduce rework.as the baseline or use no template at all. The first step in creating your structural template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. Depending on your needs. such as structural or construction. 7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. 3 Select the Structural Analysis-Default. and click Open.
Modifying Project Settings
In this exercise. select Project for Create new. For example.rte template. When you create the material. 12 Select a default template. click Browse. 15 Proceed to the next exercise.

create and modify them as needed. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization View direction
In addition to the list above. specific modifications are not dictated. You can do this by setting the AccuRender Texture. TIP Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. or modify existing patterns. you may want to specify their appearance when rendered. 2 Scroll down the Name list. Choose the appropriate option. or refer to the Help documentation. rotate.
If there are custom AccuRender materials that you want to add to the template.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Line styles. If there are materials that are commonly used within your office or industry. RELATED See “Modifying System Settings” on page 12 for more information on creating new AccuRender materials. 7 Create new fill patterns as needed. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise.
Specify object styles
9 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. “Modifying System Settings” on page 12. You may want to save the material to a library located on a network path. 6 Scroll through the list of model and drafting patterns. be aware that access to the original material library may be necessary at some point. there are additional commands on the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. you can do so by going to the Material menu and selecting New.
Create and modify materials
1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. For more details on modifying these settings. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a structure. weights. and create the AccuRender material. see the previous lesson. and move model patterns. 8 Click OK when finished. RELATED See “Modifying Project Settings” on page 19 for more information on creating new fill patterns.
36 | Chapter 2 Modifying Project and System Settings
. click to access the AccuRender Material Library. 4 Click OK twice to close the Material Library and Materials dialogs. 3 Under AccuRender. When you save a new AccuRender material designed to be used in an office template. If you create or modify new materials.
Create and modify fill patterns
5 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. Observe the materials that are already defined. You can align. During this exercise.

19 Add and delete view scales as needed. 17 Click the Model Line Weights tab. 12 If necessary.
Modify line styles
30 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. 23 Modify existing line weights as needed. 20 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. such as beams and columns in orthographic views.In the Object Styles dialog. 31 For existing line categories. 11 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. and create new subcategories as needed. TIP When the material of a component is set to by category. there are 3 tabs: one for model component line styles. and scroll through the list of categories. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. 22 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. 10 Click the Model Objects tab. 28 Add and delete line patterns as needed. and click Edit. or line pattern as needed. You can add and delete view scales. and one for annotation symbol line styles. such as section lines and dimension lines. line colors. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. In the dialog. modify the line weight. select it. create new subcategories. line color. and materials for different categories and subcategories of components or imported objects. 13 Click the Annotation Objects tab. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of objects in perspective views. 29 Click OK. 24 Click OK. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. 27 To modify a line pattern. The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of structural components. 21 Modify existing line weights as needed. create new line subcategories using line weights and line patterns previously modified or created. 32 If necessary. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. 18 Modify existing line weights as needed. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale.
Modify line patterns
25 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns.
Modify line weights
16 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. 26 Scroll through the list of line patterns. line patterns. one for perspective model line styles. 15 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. you can set line weights.
Modifying Project Settings | 37
. 14 Modify categories.

Modify loaded tags
47 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. and radial dimensions are modified separately. 35 Select the Type drop-down list. 36 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. angular. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. when you add a structural framing tag with the tag option selected. The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. click Load. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. 39 Click OK. 37 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. click Duplicate. name the style. 48 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. To see the details of a particular style. 52 Under Length. 45 Click OK. 41 Select the Type drop-down list. Volume. click Format. 53 Modify the unit settings if necessary. the beam is tagged using the tag assigned to the structural framing category in this dialog. and specify the properties. In the Tags dialog. 38 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. For example. tags. 50 After you have loaded the necessary tags. select it from this list. 42 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary.
■ ■
Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular.
Specify project units
51 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. and Angle settings. and specify the properties. and dimensions. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. 54 Click OK. 55 Repeat the previous 2 steps for the Area. 44 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. click Duplicate.
38 | Chapter 2 Modifying Project and System Settings
. select it from this list. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. To see the details of a particular style. 43 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. and click OK.
Modify arrowheads
34 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. Linear. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. name the style. 49 To load new annotation tags. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category.33 Click OK.
Modify Dimension Styles
40 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. 46 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions.

75 In the Type Properties dialog. 61 Click OK. In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. or from the roof looking down (down direction). 72 Click OK. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. right-click any plan view of the Structural Plan Family. 71 If necessary. or Edit existing organization types. engineers view plans using different orientations in different countries. In a typical project. and choose a decimal symbol. The detail level is based on view scale. 69 Click the Sheets tab. 70 Delete. 63 Review the table.
Specify temporary dimensions
58 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. and select Properties. To move the view scales. and move view scales as needed. Rename. Medium. you can view the project from the slab looking up (up direction). 59 Under Walls. 66 In the Browser Organization dialog. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. In certain projects. click the Views tab.
Modifying Project Settings | 39
.
Modify project browser organization
65 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. This parameter makes it possible for you to select a different view direction. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating the lengthy Project Browser list is cumbersome. 67 Delete. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. 57 Click OK.
Setting View Direction
73 In the Project Browser. TIP In the drawing area. create new browser organization types. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. create new browser organization types. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. When you create a new view. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. Using the arrows between the columns. 60 Under Doors and Windows.
Specify detail levels
62 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. 64 Click OK. 74 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. 68 If necessary.56 Specify the Slope option. For example. Rename. click the arrows between columns. or Edit existing organization types. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. or Fine. click View Direction.

See “Setting up Shared and Project Parameters” on page 47. you may only want to add generically named settings that would be applicable to most projects.
40 | Chapter 2 Modifying Project and System Settings
. “Modifying Structural Settings” on page 45
If necessary. However.
View Templates
Structural Settings
If necessary.
79 Proceed to the next exercise. and make modifications in each area as necessary. brace symbols. there are several additional commands that control the project environment. This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. you can set the symbolic representation settings for cutback distance. 77 Click OK to exit the dialogs. Each command is available on the Settings menu. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. “Loading and Modifying Families and Groups” on page 41. In such a case. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template.
Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations
This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. Although these settings can be saved within a template. Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views. For example. You can find additional information in Help. you can save rendered scene settings to a template. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template.
Additional project settings
78 On the Settings menu. Use the table below as a checklist. and column symbols. Links to associated tutorials are provided. See “Modifying Views and View Templates” on page 42.76 Use the down arrow to change the parameters to Up or Down. This could be useful for things such as title blocks. and framing tags.

This would be cumbersome and counterproductive.
Use Project Browser to modify families
7 In the Project Browser. select Edit/New. modify. In the Element Properties dialog. or load a new beam type. Obviously. 3 To modify. and on the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Beam. if you loaded every beam type you could find. expand Families. Press ESC twice to return to the template. you would have to scroll through a lengthy list of beams every time you changed a beam within a project. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. 2 In the Type Selector. and click OK. or use the Project Browser to delete an existing type. click on the Options Bar. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. notice the list of beams is already loaded. Although the options are endless. do so before starting this exercise. you do both. Although this is possible. and click Open.Loading and Modifying Families and Groups
In this exercise. and beams. Depending on the intended use of this template. and click OK. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load Group. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. For example.
Goal: Load new beam type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. If this selection is satisfactory. You can load any family or group into a template. you could load detail components. titleblocks. Navigate to the directory containing the beam type. For example. In addition.
Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 41
. Loading from the library is quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load.
Load and modify families
1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. you may want to delete. In the steps that follow. enter a name. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. select it. there are some important thoughts to consider. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. It is important to understand that you should not load every conceivable family into a template file. select Load. You may want to modify slab types to add a more diverse selection within the template. and click OK. If you have not completed the previous exercise. Click Duplicate. However. Modify type properties. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. create. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties to modify or add a new type. Make modifications.
Modify beam type Create new beam type
4 Click OK. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. or add to this selection. you can move onto the next component type. you should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change.
Use the instructions in the table below to perform these steps. In the Element Properties dialog. select Edit/New.

Detail Level. This titleblock is currently part of the template. and the visibility settings of categories and subcategories. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. click Preview.Notice that each family category is listed. “Modifying Views and View Templates” on page 42. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. 2 For Name. Notice that there is a titleblock symbol loaded. you will first modify view templates. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. You can also apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. 11 To load a titleblock. You may want to load a titleblock applicable to your office and then delete this titleblock. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. To do so. 13 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. 8 Expand Annotation Symbols.
Create and modify view templates
1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. click Load. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project/template. right-click the component. you created new projects using different templates. you save time and increase consistency. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. you create the views required for your template. and select the titleblock type. select Structural Framing Plan. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. load. View Range. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. (The titleblock name may vary depending on the template you started with. and click Delete.
42 | Chapter 2 Modifying Project and System Settings
. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. At any time. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 12 Click OK. you can apply a view template to any view.) 9 Expand the titleblock. In this exercise. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control the initial appearance of the views. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. Discipline. In addition. Notice it has Revit in the upper-right corner. In this exercise.
Modifying Views and View Templates
At the beginning of this lesson. create.

5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the Name drop-down list.
Create and modify views
16 In the Project Browser. under Elevations.
Modifying Views and View Templates | 43
. rename or duplicate the view template.3 Specify each value as needed. the view is not linked to the template in any way.
Apply view templates
7 In the Project Browser. TIP To apply the template to multiple views. select the view in the Project Browser. and press Ctrl while selecting additional views. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type.
TIP To select the view template directly from the Project Browser: select the view. and make modifications. and apply the appropriate template. open the view from the Project Browser. nor is there a limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. 6 Click OK. this view template will be used to set the initial view properties. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. under Floor Plans. and select Apply View Template. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 14 Select the Structural Plan template. and click OK. 12 In the Project Browser. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. This option means that every time a new plan view is created. click Apply. and click OK. right-click. When the view template is applied the view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. 15 If you modified any other view templates. 4 If necessary. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. 11 Click Apply. After the template is applied. and double-click Level 1. double-click Level 2. double-click Building Elevation. 9 Select the Structural Framing Plan template. Then right-click and select Apply View Template. expand Views ➤ Structural Plans.

right-click {3D}. go to the View menu ➤ View Properties. click Level on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. or delete them as needed. 19 In the Project Browser.
32 You can use Orient to a Direction or Orient to a View to set the camera location and target. under Structural Plans. Black levels have no associated views. right-click Level 1. You can rename this view. 22 Add the new level within the elevation view. click 30 On the View toolbar. and select Rename. on the View toolbar. click 26 In the Project Browser. 24 Create additional levels as needed. click .
29 To create additional 3D views.
44 | Chapter 2 Modifying Project and System Settings
. expand 3D Views.
on the View toolbar. and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser.
Create and modify schedules
34 On the View tab of the Design Bar.
33 To save the view. if desired. Rename. Dynamically Modify View. Make sure you are still in the Level 2 view. click
. supply a view name. 23 Rename and reposition the level as needed. review the existing floor plans. you may want to modify the view properties of any new views.Notice the level names have blue titles for the associated plan views. click Schedule/Quantities. 20 To add additional levels to the template. To do so. 17 In the Project Browser. duplicate. 31 Click the arrow on the right side of the Dynamic View dialog. You can also duplicate or delete the view.
The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views ➤ 3D Views.
Create 3D views
25 To add 3D views to the template. 28 Rename the 3D View. under 3D Views. The associated floor plan will use the Structural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. review the Structural plans and elevations. 21 In the Options Bar. select Make Plan View. 27 In the Project Browser. If necessary. to orient and save the view. and notice the context menu includes options to rename. duplicate. under Structural Plans. or delete this view.
You can use this tool.

To later add a titleblock to a sheet. After the sheet is created. beams. On the Appearance tab.
Modifying Structural Settings | 45
. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. TIP You can drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 38 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. and click OK. and columns. 42 Create new sheets as needed. You are prompted to select a titleblock.
Modifying Structural Settings
You can create custom cutback distances for braces. modify settings. select one.
37 Click OK. “Modifying Structural Settings” on page 45.You may want to add schedules to a template. make the following modifications as needed:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
On the Fields tab. 36 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click the Symbolic Representation Settings tab. This can save time and ensure office standards are maintained. 35 If you want to add schedules to your template. On the Filter tab. You can also create custom brace symbols for use in plan views and for parallel line offset distances. and modify their properties accordingly. modify settings.
Add sheets to the template
39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. You can still add views to the sheet. and click OK. If you have already loaded your titleblocks into the template. On the Formatting tab. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. This can save time and ensure office standards are maintained. click Sheet. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. select and order required fields. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the titleblock. You may want to consider adding the settings that you use most often. select the default titleblock. and click OK. select the titleblock and delete it. assign filters. or on the sheet itself. and click Rename. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. 40 Add views to the sheet by selecting Add View from the View tab of the Design Bar. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. To do so. You may want to add symbolic settings to a template. 41 To rename or renumber the sheet.
Create custom symbolic representations
1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. and modify their properties accordingly. double-click the sheet number. modify settings. select the category type. right-click the sheet in the Project Browser.

The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers. specify the desired line representation and offset as follows:
■
Plan representation: Select the desired symbolic line type for plan representation (Line or Line with Angle. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. “Modifying Import/Export Settings” on page 46.
Modify export layers for DWG and DXF
1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. 6 Proceed to the next exercise. Revit Structure presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards.3 Under General. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Structure program installation directory.
■
5 Click OK. enter the desired values for the following cutback distances:
■
Symbolic brace/beam cutback distance: Sets the distance from the center of the brace/beam to the center of the adjoining beam.
■
4 Under Brace Symbols.
Modifying Import/Export Settings
In this exercise. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. When you import a DWG or DXF file. specify the following:
■ ■
Projection Layer Name and Color ID Cut Layer Name and Color ID
46 | Chapter 2 Modifying Project and System Settings
. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN.txt). Symbolic column cutback distance: Sets the distance from the center of the column to the beam endpoint. and are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program.) Parallel line offset: Enter the symbolic distance for the parallel line offset. The Export Layers command maps Revit Structure categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. 2 For each category.

Modify export layers for DGN
4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. and so on. they become the set mappings for the project. and related multi-category tags and schedules. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayersdgn. When you create a multi-category schedule.
Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 47
. you normally schedule a single category: rooms.3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. and click Save.
Set up shared parameters
1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. name the file. you can define additional parameters that are not included in either the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template.
Setting up Shared and Project Parameters
In this exercise. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. “Setting up Shared and Project Parameters” on page 47. you could use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. windows. Creating Named Print Settings. Project parameters are those parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. 5 For each category. For example. specify the following:
■ ■
Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID
6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. Using shared parameters. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. and click Save. 9 Select Save As. they cannot be used to tag objects. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules.
Modify import line weights
7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. select Save As. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Structure program installation directory. When you import a DWG or DXF file. These settings are retained within the project template. When you save these mappings to a text file. When scheduling. name the file. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. you can skip this exercise and move on to the last exercise of this lesson. and so on. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. In this exercise. you refine the template further by setting up shared parameters. name the file. 8 In the dialog. project parameters.txt) for MicroStation. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight (values from 1 16). for example. therefore. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Structure line weight. They cannot be shared with other projects. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. and unlike shared parameters. Multi-Category Tags employ shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. select Save As. doors. and click Save. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. detailed instructions are not supplied because each office has a unique set of needs. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters.

For each parameter group. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. 17 Under Discipline. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. and click OK. select a parameter value type. or consult the Help documentation. 9 Name the parameter. 6 Create as many groups as needed.
Set up project parameters
13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 2 Click Create. 21 Click OK. 26 Specify whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance or a type parameter.NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. 11 For each parameter group. you can create a list of parameters. and select Shared Parameter. 18 Under Type. 28 Add shared project parameters as needed. click New. 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 27 Click OK. you can begin creating parameter groups. 8 Under Parameters. 5 Enter the group name. This allows you to name the external parameter file. 10 Click OK. 19 Specify whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. click New. and specify the categories to which this parameter applies. 24 Click Select. you may want to save the file to a network location.
Create and load multi-category tags
29 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. enter a parameter name. 3 Name and save the file. under Groups. 22 Add project parameters as needed. select a group to which you want to add parameters. and specify the Type. For information on creating multi-category tags. If this template will be used by multiple people within an office. add required parameters. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. If a file already exists. 7 Under Parameter group.
48 | Chapter 2 Modifying Project and System Settings
. 14 Click Add. and click OK when finished. 16 Under Name. select a parameter discipline type. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click Add. 25 Click OK. After the file is named. 23 To add a shared project parameter. and select a shared parameter. select Project parameter. 20 Select the element categories to which this parameter applies.

select the tag. make minor modifications if necessary. 37 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. and the percent of actual size. This can be beneficial if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. By creating named settings within the template. and click Open. You can also create named settings for printing to a DWF writer. and click OK. select the first printer for which you want to create named settings. 36 When you have completed the schedule. 34 Under Name. 31 Navigate to the directory that contains the tag you want to load. paper placement.
Create named print settings
1 Click File menu ➤ Print. click OK. 30 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.
Create multi-category schedules
32 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Setup. 38 Proceed to the final exercise. and add them to your default template file. you need only select a setting. click Schedule/Quantities.
Creating Named Print Settings
In this exercise. you can set options such as sheet sizes.
3 Under Settings. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are included under Available fields. and print.After you have created the multi-category tags within the Family Editor. you create named print settings. 4 Click Save As. 35 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. 33 Select <Multi-Category> for Category. “Creating Named Print Settings” on page 49.
Creating Named Print Settings | 49
. The tag is now part of the template. enter a name for the schedule. 2 Under Name. For each printer. you can load them into the template.

10 Repeat these steps as needed. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template.rte). and navigate to the location where you saved the template. select Template Files (*. If you need to share this file with others. and create new settings for this printer. You can also set this template as your default template. and click Save. click Setup. The only remaining task is to save it. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF writer.5 In the New dialog.
Use the template
16 To use the template. Your template is complete. 15 Name the template. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. 6 Modify the printer settings.
50 | Chapter 2 Modifying Project and System Settings
. and create additional settings as needed. and click Open. 7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. 14 Under Save as type. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. click New. 19 Click OK. you should save it to a network path. 18 Select the template.
Save the template
12 Click File menu ➤ Save. 11 Click OK when finished. select a different printer.
9 In the Print dialog. click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 17 Select Browse.

you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. loaded components. you modified settings.
Creating Named Print Settings | 51
. 22 Next to Default template file. and saved them to a template. 21 Click the File Locations tab.Set the template as your default template file
20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. This can provide a good starting point for a template. you help ensure the office standards are maintained and reduce repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. By investing the time to individualize your template. 24 Click OK. TIP Another way to create a template is to delete all model geometries from an existing project. In this lesson. click Browse. In addition. and click Open. select it. and save it as a template file. 23 Navigate to the template location.

52 | Chapter 2 Modifying Project and System Settings
.

53
. and Revit Architecture. AutoCAD Architecture.Starting a New Project
3
In this tutorial you begin your structural model in Revit Structure 2008. by importing or linking an existing Autodesk architectural project created in AutoCAD.

NOTE For training purposes. Under Positioning.
Importing/Linking a 2D AutoCAD File
In this lesson. 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog.dwg located in the Imperial folder. 1 In the Project Browser ➤ Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans. you learn how to import or link a 2-dimensional (2D) drawing created in AutoCAD for use as a background. Notice that Level 2 is bold. some structural columns were added to the model at off-grid locations in conjunction with architectural columns. The file becomes view specific and will behave like an annotation.
■
Under Import or Link. However. you learn how to import or link to files from different drawing programs. click the Training Files icon. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. select Black and White. and select i_STR_CSM_Level2. Click Open.
54 | Chapter 3 Starting a New Project
. copy. 4 In the Import/Link dialog. paste. click the Training Files icon. select both Link (instead of import) and Current View Only. and rotate the view as one object. drag. you cannot select individual elements in the linked model. Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open.Importing/Linking Drawing Files
In this lesson. NOTE Selecting Current View Only prevents the DWG file from appearing in all views. you use these columns to complete the structural framing. Open i_RST_CSM_1. The imported file is used as a background template for creating the structural elements of the model.
■ ■ ■
Under Layer/Level Colors. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. In the next tutorial “Creating a Structural Model” on page 67. select Automatically place and Center-to-center. Selecting Link (instead of import) allows you to view.rvt located in the Imperial folder.

Exterior facade outlines. stairs and elevator opening symbols. and a few basic interior walls and doors display in the view.
5 In the drawing area. click the imported/linked file. click to pin the drawing so that it cannot be moved within the drawing area.
7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.
Importing/Linking a 2D AutoCAD File | 55
. 6 On the Options toolbar.

select the Imported Categories tab. expand Views (all). Bind all external reference files (xrefs) to make the architectural data visible to the engineer after export. the file should be prepared as follows:
■ ■
Proxy graphics should be enabled by setting the system variable to 1. Open i_RST_CSM_1. 1 In the Project Browser.
Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture File
In this lesson.dwg. 9 Select Halftone for value of i_STR_CSM_Level2. Before exporting the file from AutoCAD Architecture. 4 In the Import/Link dialog.
■ ■
Under Layer/Level Colors. select both Automatically Place and Origin-to-Origin. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. On the File menu. In the next tutorial. and select i_RST_Import_ADT. some structural columns were added to the model at off-grid locations in conjunction with architectural columns. In the Xref Manager dialog.
10 Click File menu ➤ Close. click the Training Files icon. The halftone of the imported drawing is used as a background for placing columns. select each file and select Insert for Bind Type. a new dataset is supplied. select Invert Colors.8 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog. Under Positioning. You can save the open file if you wish.
■
Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. “Creating a Structural Model” on page 67. you learn how to import a 3-dimensional (3D) drawing created in AutoCAD Architecture for use as a background.dwg located in the Imperial folder. In the next tutorial. and expand Structural Plans.rvt located in the Imperial folder. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog.
56 | Chapter 3 Starting a New Project
. “Creating a Structural Model” on page 67. and select the latest available format. select Export to AutoCAD. and click OK.
NOTE For training purposes. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click the Training Files icon. Notice that Level 2 is bold. you use these columns to complete the structural framing.

■
Click Open. and click OK. click drawing area. click the Imported Categories tab.
5 In the drawing area. click the imported/linked file. and a few basic interior walls and doors display in the view. to pin the drawing so that it cannot be moved within the Revit Structure
7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.
Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture File | 57
. 9 Select Halftone for value of i_RST_Import_ADT. stairs. 8 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog. 6 On the Options toolbar.dwg. and elevator opening symbols.
Exterior facade outlines.

Under Constraints. 12 On the Options toolbar. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 Close the Element Properties dialog.
11 In the drawing area. Click OK.1' 0" for Base Offset. click
. click the linked file.The halftone of the imported drawing is used as a background for placing columns. do the following:
■ ■
.
Notice the column adjusts to the change.
13 Select any column. and on the Option Bar.
10 On the View toolbar. click Partial Explode. enter .
58 | Chapter 3 Starting a New Project
. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close.

In the next tutorial.
Linking a Revit Architecture file
3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. “Creating a Structural Model” on page 67.You can save the open file if desired.rvt located in the Imperial folder.
Linking a Revit Architecture File
In this exercise. you learn how to link to a 3-dimensional (3D) drawing created in Revit Architecture for use as a background.
Notice that Level 2 is bold. select a template file. 4 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog. 2 In the New Project dialog. walls. and click OK.
Open a new project
1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 6 Click Open. under Positioning. You can copy grids. and floors from the original design and monitor any changes made to those elements. click the Training Files icon. select Automatically Place and Origin-to-Origin. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. columns. 5 In the Add Link dialog. levels. You also learn how to use the Copy/Monitor feature to provide project coordination between architects and structural engineers. a new dataset is supplied. select Project under Create New. and select i_STR_CSM_Revit.
Linking a Revit Architecture File | 59
.

click drawing area.
60 | Chapter 3 Starting a New Project
. and a few basic interior walls and doors display in the view. This is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. stairs and elevator opening symbols. 8 In the drawing area.Exterior facade outlines. click Options. click the linked file. The Design Bar changes to Copy/Monitor mode
Setting options
12 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Options toolbar.
7 Enter ZF. to pin the drawing so that it cannot be moved within the Revit Structure
10 Click Tools menu ➤ Copy/Monitor ➤ Select Link. 11 Click the imported Revit drawing.

columns need to be split at each level. click Copy.
Copying grids
16 In the Project Browser. Each tab provides various parameters that can be set for that specific element. A column may span from level 1 to level 10 of a structure and may present a problem when the analytical model is generated. To select more than one grid. under Structural Plans. click Multiple on the Options toolbar. and Floors). 18 Click the grid to be copied/monitored. click the Columns tab. When finished.The Copy/Monitor Options dialog opens. Elements available for monitoring are separated into 5 categories (Levels. 15 Set the other parameter as desired. you can exclude element types you do not want to copy. select Split Columns by Levels. and the New Type for the corresponding element available in the template selected. Columns. NOTE Architectural columns typically extend through multiple layers of a model. Therefore. Walls.
Linking a Revit Architecture File | 61
. select Level 2. while making selections. 13 In the Copy/Monitor Options dialog. Also. under Additional Copy Parameters. On each tab the Original Type column identifies the type for the Revit Architecture file. press Ctrl. Grids. 14 In the Columns dialog. click OK to close the Copy/Monitor Options Dialog. 17 On the Copy/Monitor Design Bar.

press Ctrl. 20 On the Copy/Monitor Design Bar. and that the type from the new project will be used. The warning can be ignored.NOTE If you are prompted that the element type already exists in the project. an eyeball symbol is displayed to indicate a relationship with the original element. NOTE If you are prompted that the element type already exists in the project. click Multiple on the Options toolbar.
62 | Chapter 3 Starting a New Project
. click OK. 21 Click the level to be copied/monitored. and that the type from the new project will be used. under Elevations (Building Elevation). click Copy.
After you select the grid.
NOTE A warning message may indicate that the loaded type has been renamed. click OK. and select each level.
Copying levels
19 In the Project Browser. To select more than one level. double-click Building Elevation.

click Finish Mode. The warning can be ignored. and select each element. select Level 1. click Multiple on the Options toolbar. The warning can be ignored.
NOTE A warning message may indicate that the loaded type has been renamed. and on the Options Bar. press Ctrl. 25 On the Design bar. 23 On the Copy/Monitor Design Bar. To select more than one element. NOTE If you are prompted that the element type already exists in the project.After you select each level. an eyeball symbol is displayed to indicate a relationship with the original element. and columns
22 In the Project Browser. click Copy. floors.
Linking a Revit Architecture File | 63
. 24 Click the structural elements to be copied/monitored.
Copying structural walls. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. After selecting each element. under Structural Plans. an eyeball symbol is displayed to indicate a relationship with the original element. and that the type from the new project will be used.
Change the structural usage of the copied elements
26 Select a structural wall to be copied/monitored. select Bearing for Structural Usage. . click OK.
NOTE A warning message may indicate that the loaded type has been renamed. and click OK.

click the Revit tab. so that Revit Structure will enable the analytical projection plane feature for those elements. and on the Option Bar.
NOTE For all copied/monitored structural walls.
■
Click OK. and click OK.
Manage Links
30 Click File menu ➤ Manage Links.
64 | Chapter 3 Starting a New Project
. and floors. Links will appear in the file they are linked into. columns.
The linked Revit file is displayed.28 Select a floor to be copied/monitored. 31 In the Manage Links dialog. The link will not follow the host if it becomes linked into another file.
■
Select Overlay. click Reference Type. 32 In the Manage Links dialog. Select Attachment to make a link visible when its host document is linked into another file.
33 Click File menu ➤ Close. the structural usage parameter must be changed in the Element Properties dialog. click
. check the value for Structural.
29 In the Element Properties dialog.

You can save the open file if you wish.
Linking a Revit Architecture File | 65
. a new dataset is supplied. In a later tutorial. In the next tutorial. The coordination monitor function provides notification that updates have occurred. 34 Proceed to the next tutorial. “Creating a Structural Model” on page 67. the updated Revit Architecture file is reloaded into Revit Structure. “Project Coordination” on page 307.NOTE All copied elements are monitored for possible changes.

66 | Chapter 3 Starting a New Project
.

you create a structural model using the tools available in Revit Structure 2008.
67
.Creating a Structural Model
4
In this chapter.

Creating a Structural Model
In this lesson. you begin by adding columns from Ground Level to Level 2. You also learn how to splice the columns.
4 Select the left vertical grid line. You copy columns and use the paste-align command to add structure to other levels. the imported drawing is a halftone. you add horizontal framing to an area of Level 2. click as shown.rvt located in the Imperial folder. which you use as a background drawing for placing columns. click the Training Files icon. 3 On the Options Bar.
68 | Chapter 4 Creating a Structural Model
.
Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing
In this exercise. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the structural model
2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. After you copy columns. Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. and then copy this framing to other levels. click Grid. click .
. Open i_RST_CSM_Grids.
1 On the View toolbar.

The last vertical grid is K. Notice it is grid L. 6 Select the next vertical grid line to the right of grid line A.
Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing | 69
.
9 On the View toolbar. Zoom in and out as needed. 7 Select the remaining vertical grid lines moving from left to right. and enter A. change the value to J. 5 Click the value in the grid head.
As you select subsequent grid lines.Notice the grid line is highlighted with a blue value within the grid head. Notice it is labeled B. and draw a zoom region around the upper-right corner of the structural
10 Select the upper horizontal grid line. they are labelled in alphabetical sequence. 8 When you get to grid I. click model.
.

and enter 1 for the new value. 16 On the View toolbar. The bottom grid should be grid 5. click Grid. click . click .
17 On the Design Bar. 18 On the Options Bar.11 Click the blue value within the grid line L head. 13 Select the remaining 3 horizontal grids.
19 Click the column as shown to select the arc start point. and draw a zoom box around the atrium as shown.
14 On the Design Bar.
Draw a grid using the arc tool
15 Enter ZF (keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit).
70 | Chapter 4 Creating a Structural Model
. 12 Select the next grid line below grid 1. click Modify. Notice that the sequencing has adjusted from alphabetical to numeric.

21 Click the column as shown to set the arc radius.20 Click the column as shown to select the arc endpoint.
Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing | 71
.

72 | Chapter 4 Creating a Structural Model
. and select the grid.
Extend grid
23 Drag the arc start point approximately as shown. click Modify.22 On the Design Bar.
24 Drag the arc endpoint approximately as shown.

Place columns at grid intersections
1 Enter ZF.
Adding Structural Columns
In this exercise. These columns extend from an elevation to a splice elevation just above Level 2. You can save the open file if you wish. click the Training Files icon. a new dataset is supplied.
Adding Structural Columns | 73
. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. “Adding Structural Columns” on page 73. you load a new column type from the Revit Structure Library and add columns at each grid intersection. In the next exercise.25 Click File menu ➤ Close. Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt located in the Imperial folder. Open i_RST_CSM_Add_Columns.

NOTE When you use the Grid Intersection tool to place columns. Notice that columns are placed at each grid intersection.
74 | Chapter 4 Creating a Structural Model
. 4 In the Options Bar. NOTE If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar does not display. click . click Structural Column. right-click in the Design Bar. 5 Select the entire grid by drawing a pick box around it. click Finish.Level 2 plan view
2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Revit Structure places the tops of the columns at the current level and the bases of the columns at the level below. 3 In the Type Selector.
6 On the Options Bar. 7 Press ESC. select W-Wide Flange-Column: W10x33. there are a few extraneous columns on grid line intersections that are exterior to the structure. and click Modelling. In addition.

11 In the Element Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■
Under Constraints. and double-click South Elevation. and then specify the endpoint aligned with the existing level heads on the right side.
Notice the new level is named Level 3. Click OK. J1. H5. 17 On the Design Bar. 16 Use the same method to create Level 4. TIP You may have to zoom into the grid intersection to right-click one of the columns.
Create new levels
13 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). H1.
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
G1. K2 G5. which are outside of the structure footprint. click Modify. K4 A5. click Modify. J2. enter 2' 0" for Base Offset. Level 3 should be 10' 0" above Level 2. and click Select All Instances. and press DELETE. H2. enter 2' 0" for Top Offset.8 Select the columns listed below. 15 On the left side of the elevation. A new structural plan view by the same name is also created and listed within the Project Browser. click Level. 19 Adjust the zoom settings so you can select the grid control below the grid head. K1 G2.
Adding Structural Columns | 75
.
Adjust location of the grid
18 Select grid head A. NOTE If necessary. K5 K3. Level 4 should be 10' 0" above Level 3 with an elevation of 30' 0". B5.
10 On the Options Bar. C5
Specify base and top of column elevations
9 Right-click the column located at C2. specify a start point for the third level at a distance of 10' 0" above Level 2. J5. Under Constraints. you can adjust the height by clicking the temporary dimension and modifying the level elevation. click
.
12 On the Design Bar.

20 Drag the grid control above Level 4 as shown. 31 Proceed to the next exercise.
24 In the Filter dialog. select Level 3 and Level 4. under Elevations (Building Elevation). select Structural Columns.
Copy the columns to new levels
21 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 23 On the Options Bar. You can save the open file if you wish. TIP Press and hold CTRL when making multiple selections. and click OK.
76 | Chapter 4 Creating a Structural Model
. click Modify. 22 Draw a pick box around the entire structural model. 26 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. under Structural Plans. 28 On the Design Bar. 25 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 29 In the Project Browser.
Spliced columns display from Ground Level to Level 4
30 Click File menu ➤ Close. a new dataset is supplied. click . double-click Level 2. double-click South Elevation. click Check None. In the next exercise. All of the structural columns in the model remain selected. “Adding Horizontal Framing” on page 77. 27 In the Select Levels dialog.

double-click Level 2. click Beam. click . 7 On the Options Bar. Specify Girder for Usage. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and draw a zoom box around the east area of the structure as shown.
5 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■
Specify Level 2 for Plane. 3 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 8 On the Design Bar. click the Training Files icon.
Add girders
4 On the View toolbar. under Structural Plans.rvt located in the Imperial folder. click Finish.
Adding Horizontal Framing | 77
. Click Grid. Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open.Adding Horizontal Framing
In this exercise. you frame 4 bays of Level 2 by adding horizontal members and a steel deck. In the left pane of the Open dialog.
6 Select grid lines H and J.
Specify beam type
1 In the Project Browser. delete the 2 small beam sections between grid lines 4 and 5. TIP Place the cursor over a grid to display the grid name in a tooltip. 9 On grids H and J. Open i_RST_CSM_Add_Framing. select W-Wide Flange: W18x40.

For Beam Type. you can select the section crop view and drag its borders to adjust the extents of the view. 6 In the Element Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Under Constraints. enter 6' 0". 9 Select the girder between H3 and J3. Notice the copied beams on Levels 3 and 4.
Sketch the beam system
1 In the Project Browser.
7 Click OK. click Sketch. select Center. 8 On the Design Bar. Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Beam System. click the Training Files icon. For Spacing. you add beam systems to Level 2. a new dataset is supplied. 5 On the Design Bar. 2 Zoom in on the east side of the structure where you previously added the beams. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. select Fixed Distance for Layout Rule. You can save the open file if you wish. Open i_RST_CSM_Add_Beam_System. double-click Level 2.
Adding Beam Systems
In this exercise. “Adding Beam Systems” on page 79.rvt located in the Imperial folder. 4 On the Options Bar.NOTE If necessary. Then select the 3 girders that surround the upper-left bay as shown. In the next exercise. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close.
Adding Beam Systems | 79
. under Structural Plans. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Structural Beam System Properties. click Pick Supports. For Justification. select W-Wide Flange: W14x22. Under Pattern.

NOTE The 2 short lines adjacent to the H3-J3 girder represent the beam system direction. click Finish Sketch.
80 | Chapter 4 Creating a Structural Model
. 10 On the Design Bar. In the next step you edit the beam direction. click Beam Direction.
12 On the Design Bar. The longitudinal axis of the beam system members will be placed parallel to these lines. 11 Select the vertical girder between J2 and J3 as shown.

NOTE In the image above and all subsequent images. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule. specify 2. For Beam Type. For Number of Lines. select the girder between J2 and J3 as shown.
Adding Beam Systems | 81
. select W-Wide Flange: W14x22.
14 When specifying the beam direction. Under Pattern. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. 13 Use the same method to sketch a beam system for the bay to the right using the following beam system property values in the Element Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■
Under Constraints. the framing tag visibility has been turned off for training purposes.

15 On the Design Bar. 19 On the Options Bar. enter -0' 7" for Elevation.
82 | Chapter 4 Creating a Structural Model
. click .
20 In the Element Properties dialog:
■ ■
Under Constraints. click Beam System. under Structural Plans. click Finish Sketch. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule. Under Pattern. 18 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 17 Zoom in on the east side of the structure where you previously added the beams. double-click Level 2.
Automatically create a beam system
16 In the Project Browser.

Click OK.
24 Click to place the beam system. select W-Wide Flange: W14x22.■ ■ ■
For Number of Lines. click Modify.
Adding Beam Systems | 83
. specify 3. For Beam Type.
21 Select the top girder in the lower-left bay as shown.
22 Click to place the beam system. 23 Select the top girder in the lower-right bay as shown. 25 On the Design Bar.

84 | Chapter 4 Creating a Structural Model
. You will need to cycle through some of the elements in your model by pressing TAB as explained above. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard.Copy the beam systems to levels above
26 Hold the cursor over grid line H of the lower-left beam system. and click Select All Instances. NOTE A beam system displays with dashed lines as shown. Be sure that you have selected a beam system (not just a beam) when copying elements to other levels. and press TAB until the beam system highlights.
Beam system displays with dashed lines
27 Right-click on the beam system.

“Adding a Composite Deck” on page 85. double-click Level 2. Open i_RST_CSM_Add_Deck. click Lines.
5 Click OK. Under Constraints. Notice the copied beam systems. 31 Click OK. In the next exercise. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 On the Design Bar. a new dataset is supplied. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under 3D Views. select 3" LW Concrete on 2" Metal Deck. 32 In the Project Browser. click Slab. select Level 3 and Level 4.Perspective. specify -0' 2" for Height Offset from Level. click the Training Files icon. you a composite deck to Level 2. under Structural Plans.
Adding a Composite Deck | 85
.rvt located in the Imperial folder.
Add composite deck
1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Element Properties dialog:
■ ■
For Type. double-click East Sections . Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. 6 On the Design Bar.
Adding a Composite Deck
In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog.
33 Click File menu ➤ Close.29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. click Floor Properties. You can save the open file if you wish.

7 Sketch lines along the structure perimeter using the interior-most model lines of the glazing as snap points.
Copy the slab to other levels
9 Select the slab. 10 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. The filled half-arrows of this symbol represent the span of the deck. 11 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. and then sketch along the girders as shown. click Finish Sketch. Revit Structure provides a deck span direction symbol when the deck is placed.
8 On the Design Bar.
86 | Chapter 4 Creating a Structural Model
.

13 On the Design Bar.Perspective. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. In the next exercise. under Structural Plans.
Adding Bracing
In this exercise. Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt located in the Imperial folder. double-click Level 2. 14 In the Project Browser. click the Training Files icon. you add vertical bracing to a bay.
Create the framing elevation
1 In the Project Browser.12 In the dialog. and click OK. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. click Modify. In the left pane of the Open dialog. a new dataset is supplied. under 3D Views. double-click East Section . click Framing Elevation.
15 Click File menu ➤ Close. You can save the open file if you wish.
Adding Bracing | 87
. select Level 3 and Level 4. Open i_RST_CSM_Add_Bracing. “Adding Bracing” on page 87.

■
88 | Chapter 4 Creating a Structural Model
. click to place the framing elevation symbol in the direction shown. select L-Angle: L8x6x5/8. Use the Status Bar to see the snap point. 7 Add a brace from Level 2 to Level 3:
■
Enter SE (keyboard shortcut for snap to endpoint). 6 In the Type Selector.3 Move the cursor on or near the grid line between 4H and 4J. double-click Elevation 1-a. and then click the midpoint of the beam at Level 3 for the endpoint. Enter SM (keyboard shortcut for snap to midpoint). and when it highlights. 5 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Elevations (Interior Elevations). and then click the left endpoint of the Level 2 beam for the start point.
4 In the Project Browser. click Brace.

NOTE If necessary.Perspective. In the next exercise.
Adding Bracing | 89
.
9 Repeat these steps to add bracing from Level 3 to Level 4. double-click East Section .
10 In the Project Browser. a new dataset is supplied. You can save the open file if you wish.
Notice the braces in the back/right of the structural model. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. under 3D Views. you can select the section crop view and adjust the left/right extents to see the columns on grids H and J. 8 Use the same method for the opposite brace.

5 On the Options Bar:
■ ■
Select Chain. For Depth.
Add shear walls
1 In the Project Browser. Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 Zoom in on the east stair in grid location F3-G4. Open i_RST_CSM_Add_Shear_Walls.
3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click the Training Files icon. under Structural Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog.10" Concrete. specify Ground Level. double-click Level 2.12 Proceed to the next exercise. you create shear walls that surround one of the stairwells. select Basic Wall: Exterior .
90 | Chapter 4 Creating a Structural Model
. 4 In the Type Selector. “Adding Shear Walls” on page 90. click Structural Wall.
Adding Shear Walls
In this exercise.rvt located in the Imperial folder.

Adding Isolated Foundations | 91
. You can save the open file if you wish. “Adding Isolated Foundations” on page 91. 12 Proceed to the next exercise.
TIP After sketching the walls. Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. tracing over the centerline of the walls in the imported drawing file as shown. click
.
10 In the Element Properties dialog.rvt located in the Imperial folder. specify Up to level: Level 4 for Top Constraint. 7 Press ESC twice to finish placing walls. In the next exercise. you can use the TAB key to highlight the entire wall chain and select it with one click.
9 On the Options Bar. a new dataset is supplied. Open i_RST_CSM_Add_Foundation. and click OK. click the Training Files icon. you can select a wall and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to nudge the wall to a particular location. under Constraints. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add isolated foundations to column locations.
Adding Isolated Foundations
In this exercise.6 Sketch 4 walls. 8 Select all 4 walls. TIP During selection. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close.

Place isolated foundations
1 In the Project Browser. under Structural Plans.
92 | Chapter 4 Creating a Structural Model
.
6 On the Options Bar.
7 In the Element Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■
Under Constraints. 2 On the View toolbar. Click OK. Under Analytical Model. 11 In the drawing area. click the midpoints of the columns where you have added horizontal framing to place an isolated footing at each location. select Footing-Rectangular: 72"x48"x18". 10 In the Type Selector.
3 Draw a pick box around all structural elements as shown. do the following:
■ ■ ■
Click Check None.
8 In the Project Browser. double-click Ground Level. under Structural Plans. select Level 2 for Top Vertical Projection. click
.
5 In the Filter dialog. click . and draw a zoom box around the east area of the structure. Click OK. enter 0' 0" for Base Offset. click
. double-click Level 2. Under Analytical Model.
4 On the Options Bar. Select Structural Columns. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Ground Level for Bottom Vertical Projection.

openings. 12 On the Design Bar. foundation. a new dataset is supplied. the footing is placed at Ground Level.NOTE In the following image.
Completing the Structural Model | 93
. and concrete wall framing.
Completing the Structural Model
In previous lessons. the curtain wall visibility was altered for training purposes. You can save the open file if you wish. under 3D Views.Perspective. In your dataset. double-click East Section . you complete the structural model. adding horizontal framing. “Completing the Structural Model” on page 93. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. click Modify. In the next exercise. bracing. In the exercises that follow. you have added columns and horizontal framing to your model.
14 Click File menu ➤ Close. the imported DWG file does not display in this view. 13 In the Project Browser.
By default.

5 Draw a pick box around all the grids. 6 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. complete the framing of this bay as shown.
9 Using the framing skills you have learned in previous exercises. TIP You can also press CTRL and select all grid lines manually. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the model. under Structural Plans. Use the W-Wide Flange: W18x40 beam type for the 5 new beams. as well as cantilevers and outriggers. Click Grid. click Beam.
NOTE Although you previously added girders to the structural model. 3 In the Type Selector. you complete the horizontal framing of Level 2 by adding girders and beam systems. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open.
Manually add additional beams
8 On the View toolbar. Open i_RST_CSM_2. Specify Girder for Usage.Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2
In this exercise. click Finish.
94 | Chapter 4 Creating a Structural Model
.
Add girders using the grid tool
1 In the Project Browser. click . click the Training Files icon. double-click Level 2. using the grid tool does not duplicate girders at these locations. 4 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■
Specify Level 2 for Plane. select W-Wide Flange: W18x40. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt located in the Imperial folder.

Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 | 95
.10 Add girders between the perimeter columns that were not captured by the Grid tool. zooming in and out as needed:
■
Above grid line 1 between B and E.
■
Between the column below the midpoint of H2-H3 and the corner of the stairwell shear walls. Add beam chains to the following locations.
■
Around the perimeter of the rotunda.

for z-Direction Justification. Under Constraints. click . 13 Right-click.
15 In the Element Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■
Under Constraints.
■
Between the lower-left corner between A4 and D5.
Add a beam system to the bay
16 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.
Specify the top of steel
11 On the View toolbar. .■
Between the column just above K4 and over to F5. enter -0' 7". for z-Direction Offset Value. select Other. click model. click . click Beam System. Click OK. 14 On the Options Bar. 17 On the Options Bar.
96 | Chapter 4 Creating a Structural Model
. and draw a zoom box around the bay in the upper-left corner of the
12 Select the girder between A2 and B2. and click Select All Instances.

Sketch a beam system
21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.
Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 | 97
. For Number of Lines. click Beam System. click . Select W-Wide Flange: W14x22 for Beam Type. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule.18 In the Element Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Under Constraints. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule. Click OK.
23 In the Element Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■
Under Constraints. enter 3. For Number of Lines. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. Under Pattern. 22 On the Options Bar. Under Pattern. enter 3. Select W-Wide Flange: W14x22 for Beam Type.
19 In the bay adjacent to the upper-left stairwell. select the top girder as shown.
20 Click to place the beam system.

click Finish Sketch.
98 | Chapter 4 Creating a Structural Model
. trace the outline of the bay as shown. ignore it. click Sketch.
24 On the Options Bar.
27 Select the beam that spans the middle of the stairwell and delete it.
26 On the Sketch Design Bar. If a warning appears indicating that pinned objects were deleted.■
Click OK. 25 Using the sketch tool.

Rather than having you add beam systems to the dozens of bays within this model. a new dataset is provided in the next exercise with the beam systems added as shown. “Adding Cantilevered Beams” on page 99. Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. beam systems have been added to all bays. The visibility of structural framing tags has been turned off in the Level 2 plan view. Open i_RST_CSM_3.rvt located in the Imperial folder.
Adding Cantilevered Beams
In this exercise.
In this new dataset. click Close. click the Training Files icon.
Adding Cantilevered Beams | 99
. 2 On the View toolbar. In addition. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the model. under Structural Plans.28 On the File menu. click . the base offset of the structural columns on the lower level has been set to zero so they will attach to the footings. you add cantilevered members and outriggers to Level 2. the structural framing on Levels 3 and 4 (that you built in the first lesson of this tutorial) has been deleted for training purposes. NOTE You can save the open file if you wish.
Add cantilevered members and outriggers
1 In the Project Browser. Lastly.
29 Proceed to the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Level 2.

Click OK.
7 Move the cursor to the left and select a perpendicular point on the inside face of the exterior glazing as the endpoint. click .
100 | Chapter 4 Creating a Structural Model
. for z-Direction Justification.3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. enter -0' 7".
5 In the Element Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■
Under Constraints. select Other. for z-Direction Offset Value. 4 On the Options Bar. click Beam.
Add cantilevers at columns
6 Select column A1 as the beam start point. Under Constraints.

Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck
In this exercise. click the Training Files icon. 10 In the Type Selector. You can save the open file if you wish. a new dataset is supplied. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. select W-Wide Flange: W18x40.
Add an outrigger
9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Beam. In the next exercise.
Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck | 101
. add a cantilever beginning at column A2.
Add intermediate cantilevers
13 Sketch intermediate beams between the outrigger and the beam between A1 and A2 as shown. click Close. 11 Select the left endpoint of the cantilever at A1 as start point of the outrigger.
14 On the File menu. 12 Select the left endpoint of the adjacent cantilever at A2 as the endpoint of the outrigger. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add a concrete slab with a metal deck to the model. Dataset
■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open.8 Using the same method. “Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck” on page 101.

you can use a combination of lines including. Garage Level-1. 4 In the Element Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■
For Floor Type. Roof. and arced. under Structural Plans. sketched.■
Open i_RST_CSM_4. 6 Sketch lines along the structure perimeter using the interior lines of the glazing as snap points.rvt located in the Imperial folder. straight. and Foundation. select 3" LW Concrete on 2" Metal Deck. the following new levels were added: 5. 1 In the Project Browser. click Floor Properties. picked. click Slab. 6. Click OK. 3 On the Design Bar. Use Trim/Extend to clean up line intersections and close gaps. additional cantilever beams and outriggers were added to the model.
102 | Chapter 4 Creating a Structural Model
. In addition.
In this dataset.
5 On the Design Bar. specify -0' 2". click Lines. The pre-existing columns were paste-aligned to the roof level. 7. For Height Offset from Level. When sketching this deck. double-click Level 2. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck | 103
. “Adding Shafts” on page 104.
10 Click File menu ➤ Close. You can save the open file if you wish. a new dataset is supplied. 11 Proceed to the next exercise.
7 Click Finish Sketch. select Chain on the Options Bar. In the next exercise. 8 On the View toolbar.TIP To sketch lines along the lower arced wall. and sketch a chain of continuous line segments.
9 Enter SD (keyboard shortcut for Shading with Edges). click .

5 On the Design Bar. 3 Zoom around the stairway in grid location F3-G4. use the View Control Bar to make the change. Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. 6 Select the 4 walls surrounding the stairwell as shown.rvt located in the Imperial folder. Open i_RST_CSM_Adding_Shafts. select Foundation. click Pick Walls. If it is not. For Top Offset.
These settings ensure that the shaft extends through the structure without penetrating the roof or the foundation. For Base Constraint. enter -1' 0". do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
For Top Constraint.Adding Shafts
In this exercise. double-click Level 2. 8 In the Element Properties dialog.
104 | Chapter 4 Creating a Structural Model
. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. click Properties. click Finish Sketch. you add 2 shaft openings on Level 2. select Up to level: Roof. under Constraints. 2 Enter WF (keyboard shortcut for Wireframe). under Structural Plans. 9 On the Design Bar.
Add first stairway shaft opening
1 In the Project Browser. For Base Offset.
7 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE Make sure this view is using the Wireframe model graphics display style. click the Training Files icon. Click OK. enter 1' 0".

click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. click . select Up to level: Roof.
TIP When sketching the shaft. For Base Offset. 12 On the Design Bar. click Properties. For Base Constraint. Use the Trim tool to clean up gaps and intersections.Add second stairway shaft opening
10 Zoom around the stairway in grid location A1-B2. use the Lines tool in combination with the Pick option and select the external face of the walls imported with the DWG file. do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
For Top Constraint. under Constraints. click Lines. enter 1' 0". enter 1' 0". select Foundation.
16 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Design Bar. For Top Offset.
Adding Shafts | 105
. Click OK. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 Sketch the opening surrounding the stairwell as shown. 17 On the View toolbar.

click Check None. and Floors. 7 In the Select Levels dialog.rvt located in the Imperial folder. and then click OK. “Duplicating Framing” on page 106.
4 In the Filter dialog.
Copy Level 2 framing and deck
1 In the Project Browser. and Other). 5 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. You can save the open file if you wish.
106 | Chapter 4 Creating a Structural Model
. under Structural Plans. click the Training Files icon.
Duplicating Framing
In this exercise. select Structural Framing (Girder. double-click Level 2. click . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Structural Beam Systems. 2 Enter ZF. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. click . and draw a pick box around the entire model. and Level 5. 8 On the View toolbar. In the next exercise. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. you copy Level 2 framing to other levels. Open i_RST_CSM_Duplicate_Framing. Joist. a new dataset is supplied. and then click OK. Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. Level 4. select Level 3.18 Click File menu ➤ Close. 3 On the Options Bar.

14 On the View toolbar. double-click Level 5.
NOTE In the image shown above.
Duplicating Framing | 107
. 12 Delete the atrium arc and use the Trim tool to close the gap as shown.Copied levels with stair openings
Modify roof and framing
9 In the Project Browser. the weight of the sketch lines was increased for training purposes. under Structural Plans. click . 10 Select the floor.
15 Select all framing and columns as shown. 11 On the Options Bar. click Edit. click Finish Sketch. 13 On the Design Bar. and draw a zoom box around the former atrium area.

Click OK.
23 Add cantilever beams and outriggers as shown to complete the new corner.
18 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. for z-Direction Offset Value. click Beam. for z-Direction Justification. select Other. specify Girder for Usage. 20 On the Options Bar. 21 On the Options Bar.
16 Press DELETE. Under Constraints.
108 | Chapter 4 Creating a Structural Model
. click . select W-Wide Flange: W18x40.NOTE Hold the CTRL key down as you make multiple selections.
Add cantilever beams and outriggers
17 Zoom in on the former atrium area as shown. Ignore the warning that pinned objects were deleted. enter -0' 7". 19 On the Type Selector.
22 In the Element Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■
Under Constraints.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab
In this new dataset. In this exercise.
Notice the atrium columns on Levels 5 through 7 need to be deleted.37 On the View toolbar. 38 Click File menu ➤ Close. Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. and create a custom roof type with tapered insulation. and the footings added at the beginning of the tutorial have been deleted. In the next exercise. “Adding a Shape-Modified Slab” on page 110. This is done for you in the next dataset. click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add a shape-modified slab to the new roof framing. You can save the open file if you wish. In this exercise. 39 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt located in the Imperial folder. beam systems have been added to the roof level to support a new shape-modified slab. a new dataset is supplied. you create a shape-modified slab above Level 7. Open i_RST_CSM_5.
110 | Chapter 4 Creating a Structural Model
. click
.

click Slab. 6 On the Design Bar.
Notice the structural framing is sloped to provide for roof drainage.Open the roof framing section view
1 In the Project Browser. under Structural Plans. 2 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof. click . double-click Roof. under Structural Plans.
Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 111
.
Create new roof type
3 In the Project Browser. click Floor Properties. and draw a zoom box around the upper roof framing as shown.
5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click Roof. 4 On the View toolbar.

for Structure. 12 In the Element Properties dialog.Tapered Insulation. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. for Layer 2. .4" Rigid Insulation. click Edit. for Type.
17 Enter ZF. click Duplicate. select 1 1/2" Metal Roof Deck . enter 1 1/2" Metal Roof Deck . click Lines. clear Variable.
112 | Chapter 4 Creating a Structural Model
. under Constraints. click .
16 Click the beam on the upper-left corner of the structure so the offset is placed on the outside of the beam as shown.
Trace the outline of the roof
13 On the View toolbar. and click OK. and click Edit/New. click 14 On the Design Bar. 18 Using the same method. for Height Offset From Level. click additional lines that outline the roof as shown below. enter 3' 5 1/2". under Construction. 9 In the Name dialog. and click OK. 8 In the Type Properties dialog.7 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 In the Edit Assembly dialog. and click OK twice. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the structure. 15 On the Options Bar. and enter 5" for Offset.

22 In the Project Browser.
Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 113
. 24 Select the slab. click Pick Supports. click Finish Sketch.
Edit the slab
23 In the Project Browser.Atrium. and then click each additional line to complete the roof outline as shown. click
.19 On the Toolbar. double-click Roof.
Each line will be extended and trimmed as it is selected.
20 With the Trim/Extend tool selected. click Edit. 21 On the Design bar. 25 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. double-click 3D . under Structural Plans. under 3D Views. 26 Select specific supports as shown. click one of the sketched lines.

Notice the opening in the shape-modified slab. double-click Roof. under Structural Plans.27 On the Toolbar. click
. click
.
28 With the Trim/Extend tool selected.
114 | Chapter 4 Creating a Structural Model
.
31 On the View toolbar. click one of the sketched lines.
Each line will be extended and trimmed as it is selected. click Finish Sketch.
Pick supports for modifying the slope of the roof slab
32 In the Project Browser.
Notice the slab is not sloped towards the opening in the center of the slab. and then click each additional line to complete the outline of the shape-modified slab as shown. 29 On the Design bar. 30 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the section view.

(Modify Sub-Elements tool). 37 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof. click
(Pick Supports tool). click The corner points of the slab are highlighted.33 Select the slab. click Modify. and on the Options Bar. 36 On the Design bar.
NOTE The Pick Supports tool will create an elevation control point at the end of each of the 6 selected support location lines.
34 On the Options Bar. 38 On the View toolbar. click . and draw a zoom box around the center of the section view.
35 Click each of the 6 roof supports shown below in the order indicated.
Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 115
.

51 On the View toolbar. 48 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof.
Notice the flat portion of the roof is now covered by the slab.
Draw split line to slope the variable layer
50 In the Project Browser. 52 Select the roof (that was just created) as shown.
Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 117
. 49 On the View toolbar. double-click Roof. click . under Structural Plans.Each line will be extended and trimmed as it is selected. click .
47 On the Design bar. and draw a zoom box around the center of the roof as shown
. and draw a zoom box around the center of the section view. click Finish Sketch.

enter 5" for Elevation. to make sure the interior roof boundary is selected.
The corner points of the opening are displayed.
118 | Chapter 4 Creating a Structural Model
.Press TAB. 58 Press ENTER.
55 Press ESC. 53 On the Options Bar. 56 Select the split line that was just created. 57 On the Options Bar. click (Draw Split Lines tool).
54 Sketch a split line as shown.

and on the Design Bar. click .
Join the geometry of the roof types
63 On the Toolbar. 62 On the View toolbar.59 On the Design Bar.
64 Select the existing flat roof to the left of the tapered roof. click Modify. and draw a zoom box around the center of the section view. click Modify.
65 Select the tapered roof. 60 Enter ZF. click (Join Geometry tool).
Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 119
.
Notice the tapered insulation tapers away from the split line support. 61 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof.

68 Proceed to the next exercise.
67 Click File menu ➤ Close.rvt located in the Imperial folder. under Structural Plans. click . under 3D Views.Atrium. 2 On the View toolbar.
Zoom in on the atrium
1 In the Project Browser. Open i_RST_CSM_Curved_Beams. Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.66 In the Project Browser. you add a curved beam to the atrium. click the Training Files icon. double-click 3D . “Adding Curved Beams” on page 120.
Adding Curved Beams
In this exercise. and draw a zoom box around the atrium as shown. a new dataset is supplied. double-click Level 4.
120 | Chapter 4 Creating a Structural Model
. In the next exercise. You can save the open file if you wish.

Place the curved beams
3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.
8 Click the grid line so the beam snaps to the grid. select Chain. and click . select W-Wide Flange: W14 X 22. 5 On the Options Bar. click Beam.
7 Click the column as shown to select the beam endpoint.
Adding Curved Beams | 121
. 4 In the Type Selector.
6 Click the atrium column to select the beam start point as shown.

The beam is placed as shown. place additional curved beams between the atrium columns as shown.
122 | Chapter 4 Creating a Structural Model
.
9 Press ESC twice. 10 Using the same method.

click 27 In the Element Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■
Under Analytical Model.
24 Using the same method. and draw a zoom box around one of the curved beams. Select Use hard-points. Click OK. For Maximum discretized offset. click .
26 Select the beam.
Adding Curved Beams | 125
. place a beam system in the remaining bays of the atrium as shown. . and on the Options Bar. enter 0' 4".The beam system is placed as shown. select Approximate Curve.
Approximate the curve of the analytical model
25 On the View toolbar.

Open i_RST_CSM_Add_Openings.
31 While pressing SHIFT.rvt located in the Imperial folder. you add an opening (doorway) to the structural walls of the stairway. Additional line segments will be added to satisfy the Maximum Discretized Offset parameter. double-click Ground Level. you then copy the opening to each level. click . double-click 3D . click . “Adding an Opening ” on page 126. select Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. and on the View Control Bar. under Structural Plans.Atrium.
126 | Chapter 4 Creating a Structural Model
. 29 Select the floor.
Adding an Opening
In this exercise. 32 Click File menu ➤ Close. In the left pane of the Open dialog.NOTE When hard-points are enabled. In the next exercise. 30 On the View toolbar. click the Training Files icon. and draw a zoom box around the stairway as shown.
Notice the analytical line of the curved beam is represented by segments instead of a single curved line. Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 On the View toolbar. under Structural Plans. a new dataset is supplied. the analytical model will end at points on the curve where other framing members are joined. 1 In the Project Browser. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. You can save the open file if you wish. move the cursor to rotate the view so the curved beams are visible. 28 In the Project Browser.

click Door. click Modify.3 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. 4 Click stairway wall to place the door opening approximately as shown. 6 Select the door opening as shown
Adding an Opening | 127
.
5 On the Design Bar.

click Opening ➤ Opening by Face. you import the revised beam back into the project.
Adding an Opening in a Beam | 129
.
Add an opening (by face) to a single beam
1 In the Project Browser. expand 3D Views. a new dataset is supplied.
Adding an Opening in a Beam
In this exercise. you add an opening to the face of a single beam and add stiffener plates to the beam opening. draw an opening in the beam approximately as shown. Open i_RST_CSM_Add_Opening_in_Beam. click . Finally. Press TAB to make sure you are selecting the beam and not the floor or beam system. “Adding an Opening in a Beam” on page 129. click the Training Files icon. 2 On the View toolbar.16 Click File menu ➤ Close.
3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.rvt located in the Imperial folder. You then add an opening to selected beams by creating an extrusion in the beam family. 4 Select the beam that requires the opening. under Structural Plans. 5 Using the sketch tools. and draw a zoom box around any beam on an upper floor. In the next exercise. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. and double-click 3D View. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. You can save the open file if you wish.

130 | Chapter 4 Creating a Structural Model
. click Finish Sketch. select Linear Stiffener-Plate: Standard. 8 In the Type Selector. click Modify. click Component. 6 On the Design Bar.
10 On the Design Bar. draw a stiffener plate on both horizontal surfaces of the opening as shown.
Add stiffener plates to the opening
7 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar.Make sure the opening forms a closed loop. 9 Using the sketch tool.

In the next exercise. select both stiffener plates. Click OK. click 3 Select the beam. for d. You can save the open file if you wish. “Adding an Opening to a Beam Family” on page 131. Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. 12 On the Options Bar. click . 15 Continue with the next exercise. you open an existing beam family using the Family Editor.
14 Click File menu ➤ Close. click the Training Files icon.rvt located in the Imperial folder. expand 3D Views. under Structural Plans.
Select the beam
1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 3D View. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Open i_RST_CSM_Add_Opening_in_Beam. you load the new family into the project.
Adding an Opening to a Beam Family | 131
. 2 On the View toolbar. enter 0' 2". Finally.
13 In the Element Properties dialog:
■ ■
Under Dimensions.
Adding an Opening to a Beam Family
In this exercise. a new dataset is supplied. You then modify the beam by adding an opening. and draw a zoom box around any beam on a lower floor.Change the stiffener plate properties
11 While pressing CTRL. .

10 Click OK 11 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. and click (Circle). click Edit Family.
13 Press ESC.
8 On the Family Design Bar. 15 Select the circle. under Specify a New Work Plane.
132 | Chapter 4 Creating a Structural Model
. The centerline of the circle is now visible. and select Reference Plane: Center (Front/Back). click located to the left of Offset. The Front elevation of the beam is displayed. and draw a zoom box around the center line of the beam.
12 Click the centerline of the beam. click Name. and double-click Front. click .
Add an opening by extrusion
6 In the Family Project Browser. click Modify. The beam is displayed in a new window. click
. select the Center Mark Visible parameter. 14 On the Family Design Bar. and draw a circle approximately as shown. click Yes to open the W-Wide Flange beam type for editing.
16 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Elevation 1). 5 In the Revit dialog.Open the beam family
4 On the Options Bar. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. 9 In the Work Plane dialog.
7 On the View toolbar.

23 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the circle. click
.
19 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the circle.
22 Select the horizontal centerline reference plane. 20 Press ESC.
NOTE Aligning and locking the centerline of the circle to the reference plane ensures the circle will remain in the center of the beam. click
.
18 Select the vertical centerline reference plane.
25 On the View toolbar. and the select the centerline of the circle as shown. regardless of the length. click . click Finish Sketch. 24 On the Design Bar.17 On the Options Bar. and select the centerline of the circle.
Adding an Opening to a Beam Family | 133
. 21 On the Options Bar.

30 Navigate to a folder of your preference. The extrusion is displayed as a cylinder.rfa.
Extrude the opening
28 Click the right directional arrow.
Load the modified beam family into the project
31 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.
134 | Chapter 4 Creating a Structural Model
. and save the revised beam family file as W-Wide Flange with Opening. select Model Graphic Style: Shading w/Edges. click Load into Projects.26 Select the circle on the beam.
29 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 27 On the View Control toolbar. and slide the cylinder to the right so the extrusion passes through the beam as shown.

rvt located in the Imperial project file. click .
Select the new beam family
37 In the Type Selector.
35 Click on the lowest beam located on the corner of Level 2. select the modified beam type W-Wide Flange with Opening: W18X40. 38 Click in the drawing area.rfa. 34 On the View toolbar. The project file reopens. select i_RST_CSM_Add_Opening_in_Beam.32 In the Load into Projects dialog. 33 Enter ZF. and click OK. and draw a zoom box around the beams for the lower floors.
36 While pressing CTRL.
Adding an Opening to a Beam Family | 135
. select the beams for Levels 2 through 4 as shown.

Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. you add structural walls.rvt located in the Imperial folder. In the next exercise.The modified beams with openings are displayed as shown. under Structural Plans. 40 Continue with the next exercise. click the Training Files icon. Open i_RST_CSM_6.
In this new dataset. You can save the open file if you wish.
Adding Foundation Walls
In this exercise. You add these walls using the Ground Level view. “Adding Foundation Walls” on page 136. In addition.
Sketch the atrium walls
1 In the Project Browser.
136 | Chapter 4 Creating a Structural Model
. a roof with tapered insulation has been added over Level 7. the atrium columns on Levels 6 and 7 have been deleted. double-click Ground Level.
39 Click File menu ➤ Close. a new dataset is supplied. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and walls are generated downward to the Foundation.

13 While pressing SHIFT. move the cursor to rotate the view so the foundation wall is visible as shown. Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. Use the center of the curtain wall lines in the DWG file as an underlay to trace over. select Foundation for Depth. double-click 3D View. Open i_RST_CSM_Piers. 12 On the View toolbar. 11 In the Project Browser. In the next exercise. click . You can save the open file if you wish. under 3D Views. under Structural Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Sketch the remaining foundation walls
8 On the Options Bar.
Adding Piers or Pilasters
In this exercise. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. On portions of the south wall. click the Training Files icon. you can use an arc or a chain of small wall segments. a new dataset is supplied.
Add concrete piers
1 In the Project Browser. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. click . 10 Press ESC twice to finish the wall sketch. you add piers or pilasters and concrete columns at each steel column location. select Concrete-Square-Column: 18x18. 3 In the Type Selector. click Structural Column. and select Chain.rvt located in the Imperial folder.
9 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to add foundation walls to the remaining perimeter of the model.
138 | Chapter 4 Creating a Structural Model
.
14 Click File menu ➤ Close. double-click Ground Level. “Adding Piers or Pilasters” on page 138. 4 In the Options Bar.

a new dataset is supplied. 8 Place the cursor over one of the foundation walls.
10 On the View Control Bar. If you select all the grid lines and add columns to all intersections. You can save the open file if you wish. sloped slabs. TIP You can use the Grid Intersection tool to speed up this process.5 Within the perimeter of the structure model. press TAB.
Concrete pier centered on steel column
6 On the Design Bar. you will still need to manually add piers to the locations that are not on a grid line. double-click 3D View. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. under 3D Views. and concrete beam framing. and select the foundation wall chain. In the next exercise. click Modify. 12 Proceed to the next exercise.
Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels
In this exercise.
Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels | 139
. such as the atrium. 7 In the Project Browser. you frame the garage and ground levels by adding slabs. add a concrete column centered on each steel column location. make sure you delete the columns outside the structure perimeter. click the Temporary Hide/Isolate control. In addition. click Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. The foundation wall is displayed. and click Hide Element. This provides a better view of the new below-grade piers. 9 On the View Control Bar. “Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels” on page 139.

Click OK. double-click 3D View.
5 On the Design Bar. Open i_RST_CSM_7. under Structural Plans. move the cursor to rotate the view so the slab is visible as shown. click Delete Type. In the left pane of the Open dialog. TIP Press TAB to select the wall chain. For Height Offset From Level.Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE When prompted whether you would like the walls that go up to this floor’s level to attach to its bottom. 4 In the Element Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■
For Type.
WARNING If an error dialog displays regarding the span direction component. 1 In the Project Browser. click the Training Files icon. enter 0. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Project Browser.rvt located in the Imperial folder. under 3D Views. If necessary. double-click Ground Level.
10 While pressing SHIFT. select 6" Concrete. 6 Select the exterior face of the foundation walls. use the flip controls to toggle to the exterior face. click Slab.
7 Click Finish Sketch. click . click Pick Walls. 9 On the View toolbar.
140 | Chapter 4 Creating a Structural Model
. click Yes. click Floor Properties.

19 Manually delete the beams added to the atrium as shown. under Structural Plans. 15 Select all grid lines. click Grid. It is most likely a segment that can be deleted or unjoined. This prevents a beam being added between the atrium at G1 and G3. 13 In the Type Selector.
Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels | 141
. 18 Manually add a beam between G3 and G4. click Beam. Resolve the problem by clicking the appropriate solution. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click Ground Level. 17 On the Options Bar. NOTE If you are warned of a problem with keeping elements joined. It will display as selected in the drawing area. 16 Remove grid line G from the selection by pressing SHIFT while selecting the line. select Concrete-Rectangular Beam:16x32. expand the warning and select the framing element. and another between G4 and G5. 14 On the Options Bar.Frame concrete girders
11 In the Project Browser. click Finish.

31 On the Design Bar. 39 Sketch a slope arrow from left to right as shown. 37 Sketch the slab in the southwest exterior corner of the structure as shown.30 While pressing SHIFT. 34 Zoom in around the lower-left corner of the model.
NOTE The foundation walls have been hidden in this view so the girders are visible.
Add the garage entrance exit ramp
32 In the Project Browser. click Modify. move the cursor to rotate the view so the concrete girders are visible as shown.
Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels | 143
. 35 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click Garage Level -1. click the Model Graphics Style control.
38 On the Design Bar. click Lines. click Slope Arrow. 36 On the Design Bar. 33 On the View Control Bar. and click Hidden Line. under Structural Plans. click Slab.

50 In the Work Plane dialog. select Ground Level for Level at Tail. For Height Offset at Tail.
144 | Chapter 4 Creating a Structural Model
. 49 On the Design Bar. 43 In the Project Browser. and draw a zoom box around the ramp. double-click 3D View. select Garage Level-1.
48 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar. For Height Offset at Head. 47 On the View toolbar. enter 0' 6". click Set Work Plane. 44 On the View Control Bar. and select Element Properties. 41 In the Element Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Under Constraints. and click OK. 51 Select the underside face of the existing ramp as shown.
42 On the Design Bar. Click OK. double-click South Elevation. and click Hidden Line. click Beam System.40 Right-click the slope arrow. 45 Zoom in on the lower-left corner to see the ramp. under 3D Views. under Specify a new Work Plane. enter 0. select Pick a plane.
Completed ramp
Add a sloped beam system under the ramp
46 In the Project Browser. click . click Finish Sketch. For Level at Head. under Elevations (Building Elevation). click the Model Graphics Style control.

60 On the View toolbar. 59 In the Project Browser. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule Value. select Structural Beam System Properties. enter 5. 55 On the View toolbar. and zoom in on the ramp.
Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels | 145
. click . Under Pattern. under 3D Views. For Value. and zoom in on the ramp as shown. click Finish Sketch. . Click OK. 53 In the Element Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■
Under Beam Type. under Number of Lines.
58 On the Design Bar.
54 In the Project Browser.52 On the Design Bar. click Lines. click 56 On the Design Bar. under Structural Views. 57 Draw an outline of the ramp as shown. select Ground Level. NOTE Ignore the warning regarding the analytical point of the beam and slab. double-click 3D View. select Concrete-Rectangular Beam: 16 X 32.

63 Select the foundation wall that faces the short edge of the new ramp.
146 | Chapter 4 Creating a Structural Model
. “Placing a Wall Foundation” on page 147. a new dataset is supplied. You can save the open file if you wish. You can immediately draw the rectangular opening. corner to corner as shown. 64 Sketch the opening. click Unjoin Elements. In the next exercise. When you are adding a wall opening.Add a wall opening at the garage entrance
61 On the View toolbar. click Opening ➤ Wall Opening. 65 On the Design Bar. 68 Proceed to the final exercise. click Modify. click . and continue with the next step.
62 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. In this case.
NOTE Depending on where you draw the opening. Notice that you can adjust the opening extents using the controls. there are no drawing tools to select. and zoom in on the wall that faces the end of the new ramp. 66 Select the garage opening. you may get a warning message that elements cannot remain joined.
67 Click File menu ➤ Close.

8 In the Element Properties dialog. click . 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Modify.
Place isolated foundation
10 On the View menu. 2 Enter ZF. For Heel length.
Sketch the continuous foundation
1 In the Project Browser.rvt located in the Imperial folder.
A continuous foundation is added. under Visibility. press TAB until the chain of walls is highlighted. Click OK twice. enter 1' 6". 5 On the Design Bar. and click OK. you add an isolated foundation beneath the piers. click the Training Files icon. double-click Foundation. enter 1' 6". In the left pane of the Open dialog. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click to select the foundation wall chain.Placing a Wall Foundation
In this exercise. click Edit/New. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. 4 Place the cursor over one of the foundation walls. clear Structural Framing. click Visibility/Graphics. you add a continuous foundation beneath the exterior walls of the structural model. 9 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■
Under Dimensions. For Foundation Thickness. under Structural Plans. In addition. for Toe length. click Foundation ➤ Wall. Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open.
Placing a Wall Foundation | 147
. enter 1' 6".
Edit foundation properties
6 Select one of the foundation walls. Open i_RST_CSM_Wall_Foundation.

13 In the Type Selector. In the next tutorial a new dataset is supplied. You can save the open file if you wish. 14 Click the midpoint of each of the concrete columns to place an isolated foundation at each location as shown. 16 In the Project Browser. select Footing-Rectangular: 72"x48"x18". under 3D Views. 17 On the File menu. click Modify. You have completed the Creating a Structural Model tutorial. click Save. “Precast Concrete” on page 149.
18 Proceed to the next tutorial.
15 On the Design Bar.
148 | Chapter 4 Creating a Structural Model
. double-click 3D View.

you add a precast concrete beam system to an existing project. you work with precast concrete components using the tools available in Revit Structure 2008.Precast Concrete
5
In this tutorial. You then modify the precast beam type within the Revit Structure family editor. In the first lesson.
149
.

For Justification. Click OK. enter 0' 1". select Precast-Double Tee: 8' x 20". In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. you add a precast concrete beam system to an existing structure. click the Training Files icon. click . 3 On the Options Bar.
5 Select the top girder on the north side of the structure as shown. select Center. you add a precast beam system to the roof of an existing structure.
Adding a Beam System to the Structure
In this exercise. For Beam Type.rvt located in the Imperial folder. select Clear Spacing. double-click Roof.
4 In the Element Properties dialog. For Clear Spacing. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Open i_RST_Precast_Concrete. under Pattern.Creating a Precast Beam System
In this lesson. click Beam System. under Structural Plans. do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
For Layout Rule.
150 | Chapter 5 Precast Concrete
.

under 3D Views. 8 Navigate to a folder of your preference.
1 On the View Toolbar. you change the construction properties so the beam system will extend to the concrete support beam.
Changing the Beam System Properties
In this exercise. i_RST_Precast-in progress. double-click 3D. and save the project file as i_RST_Precast-in progress.
Changing the Beam System Properties | 151
. NOTE The dotted lines represent the beam system direction. and draw a zoom box around the edge of the beam system as shown. 7 In the Project Browser.6 Click to place the beam system.rvt 9 Proceed to the next exercise.
The beam system is displayed. The longitudinal axis of the beam system members will be placed parallel to these lines.rvt. Dataset
■
Use the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. “Changing the Beam System Properties” on page 151. click
.

enter 0' 5".Notice the gap between the edge of the beam system and the concrete beam. 2 Click one of the precast beams as shown.
3 Right-click the selected beam.
5 In the Element Properties dialog. under Construction.
152 | Chapter 5 Precast Concrete
. click . for Start and End Extension. and click OK. and click Select All Instances. 4 On the Options Bar.

2 In the Project Browser. “Changing the Beam System Clear Spacing” on page 153. you change clear spacing of the beam system to adjust the gap between each beam. under Sections (Building Section). double-click Section 1. 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset
■
Use the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save.
Changing the Beam System Clear Spacing
In this exercise.
Notice the spacing between each precast beam. 3 Select the beam system.
Changing the Beam System Clear Spacing | 153
. i_RST_Precast-in progress. double-click Roof.The beam system now extends to the concrete support beam.rvt. 7 Proceed to the next exercise. under Structural Plans.

4 On the Options Bar. double-click Section 1.
Open the beam type for editing
1 Click one of the precast beams as shown. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save. you open the precast beam within the family editor and add a chamfer to both beam supports. under Sections (Building Section). and click OK. under Construction. i_RST_Precast-in progress. 6 In the Project Browser.
154 | Chapter 5 Precast Concrete
. “Modifying the Precast Beam Family” on page 154. You then import the revised beam back into the project. 8 Proceed to the next lesson.
Notice the clear spacing between each precast beam is removed.
5 In the Element Properties dialog. click
. enter 0' 0".rvt. Dataset
■
Use the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.
Adding a Chamfer to the Beam
In this exercise. you add a chamfer to the existing double-tee beam family. for Clear Spacing.
Modifying the Precast Beam Family
In this lesson.

8 In the Revit dialog.
Open the beam profile
6 In the Family Project Browser. 9 Click View menu ➤ Visibility Graphics. and click Edit. click Yes to open the Double Tee-Profile for editing. click Yes to open the Precast-Double Tee Family for editing. 5 Select the beam. click the Annotations Categories tab. 3 In the Revit dialog. click Edit Family.2 On the Options Bar. click Dimensions and Reference Planes.
4 In the Family Project Browser.
■
Under Visibility. expand Families ➤ Profiles ➤ Double Tee-Profile. 7 Right-click Double Tee-Profile. and double-click Left. 10 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. The beam is displayed in a new window.
Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 155
. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Elevation 1).

and drag them above the top horizontal surface of the beam profile as shown. 14 Draw a horizontal reference plane below the existing plane. and click Modify. 15 Click the reference plane dimension and enter 0' 2".■
Click Apply. and then click OK.
Draw horizontal reference plane
13 On the Design bar. click Ref Plane. click . 12 Select each of the dimensions representing the slope length.
NOTE The dimensions should be visible under normal circumstances but are purposely hidden for this demo.
Zoom in on the left tee of the beam
11 On the View Toolbar.
156 | Chapter 5 Precast Concrete
. and draw a zoom box around the left tee of the beam.
The reference planes and dimensions are now visible.

21 Draw a vertical reference plane to the left of the center line as shown.
24 Press ESC. 17 Select the horizontal reference plane. 18 On the Options Bar. for Is Reference. 25 Use the same technique to draw a vertical reference plane to the right of center as shown.
22 Press ESC.
Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 157
.
19 In the Element Properties dialog. click Ref Plane. under Options. 23 Click the reference plane dimension and enter 0' 2". and click OK. click .
Draw vertical reference planes
20 On the Design Bar.16 Press ESC. select Not a Reference.

for Is Reference.
32 Add a dimension for the horizontal reference plane as shown. click . click Dimension.26 Press CTRL.
31 Repeat for the vertical reference plane on the opposite side as shown.
158 | Chapter 5 Precast Concrete
. and select both vertical reference planes. 30 Add a dimension for the left vertical reference plane. and click the lock symbol next to the dimension to lock the distance.
28 In the Element Properties dialog. under Options. and click OK. select Not a Reference. 27 On the Options Bar.
Add dimensions to each reference plane
29 On the Design Bar.

click .NOTE Make sure the top dimension line snaps to the horizontal reference plane and not the horizontal line of the beam.
Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 159
. and drag the end point away from the angled line as shown.
Align the bottom horizontal surface of the beam
35 On the View Toolbar. select the vertical reference plane as shown.
39 Select the line representing the bottom surface of the beam as shown. and draw a zoom box around the left tee of the beam. 34 Press ESC. 38 For the align-to point. 33 Click the lock symbol next to the dimension to lock the distance.
36 Click the bottom horizontal line of the beam.
37 Enter AL (this is the keyboard shortcut for Align).

44 Press DELETE. 42 Repeat this technique for the inside of the same tee. 45 On the Design bar. Snap to the intersection of the horizontal and vertical reference planes.
40 Click the lock symbol to lock the alignment. 41 Press ESC. 46 Sketch the new profile for the beam as follows:
■ ■
Snap to the end point of the lower horizontal plane.
Sketch new profile
43 Select the angled line as shown. click Lines.Press the TAB key to make sure you are selecting the end point of the line and not the reference plane.
160 | Chapter 5 Precast Concrete
.

50 Click the horizontal reference plane and drag it beyond the right tee of the beam as shown.
47 Press ESC. 48 Repeat this technique for the opposite side of the beam.
Modify the right tee of the beam
49 Enter ZF (this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit).■
Snap to the end of the top horizontal line.
51 On the View Toolbar. and draw a zoom box around the right tee of the beam. click
.
Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 161
.

54 In the Family Types dialog. and then click OK. Align the bottom horizontal surface. 58 Proceed to the next tutorial. enter 10' 0". enter 6' 0".
Reload the family into the project
56 On the Design Bar. Add dimensions to each reference plane. 57 In the Reload Family dialog. Sketch the new profile. Click Apply.
162 | Chapter 5 Precast Concrete
.52 Repeat the following techniques for the right tee of the beam. 55 Click Edit menu ➤ Undo Family Type to undo the dimension changes. Notice the project file becomes active and the beam updates with the latest changes. and click Yes. specify the following:
■ ■ ■
For Tee Width. click Load into Projects.
Flex the design
53 On the Design bar. For Width. fix any problems with alignment or constraints. click Family Types.
■ ■ ■ ■
Draw vertical reference planes. “Creating Drawings” on page 163. select Override parameter values of existing types.
The beam should adapt to all changes. If it does not.

Creating Drawings
6
In this tutorial. and three-dimensional (3D) views.
163
. you learn how to create drawings from a building information model using Revit Structure 2008. usually contain a title block. To create a printed or plotted set of drawings from the views in your structural model. The model views that you can add to sheets include plan. you can add different views of the model directly to the sheet. begin by first creating sheets. and are accessible from the Project Browser. elevation. Depending on the type of drawing that you want to create. Sheets are defined by borders. section. which are a type of view in a project.

The project used in the following exercises is the same one used in the previous lesson. 3 In the Edit Text dialog box. how to add views to the sheets. For Client Name.rvt located in the Imperial folder. Smith. click Edit for Project Address. For Project Status.Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project
In this lesson. enter Office Structure. and section views.
6 Click OK. and how to create new views from a model. 3D view. MA 12345. Anytown. enter Initial Draft. 5 Specify the remaining instance parameters:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
For Project Issue Date. click Sheet. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 2 In the Element Properties dialog box. you create a drawing sheet that includes a plan view. Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. enter the following address: 123 Main Street.
164 | Chapter 6 Creating Drawings
.
Enter the project information to display in the title block of the drawing sheet
1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. 4 Click OK. enter 2006-01.
Creating a Drawing Sheet
In this exercise. enter 31 March 2006. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Structure project. Sheet views update automatically when you modify your model.
Create a sheet
7 On the View tab of the Design Bar. enter J. click the Training Files icon. For Project Name. For Project Number. Open i_RST_Drawings.

TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. right-click.
Creating a Drawing Sheet | 165
. on the Options Bar. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal. 11 When the title block highlights. and click OK. expand Sheets (all).
Change the sheet name and number in the title block
10 On the Design Bar. and click View. The text fields in the title block family (shown below) contain labels that automatically display the corresponding project information that you entered. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name S-2 .
NOTE The Project Path parameter in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. and select the title block.Unnamed. click . 9 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 8 In the Select a Title block dialog box.
The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project.

specify 1/16" = 1'. select Structural Plan: Level 2. enter S-1. The sheet name and number are displayed in the title block and in the Project Browser.0" for View Scale. and click View Properties. 15 In the Views dialog box. The scale of the view on the sheet changes. 16 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. under Graphics. NOTE If necessary.
166 | Chapter 6 Creating Drawings
.0". right-click. enter Plans and Elevations. Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet number. and dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. you would see that the scale plan view is now 1/16" = 1'. and click Add View to Sheet. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position.
13 Click OK. 17 With the view selected. 19 Drag the view to the upper-left corner of the sheet. right-click.
Add a plan view to the sheet
14 On the View tab of the Design Bar.12 In the Element Properties dialog. and click to place the view. 20 Adjust the length of the title line by selecting the view. If you were to open the Structural Plan: Level 2. click Add View. do the following:
■ ■
Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet name. and click Element Properties. and click OK. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box.

select Elevation: South Elevation. 31 Click on the upper-right corner of the sheet to place the view. and click Element Properties. 24 With the view selected. Click OK. select 3D View: East Section . clear Crop View.0" for View Scale.
26 Position the view below the Structural Plan: Level 2. 30 In the Views dialog box. specify 1/16" = 1'. 28 Adjust the length of the title line by selecting the view. click Add View. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. and dragging the right end control until it fits under the view.Add an elevation to the sheet
21 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Add View to Sheet. do the following:
■ ■ ■
Under Graphics. right-click. 22 In the Views dialog box. NOTE If necessary.
Add a 3D view to the sheet
29 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Add View to Sheet.Perspective.
Creating a Drawing Sheet | 167
. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. click Add View. and dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. Under Extents. 27 Drag the title line under the elevation view. 32 Adjust the length of the title line by selecting the view. 23 Click on the lower half of the sheet to place the view.

rvt. and save the file asi_RST_Drawings-in progress. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. enter Section Views for Sheet Name. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. under Identity Data. and on the Options Bar. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal.rvt 35 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. 2 In the Select a Title block dialog box. and click OK.
Adding a Sheet to the Project
In this exercise. add a section view.
Add a new sheet to the project
1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 34 Navigate to a folder of your preference.
33 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 3 Select the title block.
168 | Chapter 6 Creating Drawings
.NOTE If necessary. click . click Sheet. i_RST_Drawings-in progress. and adjust the scale of the view. “Adding a Sheet to the Project” on page 168. you add a new sheet to the project.
4 In the Element Properties dialog box.

double-click Level 2. and add it to the sheet
1 In the Project Browser under Structural Plans. 2 On the View Toolbar. and then add them to a new drawing sheet. under Sheets (all).
Creating New Views to Add to Sheets
In this exercise. click . incrementally named S-2 Section Views.
Create a section view of Level 2. i_RST_Drawings-in progress.rvt. you learn how to create a new section view and a new callout view.
Creating New Views to Add to Sheets | 169
. 5 On the File menu. click Save. and zoom in on the east area of the structure as shown. “Creating New Views to Add to Sheets” on page 169. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.Section Views is displayed in the title block as the sheet name. is displayed in the Project Browser. 6 Proceed to the next exercise.
The new sheet.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.

0" for View Scale. 9 Click on the upper-left corner of the sheet to place the view. specify 3/16" = 1' . 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Section: Section 1. and click Add View to Sheet. select 1/16" = 1'. click Section. 7 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Graphics. 12 Drag the title line under the elevation view. 5 Add a section line that cuts through the right side of the building:
■
Click between grid lines G and H to place the start point of the section line and the section head (section tag).3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK.
■
6 In the Project Browser under Sheets (all). double-click S-2 Section Views. 13 Adjust the length of the title line by dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. 10 With the view selected. and click Properties. 4 In the Options Bar. right-click.0" for Scale. 8 In the Views dialog box. Move the cursor to the right and click between grid lines J and K to place the section tail and complete the section line.
170 | Chapter 6 Creating Drawings
. click Add View.

0" for View Scale. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Sections (Building Sections).
19 In the Project Browser under Sheets (all).
16 On the View tab of the Design Bar.
Create a callout view. and click OK.
18 Select the drag bar attached to the callout balloon. and zoom in on the lower floors of the structure.
Creating New Views to Add to Sheets | 171
. 15 On the View Toolbar. and add it to the sheet
14 In the Project Browser. 20 On the Project Browser under Sections (Building Sections). double-click S-2 Section Views. as shown.NOTE If necessary. double click Section 1. right-click. under Graphics. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. and position it approximately as shown. 17 Draw a box around the column of Garage Level 1. 21 With the view selected. click Callout. click Callout of section 1. specify3/4" = 1'. and click Properties. click . and drag the view onto the sheet.

Legends list and identify components such as weld symbols and rebar tags. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. On construction documents. NOTE If necessary. you add the completed symbol legend to a sheet for the construction documents.
172 | Chapter 6 Creating Drawings
.23 Drag the title line under the elevation view.
25 On the File menu. 26 Proceed to the next exercise.
Creating a Symbol Legend
In this exercise. component legends are often called schedules (beam schedule. “Using Legends” on page 172. On construction documents. Finally. click Save. and so on). using a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers which are paired with text that identifies them.
Using Legends
Legends provide a way to display a list of the various structural components and annotations used in a project. concrete schedule. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. 24 Adjust the length of the title line by dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends.

Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. and click OK.Spacer: Spacer Weld Symbol-w-Preparation: Melt Thru
Creating a Symbol Legend | 173
.
Add symbols to the legend
5 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. enter Symbol Legend for Name.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. expand Legends. and click Rename. i_RST_Drawings-in progress. 6 Add the following symbols to the legend view. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the drawing area as shown. click Symbol. 4 In the Rename View dialog box.
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Section Head . 2 In the Project Browser.
Create a legend view
1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend.rvt.Filled Span Direction Fixed: 1/2” Rebar Tag Weld Symbol: Both Weld Symbol . 3 Right-click Legend 1.

enter 1/8" text for Name. and click OK. click Text. and click OK twice. select Text: 1/4" Ariel text.
Add text to the legend
13 In the Type Selector. enter 1/8" for Text Size.Create a text type
7 Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector.
174 | Chapter 6 Creating Drawings
. you create a text type with the necessary size. and click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. 9 On the Options bar. click Duplicate. On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. You do this by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties.
10 In the Element Properties dialog box. 8 In the Type Selector. click . 14 Enter Level Marker (Level Name/Elevation) or the text note. verify that Text: 1/8" text is selected. 12 Under Text.

enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Span Direction Fixed: 1/2” Rebar Tag (Tag#) Weld Symbol Weld Symbol . 18 On the Design Bar. 17 In the Project Browser. a new dataset is supplied.
Creating a Symbol Legend | 175
.15 Working from the top down.Spacer Weld Symbol .
The symbol legend is added to the sheet. click Symbol Legend. In the next tutorial. drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet. and double-click S-1 . expand Sheets (all). 19 Click File menu ➤ Close. and click to place it.Melt thru
Place the symbol legend on a sheet
16 In the Project Browser.Plans and Elevations to open it in the drawing area. 20 You can save the open file if you wish. click Modify to end the command.

177
.Scheduling
7
In this tutorial. you learn how to create a customized schedule of structural framing elements in your Revit Structure 2008 projects.

double-click Ground Level. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add width and height information to a beam family component originally defined as a family parameter. you can list each component as a separate line item (an instance schedule). 2 Select one of the beams as shown. Open i_RST_Schedules. regardless of category. Shared parameters can be added to any family.
Creating Shared Parameters
In this exercise you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional elements that are usually not included in the beam schedule when it is created within the project template. ensuring consistency across families and projects. and are defined and stored in an external file.rvt located in the Imperial folder.Creating a Beam Schedule
In this lesson. NOTE Some beams have been added to this view to better demonstrate the scheduling tool. under Structural Plans. Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to create a beam schedule for the structural model as shown below. click the Training Files icon. The following exercise demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters and adding them to a family.
178 | Chapter 7 Scheduling
. When you schedule structural components in Revit Structure. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Structure multi-category schedules. In the left pane of the Open dialog. or you can group components of the same type into a single line item (a type schedule).
Editing the family parameters
1 In the Project Browser.

click New. NOTE You are now in the Family Editor.
7 In the Parameter Properties dialog.
Creating Shared Parameters | 179
. enter b. 13 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. The selected beam family is displayed in the drawing area. 12 In the New Parameter Group dialog. 14 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Under Type of Parameter. click Edit Family. and click OK.3 On the Options Bar. enter Dimensions for name. 10 In the Save As dialog. click Yes. select Shared Parameter. specify a location for the file and enter Project Shared Parameters for name. under Groups. click New. click Family Types. under Dimensions. do the following:
■ ■ ■
Under Name. Click OK. Click Save. select the b parameter. under Parameters. select Length. 11 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. and click Select. click Create. and click Modify. 5 On the Family design bar. 8 When asked if you want to specify a shared parameter file. 4 Click Yes when prompted about opening the beam for editing. 6 In the Family Types dialog. 9 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog.

19 In the Parameter Properties dialog. right-click in the Design Bar. and click Select. click OK. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. 27 When prompted to overwrite the existing version of the family. under Dimensions. click OK. 18 In the Shared Parameter dialog. 26 Select the active file. select Shared Parameter. NOTE The b and h parameters.15 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. click Schedule/Quantities. and click View. and click OK. and click Add. 24 In the Family Types dialog. They will appear in the structural framing schedule field once they are reloaded into the project file. click yes.rvt located in the Imperial folder. In the next exercise. click Load into Project. 28 Click File menu ➤ Close. select the h parameter.
180 | Chapter 7 Scheduling
. and click OK.
Creating a Structural Framing Schedule
In this exercise. do the following:
■ ■ ■
Under Name. Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. Under Type of Parameter.
Choose which fields to include in the beam schedule
4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. and click Modify. You can save the open file if you wish. select Mark. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click Ground Level. under Parameters. click OK. 5 Under Available fields.
17 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. select the b parameter. 22 In the Shared Parameter dialog. Click OK. are now shared parameters. 16 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 20 In the Family Types dialog. click the Fields tab. and click OK. 23 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click New. 21 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. click the Training Files icon. a new dataset is supplied. select the h parameter. Open i_RST_Schedules_Framing. 25 On the Family design bar. click OK. select Structural Framing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn how to create a structural framing concrete beam schedule. under Category. select Length.
Create the schedule
1 In the Project Browser. “Creating a Structural Framing Schedule” on page 180. which were originally family parameters. and click OK. enter h. under Structural Plans.

enter Rebar for Name.
10 Click OK. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog.
Creating a Structural Framing Schedule | 181
. 9 Under Scheduled fields. select Text. Under Type of Parameter. order the fields as shown by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. 6 Using the same process.The Mark field is moved under Scheduled fields. add the following fields to the schedule:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Comments b h Structural Usage Reference Level
7 In the Schedule Properties dialog. do the following:
■ ■ ■
Under Parameter Data. Click OK. click Add Parameter.
NOTE Rebar is now a project parameter that can also be found in the properties of all structural framing components including beams.

and enter D. 4 On the Options bar. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 Click the new heading. and enter W. Select h. 2 Modify the schedule headings as follows:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Select Mark. 3 Select headings W and D. a new dataset is supplied. “Customizing the Schedule” on page 182.
Customizing the Schedule
In this exercise. In the next exercise. Open i_RST_Schedules_Custom.
Modifying the table elements
1 In the Project Browser.A schedule is created that includes all structural framing elements in the project. A new blank cell is created above columns W and D. you learn how to customize the new beam schedule. click Schedules/Quantities. and enter REMARKS. You can save the open file if you wish. and enter GROUND LEVEL CONCRETE BEAM SCHEDULE. click the Training Files icon. and enter SIZE.
NOTE Under the Project Browser. and enter MARK. Select b. Select the title. double-click Structural Framing Schedule.rvt located in the Imperial folder. click Group. In the left pane of the Open dialog.
11 Click File menu ➤ Close. Notice that the schedule name has changed.
182 | Chapter 7 Scheduling
. under Schedules/Quantities. Select Comments.

11 In the Element Properties dialog. under Filter. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog ➤ Sorting/Grouping tab. Notice the schedule is filtered and shows only the structural framing elements of the ground level. select Ground Level. sorted by structural usage. The schedule is updated to provide both a header and footer for each type. Click OK. do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Under Sort by. click Edit for Value. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. under Sorting/Grouping. select Structural Usage. click OK.
Customizing the Schedule | 183
. click the Filter tab. click Edit for Value. Select Footer Select Blank Line. and click OK.
13 On the Element Properties dialog. Select Header.
Sorting/grouping the schedule by structural usage
10 Right-click the open area next to the schedule.Selecting a filter
6 Right-click the open area next to the schedule. and select View Properties. select the Reference Level for Filter by. click OK. and select View Properties.

20 Repeat step 18. and zoom in on the joists. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. select h. and click View Properties. and provide a location for the new family file. The screen is split into two separate windows. click Yes. click Edit for Value.
184 | Chapter 7 Scheduling
. 25 On the schedule window. 24 On the Window menu. 22 On the Element Properties dialog. and on the toolbar. 18 In the Format dialog. click OK. 17 Under Fields. click Tile. click . 21 On the Schedule Properties dialog. select Fractional inches. double-click Ground Level. and click Field Format. under Structural Plans. showing both the beam schedule and Ground Level view. under Formatting.
■
Click OK. If prompted to save the changes to the beam family. scroll down until the Joists section of the schedule is visible. Under Rounding. click OK.Formatting units
14 Right-click the open area next to the schedule. Under Units. select To the nearest 1/8". NOTE Close any additional views that may be opened. do the following:
■ ■ ■
Clear Use project settings. 16 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 26 Click in the Ground Level window.
19 Under Fields. and click Field Format. click the Formatting tab.
Entering marks and rebar data
23 In the Project Browser. Columns W and D now display fractional inches. click b.

enter the following information for the first joist in the schedule:
■
Under MARK. notice the Value field for the Mark parameter reflects the data entered on the schedule. 32 On the Options bar. select 2-#8x9'-0" Bot for Rebar value. as does the value for the Rebar parameter. and select View Properties. click . 31 Press and hold the Ctrl key while selecting multiple joists on the Ground Level window. enter 1B21. and on the Options bar. 35 Right-click the open area next to the schedule.
Resorting the schedule
34 Maximize the schedule window.
NOTE Ignore the warning regarding elements having duplicate Mark values.
28 Click the Rebar column to highlight the joist in the Ground Level view.
■
Under Rebar.
Customizing the Schedule | 185
. under Identity Data.
30 In the Element Properties dialog.
33 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Other. The schedule is updated with the joist information. do the following:
■ ■ ■
Under Identity Data. enter 1B21 for Mark Value.0" Bot.27 In the Schedule window. Click OK. enter 2-#8 X 9' . NOTE Notice the joist is highlighted (red) in the Ground Level view. and click OK. 29 Click the highlighted joist. click .

Click OK.36 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. click Edit for Value.
38 In the Element Properties dialog.
186 | Chapter 7 Scheduling
. Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Open i_RST_Schedules_Formula. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Notice the schedule is not itemized and does not show each beam.rvt located in the Imperial folder.
39 Click File menu ➤ Close.
Calculating Values
In this exercise. as well as the total cost of all structural items for the ground level of the structure. In the next exercise. “Calculating Values” on page 186. but instead groups all the beams of the same mark in a single row. 40 Proceed to the next exercise. click the Training Files icon. Under Then by. do the following:
■ ■ ■
Clear Itemize every instance. You can save the open file if you wish. you create a formula to calculate the unit cost for each individual girder and joist. under Sorting/Grouping. select Mark. a new dataset is supplied.

Because cost is a type parameter. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. the number type cannot be assigned a dollar value. click OK. Click OK.5 for Cost. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 Right-click the open area next to the schedule. select Length. The schedule will calculate the total cost for the joists. Because cost is a type parameter. do the following:
■ ■ ■
Under Available Fields. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 Right-click the open area next to the schedule.
Hiding/unhiding columns
14 On the schedule. and press Enter. the value will be applied to all elements of the same type. Under Available Fields. The schedule will calculate the total cost for all girders.
■
Click OK. click OK. under Formatting. NOTE The cost value represents a random value chosen for demonstration purposes only.
Calculating Values | 187
. under the Fields parameter. click OK to accept the change. under Schedules/Quantities. When the notification box is displayed. click Edit for Value. When the notification box is displayed. Note that the formula will calculate the total cost based on a length unit of 1'. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. In Revit Structure. and click View Properties.
5 In the Calculated Value dialog.Creating the formula
1 In the Project Browser. Select Number for Type. select Cost. the value will be applied to all elements of the same type. 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click View Properties. click Edit for Value. click OK to accept the change. enter 3 for Cost. The schedule now includes the sum for Total Cost. and click Add. Also notice that the Total Cost parameter does not have a unit value assigned. Under Fields. double-click Ground Level Concrete Beam Schedule. and enter 1. 9 Scroll to the first joist on the schedule. and click Add. 8 Scroll to the first girder on the schedule. click OK. click the Cost column. Enter Length*Cost/1' for Formula. 2 Right-click the open area next to the schedule. do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■
Click the Formatting tab. do the following:
■ ■ ■
Enter Total Cost for Name. and click View Properties. select Total Cost. Click Calculated Value.
6 In the Schedule Properties dialog.
13 In the Element Properties dialog. select Calculate totals. Under Field Formatting.

In the next lesson.
20 The columns are now hidden. 22 Proceed to the next lesson.
Create the Graphical Column Schedule
In this exercise you learn how to create a graphical column schedule. You can save the open file if you wish. 19 You can also hide columns by doing the following:
■ ■
On the schedule. NOTE To show all hidden columns. Under Field Formatting.16 In the Element Properties dialog. do the following:
■ ■ ■
Under Fields. Dataset
■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. a new dataset is supplied.
188 | Chapter 7 Scheduling
. Click OK. click OK. Right-click. “Creating a Graphical Column Schedule” on page 188. 17 In the Schedule Properties dialog. right-click the open area next to the schedule. The Total Cost column is now hidden. and select Hide Column(s).
Creating a Graphical Column Schedule
In this lesson.
18 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit for Value. click the Training Files icon. select Unhide All Columns. select Total Cost. select Hidden field. select the Cost and Length columns. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Formatting. you learn how to create a graphical column schedule for the current project.

You can save the open file if you wish.
Create the Graphical Column Schedule | 189
. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. click OK. and zoom in on the schedule. 6 On the Toolbar. under Other. “Change the Schedule Appearance” on page 190. Garage Level . and Ground Level. select Foundation.
Creating the schedule
1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.
Notice that the first level on the schedule is Level 2. 4 In the Levels Hidden dialog. 2 Right-click the column schedule and select View Properties. a new dataset is supplied. and click OK. click . The schedule is created automatically. In the next exercise.1.
NOTE These levels will not appear on the graphical column schedule. 5 In the Element Properties dialog.
7 Click File menu ➤ Close.rvt located in the Imperial folder. click Graphical Column Schedule.■
Open i_RST_Schedules_Create_GCS. click Edit for Hidden Levels.

and then select Bold. select Courier New from the drop-down list. For Level text.
5 Click the Grid Appearance tab.
190 | Chapter 7 Scheduling
. select Arial Black from the drop-down list. Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. click the Training Files icon. under Text Appearance.Change the Schedule Appearance
In this exercise.
Customizing text
1 In the Project Browser. Open i_RST_Schedules_Customize_GCS. and select View Properties. enter Steel Column Schedule for Title. Enter 2" for Level Names. 6 Under Horizontal Widths:
■ ■
Enter 2" for Column Locations. under Identity Data. and then select Bold and Italic.
7 Click OK. under Graphical Column Schedules. In the left pane of the Open dialog. do the following:
■ ■
For Title text. click Edit for Value. you learn how to add a title to the schedule and how to customize text and graphic appearance.rvt located in the Imperial folder. 4 In the Graphical Column Schedule Properties dialog. 2 Right-click the schedule. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Graphical Column Schedule 1. 8 In the Element Properties dialog.

Tagging the columns
10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 17 On the Options bar. Click OK. 11 On the Options bar. click . click Tag All Not Tagged. Click Apply.9 Click OK. click Vertical. click Tag ➤ By Category. do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■
Under Category. select Vertical.
15 Enter ZF to fit the entire column schedule in the drawing area. select Structural Column Tags. and clear Leader. 13 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 12 Click the column on Level 7 to place the tag. 16 Draw a pick box around the entire schedule. 14 In the Tag dialog. Under Orientation.
Change the Schedule Appearance | 191
.

22 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Structural Columns.
19 On the Toolbar. “Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule” on page 193. do the following.
192 | Chapter 7 Scheduling
. You can save the open file if you wish. enter 10. In the next exercise. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. a new dataset is supplied.
Splitting the column schedule
21 Right-click the schedule. and move the tags until they are positioned approximately as shown. The schedule is split into 4 segments with 10 column locations per segment. and zoom in on one of the column tags.
23 Click OK. enter 1/4" = 1' . and select View Properties. 25 Proceed to the next exercise.
■ ■
Under View Scale. and click OK. click 20 On the Toolbar. . click
.0" Under Column Locations per Segment.18 In the Filter dialog.

and on the Options Bar. 8 In the Views dialog.Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule
In this exercise. 5 In the Options bar. 3 In the Project Browser. click Modify.
Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule | 193
. 10 Select the schedule. select Graphical Column Schedule. Open i_RST_Schedules_Multiple_Sheets_GCS. click the Training Files icon.
Add the column schedule to the sheet
7 On the View tab of the Design bar.rvt located in the Imperial folder.
The sheet name and number are displayed in the titleblock and in the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all). Click OK. and click Add View to Sheet. Under Sheet Number. do the following:
■ ■ ■
Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet Name. A titleblock and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet.
11 In the Element Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser.
6 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 1 for Segments in Viewport. click Add View. and click OK. and click OK. you create multiple sheets for the graphical column schedule. under Extents.
Change the sheet name and number
4 On the Design Bar. click Sheet. enter Steel Column Schedule. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal.
Creating a sheet
1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click to place the view. click . enter S-3. 9 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. and select the titleblock. click . 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.

27 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. 24 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. expand Sheets (all). do the following:
■ ■ ■
Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet Name. and click Sheet S-4.
16 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 On the Project Browser. and drag it onto the sheet. and click Sheet S-5 23 On the Project Browser. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal.The first segment will be placed on Sheet S-3. and drag it onto the sheet.
Add additional sheets
12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand Sheets (all). 29 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Sheet S-6. 22 On the Project Browser. In the next exercise. 15 On the Options bar. 20 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. 28 Click File menu ➤ Close. a new dataset is supplied. 19 On the Project Browser. 25 On the Project Browser. under Graphical Column Schedule. and select the titleblock. and click to place the view. Click OK. and click to place the view. 21 Position the schedule as necessary. enter S-4. click Graphical Column Schedule 1. under Graphical Column Schedule. click Graphical Column Schedule 1.
194 | Chapter 7 Scheduling
. click Sheet. and enter S-5 and S-6 for sheet numbers. select Steel Column Schedule. click Graphical Column Schedule 1. click Modify. and click to place the view. expand Sheets (all). click OK. 14 On the Design Bar. You can save the open file if you wish.
17 Repeat previous steps to add 2 additional sheets. 13 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Under Sheet Number.
Place remaining views
18 On the Project Browser. under Graphical Column Schedule. “Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access” on page 195. Enter Steel Column Schedule for name. and drag it onto the sheet. click .

and click OK to create the database.
Exporting Project Information with ODBC | 195
. 9 Under Directories. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) . you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database.
A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open.compliant database. under Database.
Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access
In this exercise. 10 When the confirmation message displays. select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb). 5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. and click Next. 8 In the New Database dialog.mdb. 12 Click OK in the remaining dialogs. Revit Structure creates 2 tables: one that lists all of the element instances in a project.Exporting Project Information with ODBC
In this lesson. 11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. select a location for the database file. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. and some instance tables include a Room ID column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. 3 Click New.rvt located in the Imperial folder. click the Training Files icon. and then open the database in Microsoft Access. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. click Create. 6 Click Finish.
Exporting the schedule
1 On the File menu. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. click OK. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. Open i_RST_Schedules_Export_Project_Info. click the File Data Source tab. For example. and click Next. instance tables include a Type ID column containing the ID of the instance’s type. click OK. enter Revit_Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Database Name. so that each table of elements includes an ID column. and one that lists all of the element types in a project (see below).

13 Click File menu ➤ Close. In the next tutorial. “Steel Details” on page 197. 14 Proceed to the next tutorial. a new dataset is supplied. You can save the open file if you wish.
196 | Chapter 7 Scheduling
.

Steel Details
8
In this tutorial. and how to create a drafting detail using the tools provided (drafting-detail). Detail drawings describe how particular pieces of the structure go together and are typically created in the middle to later portion of the design process after the general building shape and structural elements have been decided upon. you learn how to use Revit Structure 2008 to create steel details from the structural model (model-based). This tutorial comprises the following model-based steel detail exercises:
■ ■ ■
Welded Brace Connection Bolted Angle Connection Glazing Support Connection
197
.

revise a callout view. you begin with a framed model as the basis of your details. and drag the controls to resize such that only the Level 4 area is visible. revise an existing elevation view. You cut a section in plan. and add these views to a sheet. and select 3/4" =1' . click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (all).
Prepare the welded brace elevation view
1 In the Project Browser. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.Setting Up Section Views on Sheets
In this lesson. and draw a zoom box around the northwest stair opening as shown. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. and double-click Level 4. Structural Plans. 4 In the elevation view. 2 Select . 5 On the View Control Bar:
■ ■ ■
Click Scale control.0".rvt located in the Imperial folder. select the elevation crop view. Open i_RST_DET.
3 Double-click the elevation bubble to open the elevation view.
Cut Sections and Add Views to Sheets
Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open.
198 | Chapter 8 Steel Details
.

A callout symbol is located in this view at the south wall. and select 3/4" =1' . Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.Revise the callout view
14 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation).
16 Double-click on the callout head to open the view. 17 On the View Control Bar:
■ ■ ■
Click Scale control. double-click West Elevation.
200 | Chapter 8 Steel Details
.
15 Select
.0". and zoom in on the south wall at Level 4.

20 In the Project Browser. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_DET-in progress. and click to place the view.
Detailing Steel
In this lesson. and click OK. 22 In the Sheet Title dialog. select Elevation: Callout of West Elevation. expand Sheets (all). elevation. and callout views on the sheet
18 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 27 In the Views dialog. and click Add View to Sheet.Steel Details.rvt. and a facade support detail to the model. select Elevation: Elevation 1-a. and click to place the view. 25 Move the cursor onto the sheet. and click Add View. select E1 30x42 Horizontal. 23 In the Project Browser. a bolted angle detail. select Section: Section 1. 31 Move the cursor onto the sheet.
Welded Bracing Detail
Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.Steel Details.Steel Details. 19 In the Select a Title block dialog. and click Add View. and click Rename. right-click S-6 . “Detailing Steel” on page 201.rvt.
Detailing Steel | 201
.
32 Click File menu ➤ Save As.Create a sheet and place the section. 24 In the Views dialog. right-click S-6 . 26 In the Project Browser. You will sketch the lines in a model view. and click to place the view. right-click S-6 . 28 Move the cursor onto the sheet. 30 In the Views dialog. and click OK. 29 In the Project Browser. enter Steel Details for Name. and click Add View. and click Add View to Sheet. and click Add View to Sheet. 21 Right-click S-6 Unnamed. you add a welded bracing detail. i_RST_DET-in progress. The first part of the exercise involves adding a plate to the underside of a beam to support the bracing. 33 Proceed to the next lesson.

enter the value. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). 6 Sketch a vertical line down 1' -1 3/8" from the bottom flange as shown.Sketch line work
1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Toolbar.
202 | Chapter 8 Steel Details
. 5 Place the cursor near the bottom flange of the beam. .
4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and enter SM to snap to the midpoint. double click Elevation 1-a. click Detail Lines. click at Level 4. and draw a zoom box around the midpoint of the beam where the braces meet
3 Select the left brace. and drag the shape handle (two small triangles at the brace end) to move the brace so it is not touching the beam flange. TIP After establishing the line direction.

10 Click to place this line.
14 Place the cursor on the bottom flange of the beam as shown. you create 2 detail lines that are offset from this vertical line. 13 On the Options Bar. click Detail Lines. enter 2' 6" for Offset. click . click Offset. 11 Repeat the same steps to place a vertical line on the opposite side. 8 On the Options Bar.
12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Numerical. 9 Place the cursor near the vertical line to highlight it. and select Copy. and click to place the detail line. and enter 1' 8" for the Offset value.Next.
Welded Bracing Detail | 203
. 7 On the Options Bar. A line displays that is offset from the highlighted line.

and sketch 2 detail lines to connect the horizontal line to the vertical lines as shown.
204 | Chapter 8 Steel Details
. and click to place it.
17 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Detail Lines.
18 Select the middle vertical line that you used as a reference line. drag it into the view as shown. expand Families ➤ Annotation Symbols ➤ Weld Symbol ➤ select Both. click Modify and select the horizontal detail line.15 On the Design Bar.
Add weld symbols
19 In the Project Browser. 16 Enter 3' 9" for the temporary dimension value as shown. and press DELETE to delete this element.

25 Drag the leader arrowhead to the position as shown. 24 On the Options Bar. Repeat for the right bottom value. click Modify. and enter 3/8. and select the weld symbol. click Add a Leader. 20 Click Modify. 22 Click the right top weld annotation.The weld symbol has 4 numerical parameters that are currently set to 0. Repeat for the left bottom value. 21 Select the weld symbol.
Welded Bracing Detail | 205
. click the left top weld annotation. 23 On the Design Bar. and enter a period.
26 Use the same technique to add another weld symbol as shown.

and click Properties. 30 On the Options Bar.
206 | Chapter 8 Steel Details
.
34 Draw a leader to the brace and enter L8x8 TYPICAL for text as shown. click . do the following:
■ ■ ■
Under Structural.
Label the angles and the plate
29 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and enter 3/8" PL for text.
31 Draw a text leader to the plate. 33 On the Options Bar. select Weld All Around Under Graphics. click Text. select Weld Contour-Empty for Top Symbol Click OK. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. click Text. 32 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click .27 Right-click the new weld symbol.

Then. under Sections.
Bolted Angle Detail
Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 36 Proceed to the next exercise. “Bolted Angle Detail” on page 207. 1 In the Project Browser. you add 2 angles to the model using an angle family that has been loaded into the project. select L4x4x5/16. In the first part of the exercise.rvt. i_RST_DET-in progress. 2 In the Project Browser. you add some annotations.35 Click File menu ➤ Save.
Bolted Angle Detail | 207
. double-click Section 1. 3 Drag the family onto the grid line in the view as shown. under Families ➤ Detail Items ➤ L-Angle-Bolted Connection Section.
Add annotations
4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Detail Lines.

9 Click File menu ➤ Save.
6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Text.5 Sketch a vertical line through the center of the left set of bolts as shown.
Facade Support Detail
Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.
208 | Chapter 8 Steel Details
. 7 On the Options Bar. click 8 Enter the text notes as shown. i_RST_DET-in progress. “Facade Support Detail” on page 208. .rvt. 10 Proceed to the next exercise.

move it to the position shown. 5 Drag the channel onto the drawing area.7. and draw a zoom box around the callout at the intersection on Level 4 at Grid
3 Double-click the callout head to open Callout of West Elevation.
8 On the Edit toolbar.In this exercise. 2 On the Toolbar. click
. 1 In the Project Browser. click 4. . You will attach a channel in section to the outrigger for use as a member of the facade support system. under Elevations (Building Elevation). On the right side of the view is an imported symbol that represents a curtain wall. 7 Press the spacebar to rotate the channel twice.
6 Click Modify and select the channel.
Facade Support Detail | 209
. you add members to support exterior wall glazing. expand Families ➤ Detail Items ➤ C-Channel Section. 4 In the Project Browser. and select the left side of the column as shown. double-click West Elevation. and click to place it. select C5x6.

210 | Chapter 8 Steel Details
. select the bolt. expand Families ➤ Detail Items ➤ Bolt-Section.
10 Continue to use the align tool to align the channel to the bottom of the outrigger as shown. select the back of the channel as shown.9 Next. and drag it onto the outrigger and channel as shown.
11 In the Project Browser.

double-click S-6 Steel Detail to view the results of your work in the sheet view.
Creating a Drafting View Detail
In this lesson. 14 Click near the bolt and enter 3/4" DIA. 16 In the Project Browser.
Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail
Dataset
■
Click File menu ➤ Open.Add annotations
12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Sheets. you learn how to create a drafting view detail for a deck span transition using the drafting tools provided in Revit Structure.
Creating a Drafting View Detail | 211
. A325 BOLT. In the next lesson. 15 Press ESC twice to exit the Text tool. 18 Proceed to the next lesson.7. “Creating a Drafting View Detail” on page 211. click Text. You can save the open file if you wish. 17 Click File menu ➤ Close. 13 Click the open area outside of the channel and enter C5x6. a new dataset is supplied.

11 On the Design bar.
Create the drafting view
1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Under Scale. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Type Selector. click the Training Files icon.Deck Span Transition. 7 On the Design bar. 10 Position the joist on the right side of the beam. select 1 1/2" = 1' . click Drafting View. 14 Click the end of the joist. Click OK.Section: W18x35.
212 | Chapter 8 Steel Details
. 13 In the Type Selector. click Modify. enter Typical Detail. 15 Move the pointer to the right to begin placing the deck. Open i_RST_Deck_Span_Detail. select K-Series Bar Joist . expand Drafting Views. select Detail Component. and double-click Typical Detail . Align the bottom of the joist seat with the top of the beam as shown. select AISC Wide Flange Shapes .Deck Span Transition. 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 9 In the Type Selector. do the following:
■ ■ ■
Under Name. 6 Click the drawing area to place the component. click Modify.■ ■
In the left pane of the Open dialog.0".
Load detail components
4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.
3 In the Project Browser. select Metal Deck. 2 In the New Drafting dialog. select Detail Component.Side: 14K3.rvt located in the Imperial folder. select Repeating Detail.

17 On the Design bar. 23 In the Type Selector. click Modify. select Roof Decking-Side: 1. and continue to move the pointer to the right until the deck is drawn as shown.125.16 Press the SPACEBAR to rotate the orientation of the deck.5 WR 22. click Modify. select AISC Tube Shapes . 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.
21 On the Design bar. 24 Align the bottom of the decking with the top of the joist and move the deck to the left approximately as shown. 20 Place the tube on the top flange of the steel beam directly next to the end of the joist seat as shown. 19 In the Type Selector.
Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail | 213
. 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Detail Component. select Detail Component.Section: HSS2-1/2x2-1/2x.

25 On the Design bar.
33 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. and select Symbol Right. and select the weld symbol. click . 31 On the Design Bar.
29 On the Design bar. 35 On the Options Bar.
214 | Chapter 8 Steel Details
. and align the top of the joist with the bottom of the deck as shown. change the following instance parameters:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Under Structural.
Add weld symbols
30 In the Project Browser. select Detail Component. Enter 2 @ 12 for Bottom Weld Length. and click to place it. click Modify. 27 In the Type Selector. drag it into the view as shown.
34 On the Design Bar. 36 Drag the leader arrowhead to the position as shown. click Modify. Enter 3/16 for Bottom Weld Size. 32 Select the weld symbol. click Modify. select Field Weld. Under Other. and on the Options Bar. clear Symbol Left. click Add a Leader. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Click OK. 28 Place the joist to the left of the beam. expand Families ➤ Annotation Symbols ➤ Weld Symbol ➤ select Bottom. select K-Series Bar Joist-Section: 14K3.

41 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Add text to the detail view
37 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 40 On the Design bar. “Concrete Details” on page 217.
Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail | 215
. 42 Repeat the previous steps to add the remaining text and leader to the detail view as shown. 44 Proceed to the next tutorial. 38 On the Options Bar.
43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click . and navigate to a folder location of your choice. click Modify. click Text.
39 Draw a text leader to the steel deck and enter STL DECK SEE PLAN for text. click Text.

216 | Chapter 8 Steel Details
.

Opening
217
. and how to import the library into an existing project.Slab Path Reinforcement .Concrete Details
9
In this tutorial. you learn how to use Revit Structure 2008 to create concrete details from the structural model (model-based).Wall Area Reinforcement . This tutorial comprises the following model-based concrete detail exercises:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Footing Detail Wall Detail Area Reinforcement . how to create a detail library for multiple users. Detail drawings show how particular pieces of the structure go together and are typically created in the middle to later portion of the design process after the general building shape and structural elements have been decided upon.

You cut 2 sections in plan. revise an existing elevation view. click the Training Files icon.Setting Up Section Views on Sheets
In this lesson. 2 On the Toolbar. and double-click Ground Level to open the view.
Cut a section through the foundation wall
1 In the Project Browser. revise a callout view.
5 On the Design Bar. Open i_RST_Concrete_Details. move the cursor to the right. click Section. and add these views to a drawing sheet. and draw a zoom box around the southwest corner at grid line A and between
3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click grid lines 3 and 4. 6 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view. click Modify. 4 Draw the section as shown: click to the left of the wall. you begin with a framed model as the basis of your details. .rvt located in the Imperial folder. and then click to the right of the wall.
Cut Sections and Add Views to Sheets
Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open.
218 | Chapter 9 Concrete Details
.

select the section crop view.7 In the section view. and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the foundation wall is shown.
Cut Sections and Add Views to Sheets | 219
.

Open i_RST_Footing_Detail. you sketch rebar on a footing detail.
3 Click the section line. double-click Ground Level.
4 Press ESC. In the next lesson. and zoom in on the southwest corner of the structure.
Footing Detail
Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. “Model Based Concrete Detail Examples” on page 221.rvt located in the Imperial folder. 17 Proceed to the next lesson. click
. and position the upper drag bar as shown. You can save the open file if you wish. draw a pick box.
Model Based Concrete Detail Examples | 221
. a new dataset is supplied.
Model Based Concrete Detail Examples
In this lesson.
Open section view
1 In the Project Browser. under Structural Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and add area reinforcement to a wall and a concrete slab using the Revit Structure drafting tools and the area reinforcement tool.
2 On the Toolbar.16 Click File menu ➤ Close. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. click the Training Files icon. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown.

17 Select the continuous footing as the host element.
Add vertical rebar to footing
16 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch.14 Sketch a straight bar by clicking inside the footing first and then moving the cursor to the right as shown.
15 On the Sketch tab.
224 | Chapter 9 Concrete Details
.
19 On the Sketch tab. click Finish Sketch. 18 Sketch a rebar by clicking inside the footing first and then moving the cursor into the wall as shown. click Rebar ➤ Sketch Rebar. NOTE Be sure to sketch from the footing to the wall.

23 Repeat the same steps to place a rebar on the other face of the wall. 22 Click OK. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. select Standard .90 deg.
Footing Detail | 225
. under Construction.Add hook
20 Right-click the rebar you added in the previous steps. and click Element Properties. for Hook At Start.

to reverse the direction of the hook.Change hook orientation
24 Select the second rebar.
25 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.
Place rebar set
29 Select the single rebar. do the following:
■
For Layout.
226 | Chapter 9 Concrete Details
. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar. 27 Click to place the first rebar as shown. click Modify. select Minimum Clear Spacing.
Notice the rebar tool snaps to the end of the straight bar. and click . 26 Select the end of the straight bar. and place the pointer between the hooked and straight bars approximately as shown.
28 On the Design Bar. 30 On the Options Bar.

click Dimension.
31 Press ESC. 37 Click to select this plane. 36 Move the cursor over the first rebar in the array. 32 Select the rebar set.
34 On the Design Bar. enter 4".■
For Spacing. 33 Drag the shape handles so the rebar set aligns with the end of the horizontal rebar as shown. and move the cursor to the edge of the footing as shown.
The vertical snapping plane of the bar is highlighted. click Modify.
Check rebar clear spacing
35 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.
Footing Detail | 227
.

click Section. In the next exercise. 40 Proceed to the next exercise. draw a pick box.
2 On the Toolbar. and zoom in on the southwest corner of the structure.
Wall Detail
Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. Delete the dimension after verifying the clearance requirements have been met. double-click Garage Level .38 Click to select this plane and place the dimension.
Create section view
1 In the Project Browser.
228 | Chapter 9 Concrete Details
. click
. click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog.
39 Click File menu ➤ Close. You can save the open file if you wish. “Wall Detail” on page 228.
3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. Open i_RST_Wall_Detail.rvt located in the Imperial folder.1. under Structural Plans. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. NOTE The dimension is placed to check the clear space distance from the concrete face to the rebar array. a new dataset is supplied.

4 Click inside the wall between grid lines B and C.
5 On the Design Bar. move the cursor down.0". click Modify. 6 Click the section line. The Section 2 view opens. 8 Double-click the section bubble. select the crop view. 9 In the section view. and select 3/4" = 1'. and click the outside wall to place the section as shown. 10 On the View Control Bar:
■ ■
Click Scale control. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine.
7 Press ESC.
Wall Detail | 229
. and position the drag bar as shown. and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the foundation wall is shown.

15 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK.
Change rebar type
14 Right-click the rebar. and click Element Properties. select #7. click Modify.■
Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.
230 | Chapter 9 Concrete Details
. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar.
Place horizontal rebar
11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. for Type. 12 Place the rebar at the base of the wall approximately as shown.
13 On the Design Bar. The rebar size is changed to the new type.

enter 3. select Fixed Number. Notice all 3 instances of rebar are grouped as a single element. and rotate the rebar set as shown. 18 On the Edit toolbar.
Wall Detail | 231
.
The rotation center control is positioned over the center bar. click .Place rebar set
16 Select the rebar.
20 Move the cursor to the left to set the rotation control angle.
Rotate the rebar
17 Select the rebar. and on the Options Bar. For Quantity. 19 Click and drag the rotation center control to the left rebar as shown. do the following:
■ ■
For Layout.

enter 1' 6". select Maximum Spacing. and on the Options Bar. For Spacing.
232 | Chapter 9 Concrete Details
. do the following:
■ ■
For Layout.21 Click to place the rebar array.
Set maximum spacing
22 Select the rebar.
23 Drag the rebar shape handle to the top of the wall.

Mirror the rebar set
24 On the Edit toolbar.
26 Click to place the rebar.
Wall Detail | 233
. click .Additional rebar will be placed at the specified distance.
25 Move the cursor to the right until the center line reference plane of the wall appears as shown.

click . 28 On the Toolbar. 31 Click the bottom rebar as shown. Notice the cursor snaps to the rebar to establish the sketch start point. You are now in sketch mode. and click Zoom to Fit. 30 Select the concrete wall as the rebar host.
234 | Chapter 9 Concrete Details
.
29 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.
32 Drag the sketch line towards the top of the wall as shown. and draw a zoom box around the lower half of the wall.Place vertical rebar
27 Right-click in an empty part of the drawing area. click Rebar ➤ Sketch Rebar.

37 On the Edit toolbar.
Mirror the rebar
36 Click the vertical rebar. click .33 Click to place the rebar. 35 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 34 Press ESC.
Wall Detail | 235
.
38 Move the cursor over the wall until the center line reference plane appears.

do the following:
■ ■
For Layout. For Spacing.
Reset rebar visibility
51 With the rebar array still selected. 56 Proceed to the next exercise.45 In the Project Browser. for 3D View. 55 Click File menu ➤ Close. The rebar array is no longer visible in the 3D View. You can save the open file if you wish. on the Options Bar. a new dataset is supplied. under 3D Views.
50 Drag the shape handles to extend the rebar to the left and right edges of the garage wall as shown. under Graphics. and click OK. In the next exercise. and on the Options Bar. 48 On the Toolbar. click . 54 In the Element Properties dialog. click . click OK. and draw a zoom box around the garage ramp. “Area Reinforcement Wall Detail” on page 239. select Maximum Spacing. click .
47 Press and hold SHIFT.
Notice the single vertical rebar is visible. enter 1' 6".
Extend the vertical rebar for the garage wall
49 Select the single rebar. clear Visible. 53 In the Rebar Element View Visibility States dialog.
Additional rebar will be placed at the specified distance. double-click 3D. 46 On the Toolbar.
52 In the Element Properties dialog.
238 | Chapter 9 Concrete Details
. click Edit for View Visibility States. and rotate the model to view the garage ramp side of the structure.

2 On the Toolbar. 7 In the section view. double-click Garage Level-1. and draw a zoom box around the upper north wall of the structure. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. 6 On the Options Bar.0" for Scale. click the Training Files icon. and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the foundation wall is shown. 4 Add a section line that cuts through the north wall of the structure as shown.Area Reinforcement Wall Detail
Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. select 3/4" = 1' . NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown.rvt located in the Imperial folder. Open i_RST_Area_Reinf_Wall.
Create a section view
1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Structural Plans.
5 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view.
Area Reinforcement Wall Detail | 239
. select the crop view. click
.
3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Section.

240 | Chapter 9 Concrete Details
. 10 On the Toolbar.Sketch the area reinforcement
8 Select the foundation wall. under 3D Views. double-click 3D. click .
11 Rotate the model to view the atrium side of the structure.
9 In the Project Browser.

and trace the outline of the foundation wall as shown.
13 On the Design Bar.The foundation wall is highlighted.
Area Reinforcement Wall Detail | 241
.
12 On the Options Bar. click Lines. to enter sketch mode. click
.

14 On the Design Bar.
242 | Chapter 9 Concrete Details
. click Major Direction Edge.NOTE The 2 short lines adjacent to the vertical line of the outline represent the rebar major direction. adjacent to the major bars. The area reinforcement is automatically applied to the selected foundation wall. Minor bars will be placed perpendicular to the major bars.
15 In the Project Browser. double-click Section 3. and select one of the horizontal lines of the outline. and is indicated on the 3D view with an X as shown. To change the major direction. on the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. Bars will be placed parallel to the major direction near both wall faces. under Sections (Building Sections).

The area reinforcement for the foundation wall is displayed.
Remove the major bars
16 Select the area reinforcement.
Area Reinforcement Wall Detail | 243
.
Notice the graphical controls to toggle the hook orientation appear at the base of the reinforcement.

enter 30.
18 In the Element Properties dialog.
Change the number of rebar for the exterior and interior layers
19 In the Element Properties dialog. select Fixed Number. and click OK. do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
For Exterior Major Number of Lines. under Layers. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. click
. For Exterior Minor Number of Lines. for Value. enter 30.
244 | Chapter 9 Concrete Details
. Click OK.17 On the Options Bar.
Reselect Interior Major Direction and Exterior Major Direction. For Interior Minor Number of Lines. clear the values for Exterior Major Direction and Interior Major Direction. under Construction. Notice the rebar for the major span direction of the foundation wall is no longer present. For Interior Major Number of Lines. under Layers. enter 30. enter 30. and click OK.

Add annotation
25 Right-click in an empty part of the drawing area. click . move the area reinforcement tag approximately as shown. click Modify.Notice that more bars are displayed in the section view. and click OK. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click Zoom to Fit. click Tag ➤ By Category. 23 On the Options Bar.
Change bar type
22 Select the Area Reinforcement.
21 On the Design Bar. change all Bar Types to #4.
28 On the Design Bar. 27 Click the area reinforcement to place the tag. click Modify.
Area Reinforcement Wall Detail | 245
.
24 In the Element Properties dialog. under Layers. 29 Using the drag control.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. a new dataset is supplied.
246 | Chapter 9 Concrete Details
. 31 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. In the next exercise. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. click Section. 4 Add a section line that cuts through the circular foundation as shown.
. double-click Garage Level-1.
Area Reinforcement Slab Detail
Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. Open i_RST_Area_Reinf_Slab. “Area Reinforcement Slab Detail” on page 246. click structure as shown. under Structural Plans. click the Training Files icon.30 Click File menu ➤ Close. You can save the open file if you wish.rvt located in the Imperial folder.
Create a section view
1 In the Project Browser.
2 On the Toolbar. and draw a zoom box around the circular foundation on the north side of the
3 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

double-click Garage Level -1. select Shading w/Edges. 6 On the View Control Bar. 9 Select the concrete slab as shown. For Model Graphics Style. do the following:
■ ■ ■
For Scale. For Detail Level.0". select the crop view.
Area Reinforcement Slab Detail | 247
. and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the concrete slab on Garage Level-1 is shown. select Fine.5 Double-click the section head to open the section view.
7 In the section view. under Structural Plans. select 1/4" = 1' .
Sketch the area reinforcement
8 In the Project Browser.

15 On the Options Bar. 23 Select the rebar tag. change all Bar Types to #4. and click OK. and on the Options Bar.
Change bar type
17 Select the Area Reinforcement. 21 Click the area reinforcement to place the tag. click . click . clear Top Major Direction.
Notice the graphical controls to toggle the hook orientation appear at each end of the area reinforcement.13 In the Project Browser.
19 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 On the Options Bar. click Modify. click Tag ➤ By Category. double-click Section 4. under Sections (Building Sections). 24 Using the drag control. under Layers.
Area Reinforcement Slab Detail | 249
. move the rebar tag approximately as shown. select Free End.
Add annotation
20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.
Change the area reinforcement properties
14 Select the area reinforcement. 22 On the Design Bar. and click OK. under Layers. The area reinforcement for the slab is displayed.
16 In the Element Properties dialog.

double-click Level 3. and draw a zoom box around the slab opening on the north side of the structure
3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. a new dataset is supplied. You are now in sketch mode. click as shown. 4 Select the slab opening. “Path Reinforcement Detail” on page 250. 2 On the Toolbar. In the next exercise. .rvt located in the Imperial folder. click .25 Click File menu ➤ Close.
Path Reinforcement Detail
Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. click Rebar ➤ Sketch Path Reinforcement. click the Training Files icon. 26 Proceed to the next exercise.
250 | Chapter 9 Concrete Details
. Open i_RST_Path_Reinf. 5 On the Options Bar. under Structural Plans. You can save the open file if you wish. In the left pane of the Open dialog.
Sketch the path reinforcement
1 In the Project Browser. and enter 1' 0" for Offset.
6 Draw a path reinforcement box approximately as shown.

10 On the Options Bar.
11 In the Element Properties dialog.
8 On the Design Bar. select #4. click Finish Sketch. 7 On the Design Bar.
Create a section view
12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Section. click Modify. 13 Add a section line that cuts through the slab opening as shown.
Change bar type
9 Select the Path Reinforcement. click . The path reinforcement for the slab opening is displayed. for Primary Bar .Type.
Path Reinforcement Detail | 251
. under Layers. and click OK.NOTE The lines you sketch for the path reinforcement box cannot intersect and must not form a closed loop.

select Shading w/Edges. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. select Fine.0". 15 Double-click the section head to open the section view. select 1/4" = 1' .
NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown.
17 In the section view. do the following:
■ ■ ■
For Scale. For Model Graphics Style. 16 On the View Control Bar. and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the edge of the opening in the slab and the path reinforcement on Level 3 is shown. For Detail Level. select the crop view.
252 | Chapter 9 Concrete Details
.14 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

you will learn how to save both the individual views and complete detail sheets as a new detail library and then import these details into a different project. you begin by opening a project that contains common drafting view details. 25 Using the drag control.
Add annotation
21 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Free End. 20 Click the toggle control to change the rebar hook type as shown.
Creating a Detail Library
In this lesson. move the rebar tag approximately as shown. 22 Click the path reinforcement to place the tag. a new dataset is supplied. click Tag ➤ By Category. 27 Proceed to the next lesson. You can save the open file if you wish.
. click Modify. and on the Options Bar. 23 On the Design Bar.
Notice the toggle hook orientation icon appears. 24 Select the rebar tag.
Creating a Detail Library | 253
.Change rebar properties
18 On the Toolbar. Instead of having to draw these details for every project. “Creating a Detail Library” on page 253. In the next lesson. and draw a zoom box around the edge of the slab opening. click 19 Select the rebar.
26 Click File menu ➤ Close.

4 In the Save As dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Locate a common drive that can be accessed by all team members.1 . select Show drafting views only. when you insert these views into a new project. however.
7 In the Save As dialog. Enter Detail Library for the folder name. Only the drafting views will be displayed. For File name.TYPICAL DETAILS. 8 Click File menu ➤ Close. Open the new folder.
NOTE When you save your file. Revit Structure will save views that contain 3D objects.
Save individual views to the library
5 Click File menu ➤ Save to Library ➤ Save Views. do the following:
■ ■
In the list of views. clear Drawing Sheet: S.
■ ■
Select both Footing Section views.
Creating a Drafting View Detail Library | 255
. 6 In the Save Views dialog. enter FOOTING SECTION. navigate to the Detail Library folder created in step 4. Click Save. Click OK. only the 2D elements will be inserted. do the following:
■ ■ ■
Under Save in. Under File name. enter TYPICAL COLUMN BEAM AND GIRDER DETAILS. Under Views. Click Save. Click the icon to the right of Save In to create a new Folder.

9 Proceed to the next exercise. “Importing Details from the Library” on page 256. Click Open.
Insert drawing sheet from the library
1 Click File menu ➤ Insert from File ➤ Views. a duplicate types dialog displays. Click OK. 4 Once the drawing sheet opens.
Importing Details from the Library
Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. “Creating a Drafting View Detail Library” on page 254 before proceeding.rvt.
256 | Chapter 9 Concrete Details
.
3 In the Insert Views dialog:
■ ■
Select Drawing Sheet: S. close the warning dialog that appears. Select the file TYPICAL COLUMN BEAM AND GIRDER DETAILS. Click OK.
Because you are importing element types that may already exist in the project.1 . click the Training Files icon. Open i_RST_Insert_Detail.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select the Detail Library folder you created in the previous exercise.TYPICAL DETAILS. 2 In the Open dialog:
■ ■ ■
For Look in.rvt located in the Imperial folder.

Click OK.10 In the Open dialog:
■ ■ ■
For Look in. Click OK.
Importing Details from the Library | 259
. Select the file Footing Sections. select Drafting View: Footing Section 2. a duplicate types dialog appears.
11 In the Insert Views dialog:
■ ■
Under Views.rvt.
Because you are importing element types that may already exist in the project. select the folder Detail Library you created in the previous exercise. Click Open.

You have created a library of common drafting details that can be shared by each member of the structural team. “Annotating and Dimensioning” on page 261.
260 | Chapter 9 Concrete Details
. You have also imported both individual detail views as well as the entire detail sheet into an existing project.12 Click File menu ➤ Close. 13 Proceed to the next tutorial.

261
. you learn how to annotate and dimension your Revit Structure 2008 projects.Annotating and Dimensioning
10
In this tutorial.

move the cursor over the north wall of the proposed North Building. radial.rvt located in the Imperial folder. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. Open i_RST_Dimensioning. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog.
Creating Dimensions
In this exercise.
262 | Chapter 10 Annotating and Dimensioning
. there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. and angular. By default. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components and select existing components. linear. Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. select it. you learn how to create and modify different types of permanent dimensions that you can add to your drawings. click Dimension. The dimension types include aligned. and double-click Floor.
5 Move the cursor toward the south wall and when the centerline of the wall highlights. multi-segmented. 4 When the centerline of the wall highlights.
3 Without making any changes on the Options Bar. select it. click the Training Files icon.Dimensioning
In this lesson. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your designs.
Create permanent dimensions
1 In the Project Browser. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. dimensions are aligned and snap to wall centerlines. In Revit Structure.

8 On the Design Bar. and click to place the dimension. Only aligned. and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way. and the distance between them does not change because the dimension is constrained. click Modify. indicating that the dimension can be modified. Notice that the south wall moves with the north wall. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the referenced walls without first unlocking the dimension. toward the empty space outside the wall. A lock symbol that is unlocked displays next to it.6 Move the cursor to the left. The dimension displays in the drawing. The lock displays as locked. linear. 13 On the Options Bar. select Wall centerlines for Prefer. click the lock to unlock it.
7 Click the lock.
Creating Dimensions | 263
.
10 Click
. click Dimension. 14 Select the north and south walls of the North Building. 9 Select the north wall and move it upward.
Create a multi-segmented dimension
12 On the Design Bar.
11 Select the dimension. and press DELETE.

17 Move the cursor to the left of the South Building. and click to set the dimension location. click . In addition. Move the cursor to the inside of the curved wall. An unlocked lock symbol displays next to each dimension segment. and select Wall centerlines for Prefer. 16 Select the exterior faces of the top and bottom walls of the South Building. click Dimension.
21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. an equal symbol with a slash through it is displayed. 19 On the Options Bar.15 On the Options Bar. select Wall faces for Prefer.
264 | Chapter 10 Annotating and Dimensioning
.
Create a radial dimension
18 On the Design Bar. and draw a zoom box around the curved wall. and click to place the dimension.
20 Dimension a curved wall of the North Building:
■ ■
Select the southwest corner wall to display the radial dimension. indicating that the dimension segments are not equal in length.

click Modify.
28 Dimension the angled wall at the top left of the North Building:
■
Select the inside face of the angled wall below the opening.
22 On the Design Bar.
■
Create a linear dimension
29 On the Options Bar. and select Wall faces for Prefer. select the dimension line of the radial dimension.
Creating Dimensions | 265
. and press DELETE.
26 Adjust the zoom settings so that you can add a dimension to the upper-left portion of the North Building. and then select the inside face of the vertical wall below it. and place the dimension as shown. click . 24 On the Options Bar. and click to place the dimension. as shown. and verify that Wall faces is selected for Prefer.
25 Dimension the curved wall again:
■ ■
Move your cursor over the inside face of the wall until it highlights. Move your cursor to the right to size the dimension arc. click . Select the inside face of the wall. the default dimension option. click . 23 On the Design Bar.The dimension is snapped to the wall centerline.
Create an angular dimension
27 On the Options Bar. click Dimension.

For example. Each time you press TAB. select it. 30 Dimension interior walls in the South Building:
■
In the top room on the left side of the building.
Controlling Witness Line Location
In this exercise. and press TAB repeatedly. i_RST_Dimensioning-in progress.
266 | Chapter 10 Annotating and Dimensioning
. 6 Position the cursor over the wall. Move your cursor to the right. The dimension is always constrained to either the horizontal or vertical axis. “Controlling Witness Line Location” on page 266. and change the origin of dimension witness lines. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_Dimensioning-in progress. 33 Proceed to the next exercise.Notice that the Prefer and Pick options are no longer available on the Options Bar. select a point at the interior corner of the top left wall join. but do not select anything. in some cases. you learn to add.rvt. you may want to locate the 2 outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. click Modify. The linear dimension tool has a more restricted selection filter so that you can select only points. However. 3 On the Options Bar. whereas the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. Notice that only the wall faces highlight when you move the cursor over them. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. When you place dimensions. click Dimension. a different wall selection choice highlights. 32 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Select the interior corner of the bottom left wall join of the room. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.
■ ■
31 On the Design Bar. and depends on the cursor tracking behavior. delete. 7 When the exterior face of the wall highlights. 5 Alternate the cursor position over the inner and outer wall face. including the wall centerline. for a multi-segmented dimension. because the Prefer wall faces option is selected instead of the Prefer wall centerline option. 4 Move the cursor over the north wall of the North Building. verify that Wall faces is selected for Prefer. and click to place the dimension.rvt
Override dimension defaults
1 Delete the multi-segmented vertical dimension that you placed along the left side of the building model in the previous exercise. You can override the cursor tracking by pressing the SPACEBAR.

and control boxes display on each witness line. and select the exterior face. click Modify. 13 Select the dimension that you just placed. and select the exterior face.
Controlling Witness Line Location | 267
. 9 Move the cursor to the top horizontal wall of the South Building. and select it. The dimension highlights. 10 Move the cursor to the south wall of the South Building.
Edit dimension witness lines
12 On the Design Bar. 11 Place the dimension as shown. press TAB until the wall centerline highlights.8 Move the cursor over the south wall of the North Building.

14 Click twice on the control box on the witness line that references the south wall of the North Building. and click Delete Witness Line.
16 Move the cursor to the control box on the witness line that references the north wall of the South Building. The witness line moves to interior wall face. The witness line is deleted.
15 Click the control box again. 17 Right-click the control box. The witness line moves to the wall centerline. but do not select it.
268 | Chapter 10 Annotating and Dimensioning
.

click . click Edit/New. and select the multi-segmented dimension that you modified in the previous exercise. The dimension updates as shown. 22 Proceed to the next exercise.
Change the type parameters of the floor plan dimensions
1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.
Modifying Dimension Properties
In this exercise. i_RST_Dimensioning-in progress. enter 3/16” for the Text Size. If you right-click the control box. click Modify. 4 In the Type Properties dialog.
Modifying Dimension Properties | 269
.18 Right-click the dimension line that references the face of the south wall of the North Building.rvt. Under Text. The full dimension string is displayed. and click Edit Witness Lines. “Modifying Dimension Properties” on page 269. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select Right. 2 On the Options Bar. IMPORTANT Be careful to right-click the witness line and not the control box on the witness line. change the following type parameter values:
■ ■
Under Text.
5 Click OK twice. then Up for Read Convention. 21 Click File menu ➤ Save.
3 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 Select the outside face of the north wall of the South Building. click Modify. click in the drawing area away from the floor plan.
20 To end the editing command. 6 On the Design Bar. a context menu with different options is displayed. you learn to modify the type parameters of dimensions.

Align the 2 uppermost horizontal walls in the floor plan
1 On the Tools toolbar. Open i_RST_Alignment. indicating that the Align command is active. Aligning components is similar to dimensioning components with a value of zero. when sketching walls. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. a lock symbol immediately displays.
270 | Chapter 10 Annotating and Dimensioning
.
The cursor displays 2 arrows at its tip. alignments can be made and locked with minimal effort.rvt located in the Imperial folder.7 Click File menu ➤ Close. You can save the open file if you wish. click . Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. For example. A locked alignment is a constraint that is maintained if any of the aligned components are moved or modified. a new dataset is provided. “Working with Alignments and Constraints” on page 270. click the Training Files icon. allowing you to lock the alignment of the walls. As you create components. In the left pane of the Open dialog. if 2 or more walls are colinear. 2 Align the walls:
■ ■
Select the exterior face of the uppermost horizontal wall.
Working with Alignments and Constraints
In this exercise. In the next exercise. Select the exterior face of the shorter horizontal wall on the left. you learn to align components and lock their alignment to better work with them in your drawings.

The symbol changes to a closed lock. 5 Select the lower center wall to define it as the target fixed wall to which the other walls will align. and select Wall centerlines for Prefer. 8 Select the short horizontal wall on the right. 7 Click the lock to lock the alignment of the walls. indicating that the alignment of the 2 walls is now locked. 3 Click the lock.
Working with Alignments and Constraints | 271
.
6 Select the short wall to the left. select Multiple Alignment. When you align 2 components. The lock symbol displays as unlocked.The shorter horizontal wall on the left moves to align with the upper horizontal wall. the first component that you select is the target and remains fixed in position. indicating the 2 walls are not constrained to each other. while the second component moves to complete the alignment.
Align the 3 short horizontal walls
4 On the Options Bar.

but the wall on the right does not because the alignment between the 2 walls is not constrained (locked). and drag it downward.Do not lock this segment of the alignment.
12 Click the right wall. click
once to undo the move. click Modify. 10 Select the middle horizontal wall.
9 On the Design Bar.
272 | Chapter 10 Annotating and Dimensioning
.
11 On the toolbar. Move the walls to verify the alignment. The wall on the left moves with the middle wall when you drag it. and then click the lock to align the wall with the middle wall.

A lock is displayed.Align the windows on the floor plan
13 On the Tools toolbar. 21 On the Tools toolbar. and align the windows. clear Multiple Alignment. 15 Select the window in the upper horizontal wall on the left side of the floor plan. 18 Select the far right window in the top wall. indicating the constraint. and select the dimension between the second window and the right wall. click Modify.
16 Select the window on the far left in the lower wall. The second window does not align because it is already constrained by a locked dimension.
Working with Alignments and Constraints | 273
. The 2 windows align.
17 Select the far right window in the bottom wall. click .
14 On the Options Bar. click . on the Design Bar. 19 To view the constraint. 20 Click the lock to unlock it.

1 View the south wall. and notice that it includes 5 openings. i_RST_Alignment-in progress.rvt.rvt. 24 Proceed to the next exercise. instead of selecting the wall and all the openings as dimension references. “Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions” on page 274. as shown.
23 Click File menu ➤ Save As.22 Align the remaining windows.
274 | Chapter 10 Annotating and Dimensioning
.
Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.
Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions
In this exercise. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_Alignment-in progress. you learn how to automatically dimension a linear wall with openings (windows) by selecting the wall.

and click to add the dimension.
Verify Wall centerlines is selected for Prefer. the windows).
7 Move your cursor below the south wall. click Modify. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings (in this case.You want to dimension the wall so that the width of each opening displays in the dimension string. Click Options. The 2 vertical walls highlight.
2 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. select Openings and Widths. do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■
Click
. 3 On the Options Bar.
Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions | 275
. 6 Select the south wall. 8 On the Design Bar. and that the window widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. 5 Click OK.
4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog. Select Entire Walls for Pick. indicating the start and end of the dimension string.

2 On the Options Bar. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. You can save the open file if you wish. you learn how to use the spot dimension feature of Revit Structure. select Spot Elevations: No Symbol (Relative). Notice the value of the spot elevation is displayed as the cursor is moved. a new dataset is provided. and draw a zoom box around the upper view as shown. In the next exercise.
3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.
276 | Chapter 10 Annotating and Dimensioning
. 6 Place the spot dimension as follows:
■
Move the cursor along the edge of the tapered roof. “Working with Spot Dimensions” on page 276.
■
Click the center of the tapered insulation to create the first leader point as shown. 10 Proceed to the next exercise.9 Click File menu ➤ Close.rvt located in the Imperial folder. 5 On the Options Bar. Open i_RST_Spot_Dimensions_Tapered_Roof. Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. click . 4 In the Type Selector.
Working with Spot Dimensions
In this exercise. click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Structural Plans. select Leader. and Current Level for Relative Base.
Add spot dimensions to a tapered roof
1 In the Project Browser. and double-click New Roof.

click
. click Modify. 10 On the Options Bar. Click to place the spot dimension. and draw a zoom box around the structural columns as shown. and Current Level for Relative Base.
Working with Spot Dimensions | 277
. Move the cursor to the left.■ ■ ■ ■
Move the cursor up and to the left.
7 On the Options Bar. Click to create the second leader point.
■
On the Design Bar. select Leader. select Spot Elevations: No Symbol (Relative). 11 Place the spot dimension as follows:
■
Click the corner of the slab (grid location A1) to create the first leader point as shown.
8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 9 In the Type Selector. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation.

expand Structural Plans. Click to create the second leader point. click Modify.
12 Repeat the previous steps to add spot dimensions to the slab at additional locations as shown. click .
Add a spot dimension to a footing
13 In the Project Browser.■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Move the cursor up and to the right. 14 On the Options Bar. and draw a zoom box around a footing as shown. Click to place the spot dimension.
278 | Chapter 10 Annotating and Dimensioning
. and double-click Foundation. Drag the leader to the right to place the dimension. Move the cursor to the right.
■
On the Design Bar.

click Properties.
■ ■
Move the cursor to the right. select Spot Elevations: No Symbol (Relative). 16 In the Type Selector. 17 On the Options Bar. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. click Modify. which is the elevation at the top of the footing. Move the cursor up and to the right.15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 20 On the Options Bar.
Working with Spot Dimensions | 279
. Click to create the third leader point. 18 Place the spot elevation as follows:
■ ■ ■
Click the upper-right corner of the footing.
Change the spot dimension properties
19 Select the spot dimension.
■
On the Design Bar. select Leader. Notice that the dimension is displayed. and Current Level for Relative Base. Click to create the second leader point.

a new dataset is provided. You can save the open file if you wish.
22 On the Design Bar. and double-click Level 2. You learn how to add a beam tag. and create a custom mark in place of the beam tag.
Tagging Beams
In this exercise.
Annotating
In this lesson. tag all the beams that are not tagged.
23 Click File menu ➤ Close. In the next lesson.rvt located in the Imperial folder. Move the cursor over the beams in the drawing area.
Add a beam tag
1 In the Project Browser. 24 Proceed to the next lesson. do the following:
■
Under Text. 3 On the Options Bar. Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. Open i_RST_Annotations. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Structure. enter TOF=. clear Leader. you learn how to place beam tags. click the Training Files icon. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.
■
Click OK.
280 | Chapter 10 Annotating and Dimensioning
. In the left pane of the Open dialog.21 In the Element Properties dialog. click Tag ➤ By Category. for Prefix. click Modify. You learn how to:
■ ■ ■ ■
Tag a single beam Tag a beam system Tag beams by category Create a custom type mark in place of the beam tag. and notice the tag for the specific beam is displayed. expand Structural Plans. “Annotating” on page 280.

4 Click any beam to place the tag. Notice the tags are loaded in the structural view.
Tag all beams in the structural plan
5 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.
Tagging Beams | 281
. select Structural Framing Tag: Standard. do the following:
■
Under Category.
■
Click Apply. click Tag All Not Tagged.
■
Click OK. 6 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog.

enter W18. and click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. click Apply and OK. click Apply and OK. click Edit/New. 13 Click one of the W14 X 22beams. and on the Options Bar. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. .Create a custom type mark tag
7 Right-click the open area above the model. click 10 In the Element Properties dialog.
282 | Chapter 10 Annotating and Dimensioning
. click OK.
12 In the Element Properties dialog. under Type Mark.
9 Click one of the W18 X 40beams. and on the Options Bar. click Edit/New.
11 In the Type Properties dialog.
. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. 8 Draw a zoom box that surrounds the upper beams between grids C and D as shown. enter W14. under Type Mark.

Apply the new type mark tag to all beams
24 In the plan view. select the active file. 25 In the Type Selector. click Yes. and on the Options Bar. Click Save. click OK.by Type Mark: Standard. When prompted to open the Structural Framing Tag for editing. click . and on the Options bar.by Type Mark for File name.16 In the Element Properties dialog. select Structural Framing Tag .
22 On the Family Design Bar. and click OK. select Type Mark. hold the Ctrl key. click the W18 X 40 beam tag. Enter Structural Framing Tag .
Edit the beam tag family
17 Click one of the W18 X 40beam tags. The new beam tag is applied to the selected beams. do the following:
■ ■ ■
Select a folder location.
20 Click File menu ➤ Save As.
Tagging Beams | 283
. 18 Click the structural label. under Label. 23 In the Load into Projects dialog. click Edit Family. and select the W14 X 22 beam tag. 21 In the Save As dialog. You are now in the Family Editor.
19 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click Load into Projects.

■
Click OK. and draw a zoom box around the beam system as shown. The existing beam tags have been removed for this step. The new beam tag is applied to all beams. click Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name.by Type Mark: Standard. on the File menu.
30 If you want to save your changes. select Structural Framing Tag .
Tag the beam system
31 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. or close the exercise file without saving your changes.
29 In the Type Selector.
Tagging Beams | 285
.

“Worksets” on page 287.32 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 35 Proceed to the next tutorial. and notice the tag for the specific beam system is displayed. Move the cursor over the beams in the drawing area. click Beam System Tag.
286 | Chapter 10 Annotating and Dimensioning
. 33 Click any beam within the beam system to place the tag. and save the completed project in a folder location of your preference.
34 Click File ➤ Save As.

In this tutorial. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project. Using Worksharing.
287
. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. In Revit Structure 2008. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. this collection of building elements (such as roofs. engineers commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional task. They can also update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. This prevents possible conflicts within the project.Worksets
11
On many building projects. they cannot make changes to it. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. slabs. and they can publish work to a central file whenever they choose.) is called a Workset. beams. however. and to have all the elements coordinated by Revit Structure. You can enable Worksharing for any project. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network to their own hard drive. etc. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project. to allow visibility control and ownership for each assigned element. All other team members can view this workset.

The Worksets dialog is displayed. under Show.
Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets
In this exercise. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the central file.rvt file located in the Imperial folder. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. Open the i_RST_Worksets. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Using Worksharing in a Project
In this lesson. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing.
Enable Worksharing
1 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 In the Worksets dialog.
Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. click the Training Files icon. For training purposes. TIP The initial owner name is assigned by the operating system of your computer. the username was changed in the Options dialog (accessible from the Settings menu). select:
■ ■ ■
Families Project Standards Views
288 | Chapter 11 Worksets
. and User1 is displayed as the present owner. In the next exercise. You begin by enabling Worksharing within a project and setting up the initial workset environment. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and how to borrow particular elements from other users.

do the following:
■ ■
For new workset name. and all team members must have access to all linked or imported DWG or RVT files. a small number of team members are working on the structural model. Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected.
10 In the Worksets dialog.
Creating new worksets
6 In the Worksets dialog.
8 In the Worksets dialog. click New. enter Beams and Columns. In this simple training project. enter Foundation. Click OK. For training purposes. In this case. do the following:
■ ■ ■
For new workset name. 7 In the New Workset dialog. Project Standards. This improves performance because fewer components need to be generated in each view. The project is subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. a third is assigned all beams and columns. clear Families.
■
Click OK. enter Elevator Shafts. The foundation should only be visible in specific views.4 Scroll down the list of workset names. 9 In the New Workset dialog.
Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 289
. Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected. and notice all are editable by you. Therefore. a fifth is assigned to the elevator shafts. and Views. 5 Under Show. click New. one team member is assigned to the slabs. a fourth is assigned the foundation and garage ramp. 11 In the New Workset dialog. a second user is assigned the roof. Clear Visible by default in all views. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. Only User-Created worksets should display. do the following:
■ ■ ■
For new workset name. imagine 5 users including yourself. click New. Click OK.

18 In the Worksets dialog.
■
Click OK. enter Roof. do the following:
■ ■
For new workset name. Clear Visible by default in all views. 13 In the New Workset dialog. enter Linked or imported DWG or RVT files. click New. 19 In the New Workset dialog. 17 In the New Workset dialog. Again. The garage ramp should only be visible in specific views. 15 In the New Workset dialog.
290 | Chapter 11 Worksets
. Click OK. this improves performance. Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected.
14 In the Worksets dialog.12 In the Worksets dialog. enter Garage Ramp. click New. do the following:
■
For new workset name. click New. this improves performance. click New. Clear Visible by default in all views. Again. enter Slabs.
16 In the Worksets dialog. The roof should only be visible in specific views. do the following:
■ ■
For new workset name. do the following:
■ ■ ■
For new workset name.
■
Click OK.

Checking in the worksets
24 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. 25 In the Worksets dialog. enter Worsksets Project .Central. Click OK. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. 23 Click Save. select:
■
User-Created
Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 291
. Now that you have created the central file. under Show. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to.■ ■
Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. for file name.
You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. The next step is to create the central file. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. click OK
Create the central file
21 Click File menu ➤ Save As.
20 In the Worksets dialog. 22 In the Save As dialog. NOTE Continue using the central file for the following steps.

enter Initial Central File Setup.Central on the network drive. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central.
Creating a local file
32 Click File menu ➤ Open. 27 On the right side of the dialog. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save As. under Comments. click Non Editable. 33 Select the file.
28 In the Worksets dialog. Navigate to the location of the central file Worksets Project .■ ■ ■
Families Project Standards Views
26 Select all the worksets by pressing CTRL + A.
292 | Chapter 11 Worksets
. and click OK. and click Open. click File menu ➤ Close. 30 In the Save to Central dialog. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and that all Editable values are set to No.
31 After the file is saved. click OK.

6 Click OK. In this exercise. checked in all worksets. notice that all worksets are available for editing. 2 Click Cancel.
4 On the Options Bar. “Assigning Worksets” on page 293. NOTE Continue using the local file Worksets Project_Local-User 1 for the following exercise. for Workset. you assign the structural columns workset to User1.
Assigning Worksets
In this exercise. 7 Click the highlighted column to deselect it. click
. and click Save. 8 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. and created a local file. 3 Click one of the structural columns as shown. 1 Click File menu ➤ Worksets.
Assigning Worksets | 293
.35 In the Save As dialog.
5 In the Element Properties dialog. select Beams and Columns. 36 Enter Worksets Project_Local-User 1 for File name. you enabled Worksharing on a project. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. and created new worksets to accommodate each team member. In the Worksets dialog. You then created the central file. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. navigate to a folder on your local computer.

The puzzle-piece icons disappear. select Beams and Columns. and a workset puzzle-piece icon displays next to each column indicating it can be changed to editable.
15 On the Options Bar.
16 In the Element Properties dialog.All structural columns in the model are highlighted. for Workset. but the columns remain highlighted.
14 Right-click one of the columns. click
. and click Make Elements Editable.
17 Click OK.
Assigning Worksets | 295
. The columns and beams elements are now assigned for Workset1.

19 In the Save to Central dialog.
4 In the Worksets dialog. clear Borrowed Elements. and click OK. In the Worksets dialog. and click the Editable on the right-side of the dialog. 21 Proceed to the next exercise.18 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. Navigate to the location of the central file Worsksets Project-Central on the network drive.
296 | Chapter 11 Worksets
. under After save relinguish editable. you make the entire workset editable and assign individual elements to specific users. “Making the Entire Workset Editable” on page 296.
Making the Entire Workset Editable
In this exercise.
20 Click File menu ➤ Save. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. select Workset1. 3 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. 2 Click Open. notice User1 is listed under Borrowers for Beams and Columns. to save the local file.

User1 is now listed as the Owner of Workset1. 7 On the Options Bar.
Assign the floor workset
6 Draw a pick box around the entire model to select all elements.
8 In the Filter dialog. click Check None.
5 Click OK. and select Floors. click .
9 Click OK.
Making the Entire Workset Editable | 297
.

assign the remaining worksets for the elevator shafts.
16 Click OK. The roof is now assigned for Workset1.14 On the Options Bar.
Making the Entire Workset Editable | 299
. click
. for Workset. 19 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.
20 Clear Beams and Columns. and the garage ramp. click the Worksets tab. and Slabs. foundation. This is the keyboard shortcut for Visibility/Graphic override. and then click Apply and OK.
15 In the Element Properties dialog. select Roof. Roof.
Turn visibility on/off
17 Click elsewhere in the drawing area to deselect the roof. Using the steps described in the previous procedure. 18 Enter VV.

To turn off additional elements. 27 Under Comment. Each modifies the structural model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. each user must check out worksets. In the following section of this exercise. 23 Check Beams and Columns. select:
■ ■
User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements
26 After the file is saved. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). click the Worksets tab. and proceed to Creating a local copy. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. please do so before continuing. and Slabs. clear the box next to the desired element.
Using Worksets with Multiple Users
In this exercise. Throughout the process. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. skip the following section. The elements are now visible in the view. 25 In the Save to Central dialog. If you have not yet completed these exercises.
Save to central file
24 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Structure and setting the username to User 2. two users access the central file through a network connection. 28 Click OK. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this.
22 Enter VV. enter Reassigning elements to their own worksets.21 The elements are now hidden from the view. and reload the latest changes. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. click File menu ➤ Save to save a local copy.
300 | Chapter 11 Worksets
. make elements editable. and then click Apply and OK. For training purposes. and on the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. “Using Worksets with Multiple Users” on page 300. Roof.

This file is for your use only. 18 Click File menu ➤ Worksets.rvt. click Options. and click OK. and check out worksets
6 Click File menu ➤ Open.
User 2: Create a local file. modify the structural model. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User 2. 19 Try to change the Editable status for Foundation to Yes. 7 In the Open dialog. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. open it now. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. click Options. select Specify. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2.
Creating a local copy
5 In this exercise. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets project-Central. and publish changes
17 User 1 should still have the local file open. 13 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. and reset the Username to your computer login name. For training purposes. specifically sequenced. 15 Select the Foundation workset. This is a system setting.
User 1: Check out worksets. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. 11 In the Save As dialog. 9 In the Opening Worksets dialog. two users work on the structural model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. one user has already created a local file. 8 Click Open. enter User 2. 12 In the File Save Options dialog. 14 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. and select Yes for Editable. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. under Open Worksets. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. You now have a local copy of the project. 2 Start a new Revit Structure session by double-clicking the Revit Structure icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. under Username. instructions are staggered. 4 Click the General Tab and. and click OK. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 3 On the Settings menu. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. If it is not open. You are now the owner of that workset. select the central file and. Notice that the Foundation workset is checked out by User 2. 16 Click OK.Using a second Revit Structure session to mimic User 2
1 Minimize the current Revit Structure window. return to the Settings dialog. and click Save. In addition. consider that person to be User 1. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work.
Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 301
. and click OK. select all the User-Created worksets.

select a footing. and move it.
302 | Chapter 11 Worksets
. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. and select Yes for Editable. expand 3D Views. 25 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. 27 In the Save to Central dialog. and move it. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. 22 Click OK. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. 20 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. 21 Select the Beams and Columns workset. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated.A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. it becomes the active workset. 28 Click OK. 23 In the Project Browser. expand 3D Views. If you only have one workset checked out. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. and double-click 3D-Atrium. 24 Select any column on the foundation level as shown in the following illustration.
User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes
29 In the Project Browser. and double-click 3D-Atrium. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Beams and Columns.
A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists.

Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 303
. 33 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. select Roof to turn on its visibility. 34 Select Roof. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. However. 40 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. The changes User 2 made are apparent. 41 Notice that the roof you added previously now displays. the Visible by default option was not selected. 38 On the Design Bar. Even though the Roof workset is active. click Slab. You should turn on the visibility before adding a roof. and click OK. and click OK. and sketch a new roof between any four beams. under Structural Plans. click Modify. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. double-click Roof. 35 On the Project Browser. click the Worksets tab. and check out additional worksets
32 Click File menu ➤ Reload Latest. select Yes for Editable. any elements added to the structure are automatically assigned to the active workset. Therefore. 37 In the Design Bar. click Pick Supports. This is because when the Roof workset was created. you are asked if you want to make the Roof workset the active workset. 39 On the View menu. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Roof workset. 36 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.
User 1: Reload latest worksets. Click Yes. click Visibility/Graphics.31 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central.

Each user must have network access to the central file. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. This exercise requires two users and. In this exercise.
User 1: Check out worksets
1 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. two users worked on the same structure using worksets. Checking out worksets. There are specific instructions for each user. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. and click OK. leave this file open in its current state. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. You are now the owner of that workset. select them. leave this file open in its current state. Each user checked out worksets. As each of you work. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file.
Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users
In this exercise. In subsequent steps. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). modified the structure and published their changes back to the central file. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. and these problems are rectified. Only one user needs to open the dataset and save the central file to a network location. select Foundation.
304 | Chapter 11 Worksets
. if any User-Created worksets are not open. you save the dataset as a central file. you need to set up your central and local files. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. “Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users” on page 304. At the appropriate point in this exercise. and select Yes for Editable. In the final exercise of this tutorial. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Structure and setting the username to User 2. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. throughout this training.42 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. 43 In the Save to Central dialog. and click Open. 44 Click OK. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. 4 Under Active Workset. NOTE When you open the training dataset for this tutorial. 3 Select the Foundation workset. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. 2 In the Worksets dialog.

select the Beams and Columns workset.
A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. and click OK.
User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element
13 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. select a footing. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. After you submit the request.
Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 305
. click File menu ➤ Editing Requests. 9 On the Options Bar. 10 Using the following illustration as a guide. verify that Editable Only is cleared. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1.User 2: Check out worksets
5 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. expand 3D Views. 12 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to move the footing. 6 In the Worksets dialog. You are now the owner of that workset. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. 7 Under Active Workset. 11 Move the footing. and select Yes for Editable. and double-click 3D-Atrium. At this point.
User 2: Borrow an element from User 1
8 In the Project Browser. select Beams and Columns.

In this case. A message informs you that your request has been granted.
User 1 and 2: Save to Central.
15 Click Grant. 18 Click OK. to Local.
■ ■ ■
User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully
21 Click File menu ➤ Close. 22 Proceed to the next tutorial. 16 Click Close.
306 | Chapter 11 Worksets
. “Project Coordination” on page 307. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. select the following. In this multi-user exercise. and close
19 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. and click OK.
User 2: Check for editability grant
17 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. click Check Now.14 In the Editing Requests dialog. select the request submitted by User 2. and the other user granted it. you requested permission to edit the element. and notice the footing is in the new location. 20 In the Save to Central dialog.

reviews each change individually. Finally.
307
. and determines the impact of each modification on the structure. This task is accomplished using the copy monitor feature that was activated when the project was started. Once each change has been reviewed.Project Coordination
12
You have received the latest model from the architect and changes have been made to the design. an interference check is run on the model to correct the placement of any architectural elements (door. or window) that might interfere with elements in the Revit Structure 2008 model. all changes are documented using the Revit Structure revision system feature. In this tutorial. the structural engineer imports the modified Revit Architecture model.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. floors. which can be accepted. click Apply. double-click Level 3. or postponed.rvt. Finally. walls. levels. Click OK to open the file. and the copy monitor feature was activated. Open i_RST_Coordination. the copy monitor feature automatically notifies you of the changes. and columns for any future modifications. This feature enabled the engineer to monitor the project grids.
1 In the Project Browser. depending on the impact to the design. under Structural Plans. “Starting a New Project” on page 53. the architect’s file was imported into Revit Structure. and then click OK. click the Training Files icon.
NOTE Because some of the changes from the architect involve elements that are monitored by the copy monitor feature of Revit Structure.
Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file
Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. select the Revit Links tab. you begin by opening the Revit Structure file that contains the modified Revit Architecture file. 3 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility Graphics.rvt located in the Imperial folder. rejected. 4 Select the linked file i_RBD_After. When the modified file is brought back into Revit Structure.
308 | Chapter 12 Project Coordination
. you run an interference check to verify that the changes do not interfere with structural elements of the model. In the tutorial. a warning is displayed.Coordination Review
In this lesson.

6 In the Element Properties dialog. Selecting this discipline allows the architectural walls to be visible. click . and draw a zoom box around the lower levels of the elevator shaft as shown.
10 On the Toolbar. 8 On the View Toolbar. and click OK. click 9 On the View Toolbar. 7 Enter ZF. This is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. click
.
5 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. and notice the duplicate grid lines and the relocation of the stairway. . under Graphics. select Coordination for Discipline.
Spin the model until the elevator shaft is visible.The modified Revit Architecture file will now be visible along with the Revit Structure file. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the building at grid line B. Click .
Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file | 309
.

Click between grid lines A and B until the Revit Links box is displayed. Close all additional views that may have been opened accidentally. Click to select the linked file.
The Coordination Review lists all messages that require some type of action.11 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. and a custom message that pertains to each New/Unresolved category. The structural engineer should address each message individually and take some form of action to resolve the conflict. and the Coordination Review icon displays on the Options Bar. These messages identify elements that were deleted. Actions include: Postpone. click
. 12 In the Structural Plan: Level 3 window:
■ ■ ■
Select
. moved. and click Wireframe.
310 | Chapter 12 Project Coordination
. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shaft. click the Model Graphics Style control. Accept Difference. Reject. or changed in some way from the architect’s file.
On the View Control Bar. The Level 3 Plan view and the 3D view are displayed in separate windows.
13 On the Options Bar. 14 Click the 3D Views: 3D window to deselect the plan view. The Revit Architecture file is highlighted.

and click Show. do the following:
■ ■ ■
Expand New/Unresolved ➤ Floors ➤ expand Monitor Floor Sketches.
Review location of grid B
17 Position the Coordination Review dialog so the plan view is visible. then press SHIFT while selecting the remaining messages. and click Show. 18 In the Coordination Review dialog.
■
Click the first message under Monitor Floor Sketches. Click the message Floor: Floor: 6" Concrete.
The concrete floor sketches for all levels of the structure will be adjusted to accommodate the architect’s floor sketch change. The selected floor from the structural model is highlighted in the 3D window.Review change to Floor Sketch
15 Position the Coordination Review dialog so the 3D window is visible.
Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file | 311
. Click the message i_RBD_After.rvt: Grids: Grid:B. and click Apply.
■
In the Action column. 16 In the Coordination Review dialog. select Copy Sketch to Floor: 6" Concrete. and click Show. Grid B from the architect’s model is highlighted on the Level 3 window. do the following:
■ ■
Expand New/Unresolved ➤ Grids ➤ Maintain relative position of Grids ➤ Grid moved. Notice each floor is highlighted on the 3D view. Display the review message for any individual floor by expanding Sketches are Different.

and click Apply.
■
312 | Chapter 12 Project Coordination
. There are 4 changes involving the elevator shaft walls. do the following:
■
Under New/Unresolved ➤ Walls ➤ expand Maintain wall position. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shaft in the plan view. click . For Action.■
For Action. Select one of the messages and notice the wall is highlighted on the Structural Plan: Level 3 plan view. The grid line is adjusted to accommodate the architect’s change. and click Apply.
Review location of elevator walls
19 On the Toolbar. select Modify Wall Basic Wall: Generic 8" Masonry. select Modify Grid B. then press SHIFT while selecting the remaining messages.
■
Click the first message under Wall centerlines are different.
20 In the Coordination Review dialog.

Select Postpone for Action.rvt 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Interference Check ➤ Run Check. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_Coordination-in progress. Click the message Walls: Basic Wall: Generic . Click the Add Comment field. you use the interference tool in Revit Structure to check on 2 potential problems with the stairway. click Apply.
314 | Chapter 12 Project Coordination
. In the Coordination Review dialog. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 24 Proceed to the next exercise.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Click OK.
23 Click File menu ➤ Save As. enter Need to discuss with architect. The first is the possible interference between the stairs and a relocated structural column. “Interference Check” on page 314. Click OK.
Interference Check
In this exercise. i_RST_Coordination-in progress.8" Masonry. and the second is a structural brace that interferes with a door opening in the stairway. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. and OK.rvt. In the Edit Comment dialog.

select i_RBD_After. The next step is to select the architect’s file so it can be checked against the structural project.The default table compares elements within the same project.
Interference Check | 315
.
Notice the categories for the architect’s file differ from the current Revit Structure project.
2 On the right-side of the Interference Check dialog.rvt for Categories from.

and Stairs for the Revit Architecture project. select Structural Columns. expand the message for Level 3 Stairs as shown.
316 | Chapter 12 Project Coordination
. A report is generated showing all instances of interference between columns in the structural project and the upper-left stairway in the Revit Architecture project. There are 7 instances of interference between structural columns and the upper-left stairway.Run interference check on columns and stairs
3 In the list for the current project. Each representing a different level.
4 Click OK. do the following:
■
Under Structural Columns.
5 In the Interference Report dialog.

do the following:
■ ■
Under Structural Framing ➤ expand Doors.10 Select Structural Framing ➤ Vertical Bracing for Current Project.
12 In the Interference Report dialog. There is 1 instance of interference between structural bracing and the door for the upper-left stairway.
318 | Chapter 12 Project Coordination
. Select i_RBD_After.
11 Click OK. and Doors for the Revit Architecture project.rvt: Doors: Door Single. Notice the door from the architect’s model is highlighted on both the 3D View and Structural Plan view windows.

■
Click Export to generate an interference report. In the next lesson. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds.■
Select Structural Framing: L-Angle: L4X4X3/4
. 15 In the Interference Report dialog.
14 Click File menu ➤ Save and save the file in a folder of your preference. “Using Revision Tracking” on page 319. also the brace interferes with the opening.
Export the Brace and Door interference report
13 In the Export dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■
Under Save in.
Using Revision Tracking | 319
. Under File name. Notice the brace from the structural model is highlighted on both the 3D view and Structural Plan view windows.
Using Revision Tracking
Revit Structure provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed.html). Click Save. a new dataset is provided. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the title block of each project sheet. The report provides detail on the interference and should be used to discuss the problem with the architect.
Setting Up a Revision Table
Dataset
■
Click File menu ➤ Open. Door opening. select Revit Interference Report (*. select a folder location on your local computer.
16 Proceed to the next lesson. enter Brace vs. click Close. You can create a sequence of revisions. Under Save as type.

verify that By Sheet is selected for Numbering Method. When Issued is selected. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. When you use this option. Open i_RST_Revision. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 Verify that Visible is selected. 5 Verify that Issued is cleared.
If Visible is not selected.
Sketching Revision Clouds
In this exercise. and OK. 2 In the Revisions dialog. and enter 2/15/06. 7 Click Apply. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. including revision number and revision date. click the Training Files icon. In general. revision descriptions should be comprehensive.
Add a revision for grid B
3 Click on the value for Release Date. you indicate the changes made by the architect graphically with a revision cloud. For example. the revision is locked and issued to the field. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project.rvt located in the Imperial folder. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. “Sketching Revision Clouds” on page 320. if the active revision is number 1. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. If you select By Project. and enter Moved Grid B west by 2'. This is the date the revisions were identified. Revision clouds have read-only properties. 4 Click on the value for Description.
Specify a revision numbering method
1 On the Settings menu. In most instances.■ ■
In the left pane of the Open dialog. yet as concise as possible.
320 | Chapter 12 Project Coordination
. click Revisions.

allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet. under Sheets (all). 8 Click File menu ➤ Save As.
Add Remaining Revisions | 321
. click Revision Cloud.rvt.
7 On the Design Bar. A new row is added below the existing row in the revision table. Each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched.You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D model views. 2 In the Revisions dialog. you can add a revision cloud to the 3D view once it is placed on a sheet. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.
Add Remaining Revisions
In this exercise. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision.Level 3 Framing Plan. NOTE At this point.
Add a revision cloud for grid B
1 In the Project Browser. i_RST_Revision-in progress. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. the revisions to the project will be issued after all the revision clouds have been drawn. click Add: New. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_Revision-in progress. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. click near grid line B. 3 Right-click the view on the sheet. 6 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified grid line. 4 In the drawing area. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet. the remaining revisions for the project are documented. “Add Remaining Revisions” on page 321. click Revisions. the revision for grid line B should be issued to the field to prevent any changes to the revision cloud. In this tutorial. This is the date the revisions were sent out for review. However. 3 Click on the value for Release Date. and select Activate View. double-click S. 5 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. click Finish Sketch. and enter 2/20/06.rvt
Add a revision for the elevator stairs
1 On the Settings menu.1 . Revit Structure is now in sketch mode.

click above the elevator shaft. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued.4 Click on the value for Description. 5 Verify that Issued is cleared. yet as concise as possible.
11 On the Design Bar. 8 In the drawing area. click Revision Cloud.
If Visible is not selected. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment.
Add a revision for the brace interference
12 In the Revisions dialog. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. In most instances. Revit Structure is now in sketch mode. When Issued is selected. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. click Add: New. and enter Moved Stair exit 2' west.
322 | Chapter 12 Project Coordination
.
Add a revision cloud for the elevator stairs
7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 6 Verify that Visible is selected. In general. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified stairs. A new row is added below the existing row in the revision table. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. click Finish Sketch. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. the revision is locked and issued to the field.

20 In the drawing area.13 Click on the value for Release Date. 22 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. double-click S.
Add a revision cloud for the brace interference
17 In the Project Browser.
If Visible is not selected.2 . 15 Verify that Issued is cleared. In general. This is the date the revisions were sent out for review. allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet. 18 Right-click the center view on the sheet. When Issued is selected. under Sheets (all). any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet. 21 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. and select Activate View. the revision is locked and issued to the field. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. and enter Research brace. yet as concise as possible. In most instances.Stair Shafts Sections. Revit Structure is now in sketch mode. 16 Verify that Visible is selected. click above the brace. 19 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Revision Cloud. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. and enter 2/21/06.
Add Remaining Revisions | 323
. 14 Click on the value for Description.

25 Click on the value for Release Date.
324 | Chapter 12 Project Coordination
. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. and enter 2/22/06. click Add: New. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. The revision cloud is displayed around the brace. 27 Verify that Issued is cleared.
If Visible is not selected.
Add a revision for the door interference
24 In the Revisions dialog. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu.23 On the Design Bar. In most instances. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. yet as concise as possible. 26 Click on the value for Description. the revision is locked and issued to the field. click Finish Sketch. A new row is added below the existing row in the revision table. This is the date the revisions were sent out for review. and enter Research door. When Issued is selected. In general. 28 Verify that Visible is selected.

32 In the drawing area. click Finish Sketch. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Add a revision cloud for the door interference
29 In the Project Browser. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet.rvt
Place a revision tag
1 In the Project Browser. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. and select Activate View. 2 Right-click the view on the sheet. Revit Structure is now in sketch mode. “Tagging Revision Clouds” on page 325. 33 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 36 Click File menu ➤ Save. you apply a revision tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. under Sheets (all).
Tagging Revision Clouds | 325
. click Tag ➤ Tag By Category. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu. The revision cloud is displayed around the door. 31 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 30 Right-click the right view on the sheet.Stair Shafts Sections.
35 On the Design Bar. The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet.Level 3 Framing Plan. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click S. under Sheets (all).2 . 34 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. click above the door. allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet.
Tagging Revision Clouds
In this exercise. i_RST_Revision-in progress. double-click S. allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet. click Revision Cloud.1 . and select Activate View. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.

6 Click to place the tag.Level 3 Framing Plan. i_RST_Revision-in progress.4 On the Options Bar. and because the revision is the first in the project.
326 | Chapter 12 Project Coordination
. clear Leader. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 5 In the drawing area. 7 Repeat steps 2 through 5 to add revision tags for all remaining revision clouds. under Sheets (all). The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud for grid line B. 8 On the File menu. and draw a zoom box around the title block as shown. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. and lock it from further changes.
The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. “Working with Revisions” on page 326. and then issue the revisions to create a record. you first view the revisions that were created in the previous exercise. Because you chose to number by sheet. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. 2 Select . click Save. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.rvt
View the revisions
1 In the Project Browser. the tag is displayed inside the cloud.1 .
Working with Revisions
In this exercise. double-click S. the cloud is tagged as number 1.

you prevent further changes to the revision. 6 Select Issued for each revision entry. On the Settings menu. click Revisions. and draw a zoom box around the title block as shown. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds.Stair Shafts Sections. under Sheets (all). “Structural Analytical Modelling” on page 329. Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing. click Close.
Issue a revision
5 After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. 8 Proceed to the next tutorial. NOTE After you issue a revision. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. and click OK.2 . You do this by issuing the revision. 4 Select . you can no longer modify it. double-click S.
Working with Revisions | 327
.3 In the Project Browser.
7 On the File menu.

328 | Chapter 12 Project Coordination
.

Structural Analytical Modelling
13
In this tutorial.
329
. you learn some basic concepts of the Revit Structure 2008 analytical model and how to prepare the model to be analyzed by a 3rd party analysis software.

Analytical Checks
In this exercise. Analytical checks should be run at different phases of the project and the model adjusted accordingly.
Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. When working with the analytical model. NOTE Reapplying a view template overrides previous view property modifications and View templates can only be applied to geometric views. the template is still applied to the 3D view. you can apply that same template to a 3D view. You can save the View Template from one type of view and apply those same properties to any other geometric view. you learn how to check member supports. Though the View Range property applies only to plan views. Because each view in Revit Structure consists of different properties. You can apply a template to an existing or new view. Revit Structure View Templates provide initial conditions for a view. the View Template saves and applies only common properties. Detail level. All views created with that template are not automatically updated. Open i_RST_SAM_Analytical_Checks. interaction with steel detailers and fabricators and also the analytical model that can be consumed by multiple 3rd party analysis software. loads and load combinations. geometry. Revit Structure applies only the properties applicable to both. and the visibility settings of categories and subcategories. The analytical model consists of structural components. For example. the analytical model is created automatically based on engineering rules and logical relationships between the structural objects. material properties. Views and View Templates are not linked. if you save a template from a plan view.Applying the Analytical Model to the Design Process
Revit Structure combines 2 models. In the left pane of the Open dialog. To update a view. As you create objects and the physical model. View Templates help standardize the look of all views.rvt located in the Imperial folder. Discipline. and run an analytical consistency check on the analytical model shown below. quantity take off. click the Training Files icon.
330 | Chapter 13 Structural Analytical Modelling
. component properties. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. You can also apply an existing view’s view properties using the Apply View Template command. The physical model that is used for documentation. you can reapply the modified template.

select Structural Analytical Normal or Structural Analytical Stick. under the Analytical Model Settings tab. The Structural Analytical Normal view template will present structural components in this new analytical plan view with both the analytical model and the physical model displayed as shown.
NOTE If the visibility of loads is tuned off in the view. 2 In the Select View Template dialog. This tutorial will run both the Member Supports Check and Analytical/Physical Model Consistency Check for all elements selected from the Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings dialog.
Analytical Checks | 331
. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog.
The Structural Analytical Stick view template will present structural components in this new analytical plan with only the analytical model displayed as shown.
Analytical settings
1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. applying either the stick or normal analytical view template to the view will cause loads to be displayed.Applying the view template
1 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. select the Analytical Model Settings tab.

4 In the Warning dialog click . to view each warning. A Warning dialog appears notifying you that there are structural elements that may not be supported properly. Click Structural Columns: W-Wide Flange-Column: W10X33
■ ■
Click Show.
Review support warnings
6 Click Tools menu ➤ Review Warnings.
332 | Chapter 13 Structural Analytical Modelling
. 5 Close the Warning dialog.Check member supports
3 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Check Member Supports.
Notice that the structural element is highlighted on the model as each warning is selected.
7 In the Warning dialog:
■ ■
Expand Structural Element may not be supported ➤ Warning 1. or isolated). Revit Structure checks for instances where a structural element (column) is missing a foundation support (slab. wall. Click OK in the Viewing Tips dialog.

click Close. Notice that there are missing isolated footings at specific grid locations. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Structural Plans.
Correct member supports
11 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2. click Modify.
14 On the Design bar. double-click Ground Level. D-2.Notice the highlighted beam requires an adjacent beam for support on one end.
10 In the Warning dialog. and H-4. E-3. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. 16 Correct the placement of the structural beams as shown.
334 | Chapter 13 Structural Analytical Modelling
. under Structural Plans. 13 Place an isolated footing at each of the following grid locations: E-1. D-4. H-3.
Correct circular reference
15 In the Project Browser.

under Analytical Model.
7 In the Warning dialog.■ ■
Click Show. and on the Options Bar. click . click Close. The Zero-length element is highlighted and displayed in the drawing area. 8 Select the column that was previously highlighted. notice that Ground Level is selected as the value for Top Vertical Projection. Click OK in the Viewing Tips dialog.
336 | Chapter 13 Structural Analytical Modelling
.
In the Element Properties dialog.

click . enter ZF. and select the 3 outermost columns identified in the warning dialog as shown.
Analytical Checks | 337
.
12 Spin the model to view the atrium side of the structure.9 In the Element Properties dialog.
13 Hold the Ctrl key. This is the shortcut for Zoom to Fit. 11 On the View Toolbar.
Correct zero-length elements
10 On the keyboard. click OK.

338 | Chapter 13 Structural Analytical Modelling
. 18 Click File menu ➤ Close. 17 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Analytical / Physical Model Consistency Check.
Load Cases
In the Structural Settings dialog. The Warning dialog does not appear.
16 In the Element Properties dialog. You can save the open file if you wish. This indicates the zero-length warnings have been fixed. 19 Proceed to the next exercise.14 On the Options Bar. you edit and add load cases.
15 Under Analytical Model. The following illustration shows the Structural Settings dialog with the Load Cases tab selected. In the next exercise. select Top of Column. a new dataset is provided. click OK. “Load Cases” on page 338. for Top Vertical Projection. click
.

Revit Structure provides several default load case types that you can use to generate loads in the model. you add. 3 Click Add. you learn how to add new load cases. you add or delete load natures. 2 Click Add. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog.
Adding a Load Case
1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. NOTE The Case Number column of the table is read-only. The selected load case is copied in the table.
Adding a load nature
1 Click in the Load Natures table. or delete load cases. In this table. In this table. edit. and rename it to Roof Hung.rvt located in the Imperial folder. select the Load Cases tab. A new load nature record is added to the bottom of the table. click the Training Files icon. In this exercise. 5 Under Category. then click Duplicate. Revit Structure provides a default number. Select an existing load case record in the table. Open i_RST_SAM3. In the left pane of the Open dialog. A new load case is added to the bottom of the table. and the Add button changes to Duplicate.
Load Cases | 339
.The first table is the Load Cases table. select Dead Loads. Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE You can also create a new load case with the Duplicate command. 4 Click in the name cell of the new load case. The second table is the Load Natures table.

and wind loads to the model. expand Views (all).
340 | Chapter 13 Structural Analytical Modelling
. A host for a load has its own work plane. using the project coordinate system. you will be adding dead loads. Revit Structure has several coordinate systems for loads:
Coordinate systems for loads
■ ■ ■
project coordinate system current work plane host work plane
The project coordinate system displays in the view when you click Loads on the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 4 Click OK to close the Structural Settings dialog. Loads are placed perpendicular to the view’s current work plane.3 Click in the cell of the new load nature. 5 Proceed to the next exercise.Analytical. “Add Loads to the Model” on page 340.
Add Loads to the Model
Loads are added to the model using a coordinate system. live loads. In this exercise. and enter an appropriate name. and loads can be placed by default. Hosts include slabs and beams. expand 3D Views.
Change the coordinate system orientation
1 In the Project Browser. perpendicular to the host’s work plane. NOTE The new load nature is now available under the Nature column of the Load Cases table. Then you create load combinations for use by analysis and design software. The orientation of the project coordination is as illustrated:
A view has a work plane that can be used for object placement. and double-click View 1 .

click . select
8 In the Element Properties dialog. click Spin [Shift]. under Analytical Model. click Loads.
Add Loads to the Model | 341
.
4 In the Dynamic View dialog box. draw a zoom box around the garage sloped slab and select it.
7 On the Options Bar.
TIP Be sure to click the Area Load with Host option. 6 Select . and click OK. click . and click Hidden Line. select Top of Slab for Vertical Projection. . 11 Click the garage sloped slab. click the Model Graphics Style control. 3 On the View Toolbar. 10 On the Options Bar.2 On the View Control Bar. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 Move the cursor to rotate the model so the garage sloped slab is visible. Use the tooltips to be sure you click the correct option.

2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 13 Select the load. 12 On the Design Bar.
14 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice the coordinate system indicates the load is perpendicular to the host (ramp). expand Views (all). 15 Click Ok. click . select Project for Orient to. click Loads. 3 On the Options Bar. and double-click Level 2.
TIP Be sure to click the Area Load with Host option. click . Use the Tooltips to be sure you click the correct option. under Structural Analysis.The load is placed on the garage sloped slab. click Modify. expand Structural Plans.
342 | Chapter 13 Structural Analytical Modelling
.
The load coordinates are now parallel to the project.
Add an area load at level 2 using slab as host
1 In the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar.

Use the Tooltips to be sure you click the correct option. double-click Level 2. and click Element Properties.
TIP Be sure to click the Line Load option. click Modify to exit the Loads tool. select Area Load: Area Load 1.
Add Loads to the Model | 343
. 10 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 12 Sketch a line load from one corner of the slab to the other. enter -0. as shown. 11 On the Options Bar.
7 Right-click on the load you placed. 8 In the Element Properties dialog.0300 ksf for the Fz 1 parameter.
Add wind load at Level 2
9 In the Project Browser. click .
6 On the Design Bar. under Structural Plans. and click OK. click Loads. 5 Select the Level 2 slab perimeter as shown.4 In the Type Selector.

and double-click View 1 . 21 Select . under Structural Plans.18 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2 .
20 In the Project Browser.Analytical in order to view the added loads. expand 3D Views.Analytical. click the Model Graphics Style control.
Add Loads to the Model | 345
. expand Views (all). and click Hidden Line. draw a zoom box around the beams on the east side of the structure as shown. 19 On the View Control Bar.

click Framing Elevation. 25 Place the framing elevation symbol so that it will snap to the temporary grid approximately as shown.
346 | Chapter 13 Structural Analytical Modelling
. and will be deleted in a later step. click Grid.
24 On the View tab of the Design bar. 23 Draw a temporary grid as shown. This grid is drawn for reference only.22 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

29 Select .
30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 27 Select the temporary grid. Use the Tooltips to be sure you click the correct option. 28 Double-click the new elevation bubble.
Add Loads to the Model | 347
.
TIP Be sure to click the Line Load option. click . and press DELETE. click Loads. as shown. click Modify. The elevation view opens. 32 On Level 2. 33 Drawing the load from one corner of the flange to the other. 31 On the Options Bar. select the edge of the flange as the starting point for the load. draw a zoom box around the lower floors of the structure as shown.26 On the Design bar.

10 Under Case or Combination. 8 Click Add.
36 Click File menu ➤ Save As. select Workplane for Orient to. enter 1. click the Load Combinations tab.
Load Combination
In this exercise. The load projection plane is now oriented to the workplane of the temporary grid line plane to which the framing elevation was pointing.6.You will see the load is oriented to project orientation. select DL1. 5 Click on the Edit Selected Formula table. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_SAM3-in progress. and click Add. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog.4. i_RST_SAM3-in progress.
348 | Chapter 13 Structural Analytical Modelling
. Use the project file that you saves at the end of that exercise. Notice that the Formula field under Load Combination changed automatically to show the new factor. under Structural Analysis. click Structural Settings.rvt. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Click Add in the Load Combination section. select LL1. you add a load combination to your model for use by the analysis and design software. enter 1. and click OK. 4 Under Name. 7 Under Case or Combination. “Load Combination” on page 348. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.
35 In the Element Properties dialog.rvt
Add a DL + LL combination
1 On the Settings menu. You edit and add load combinations in the Structural Settings dialog. 6 Under Factor. 9 Under Factor. enter DL+LL. and on the Options Bar. 34 Select the load. click .

4 In the Duplicate Types dialog. Scroll down the list of items. you transfer the load combination table to a new or existing project. click the Load Combinations tab.27 Click File menu ➤ Save.
■ ■ ■ ■
Under Copy from. select the file that contains the load table.
Transfer Project Standards | 351
. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. Click OK. i_RST_SAM3-in progress. 2 Click File menu ➤ Transfer Project Standards. “Transfer Project Standards” on page 351. click Overwrite. Use the project file that you saves at the end of that exercise.rvt
Importing load types and combinations from a previous project
1 Open an existing Revit Structure project or create a new project. 7 The load combinations are displayed. Click Check None. 3 In the Select Items to Copy dialog. and select Load Types. 6 On the Structural Settings dialog. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.
5 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings.
Transfer Project Standards
In this exercise.

Analytical. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. you document the analysis by adding an annotation.8 Click File menu ➤ Save.
Documenting the Analytical Model
In this exercise. i_RST_SAM3-in progress. Use the project file that you saves at the end of that exercise. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Structural Plans. “Documenting the Analytical Model” on page 352. click Tag ➤ By Category. and double-click Level 2 . expand Views (all).rvt
Add annotation
1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click the Wind Load to place the tag. and creating an analytical schedule. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.
352 | Chapter 13 Structural Analytical Modelling
.

select Line Loads and click OK. select Fx 1 and click Add. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active.4 Click the Area Load to place the tag. and click View.
5 On the Design Bar.
Define the fields
9 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 6 Click on the drag control for the wind load tag and position approximately as shown. The Fx 1 field is moved under Scheduled fields.
Creating a load schedule
7 On the View tab of the Design Bar.
Documenting the Analytical Model | 353
. 8 In the New Schedule dialog. 10 Under Available fields. under Category. click the Fields tab. click Modify. click Schedule/Quantities. right-click on the Design Bar.

order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. “Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model” on page 354. the geometry of the analytical model may be adjusted in relation to those elements that it joins.Analytical.
354 | Chapter 13 Structural Analytical Modelling
.
Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model
There are some structural configurations that are not suitable for direct integration with structural analysis and design software. A schedule is created that includes the analytical elements in the project. For this reason. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Manual adjustment is required before a structural model is input into the analysis and design software. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 2 Zoom into the column at grid line F .11 Using the same process.
13 Click OK. Revit Structure provides a reset tool to reset analytical models back to their original location relative to the corresponding physical model. i_RST_SAM3-in progress.3.rvt
Align the analytical beam
1 In the Project Browser. add the following fields to the schedule:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Fx 2 Fy 1 Fy 2 Fz 1 Fz 2 Nature
12 Under Scheduled fields. In addition. under Structural Plans.
14 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click Ground Level .

5 Press the TAB key and select the corner endpoint of the analytical plane of the slab.
Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model | 355
. 4 Press the TAB key and select the endpoint of the analytical line of the beam.3 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Adjust Analytical Model.

Revit Structure provides the capability to automatically adjust the analytical model to reduce or eliminate these discrepancies for newly created elements as well as the ability to disassociate or reassociate the auto-detect parameter for existing elements. NOTE The auto-detect feature automatically adjusts the analytical model when creating the following structural elements within a project.
■
Creating beams The corresponding beam to slab projection planes are matched. a new dataset is provided. You can save the open file if you wish. setting both planes to level 2 as shown:
■
Creating columns Places the analytical model of columns and walls in the same plane as shown:
■
Creating slabs and walls
356 | Chapter 13 Structural Analytical Modelling
.The analytical model lines and planes are now connected at the same location for analysis purposes. In the next exercise.
Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model
The analytical model that is generated in Revit Structure has discrepancies that are not suitable for direct integration with structural analysis and design software. 7 Proceed to the next exercise.
6 Click File menu ➤ Close. “Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model” on page 356. For example.

the top or bottom plane of the wall’s analytical model will coincide with the slab analytical model as shown:
If a wall has a portion that extends beyond the roof (commonly known as parapets).Aligns the vertical and horizontal analytical projection plane of walls. despite any variation in wall thicknesses or projection plane location as shown:
If a wall and slab are joined.
Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 357
. it can be excluded in the wall’s analytical model to exclude loads that extend above a level with framing members.

rvt located in the Imperial folder. Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the exterior of the wall can be defined as the analytical projection plane. Open i_RST_SAM_Auto_Detect.
358 | Chapter 13 Structural Analytical Modelling
. or it can be trimmed back the analytical/physical model of the slab as shown:
NOTE The following adjustments to the analytical model are applied to an existing project to better demonstrate the auto-detect feature. and the auto-detect tolerances for both horizontal and vertical planes. They include distances for the analytical-to-physical model and analytical adjustments.
3 Click OK.If the analytical edge of slab coincides with the beam or wall analytical model.
Auto-detect tolerances
1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. This exercise applies the auto-detect feature within the tolerances specified in this dialog. select the Analytical Model Settings tab. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog.

Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 359
. and draw a zoom box around one of the beams. and draw a zoom box around the lower-left corner of the structure as shown. click
.
3 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view. click .
5 Move the cursor over the top of the beam as shown. double-click Level 2.
4 On the Toolbar.Adjust the beam to slab vertical offset
1 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. 2 On the Toolbar.

for Vertical Projection. under Analytical Model. select Auto-detect. select Top of Slab. 6 Click the beam. and then click OK. and on the Option Bar.The dot located at the top of the beam. for Vertical Projection. and then click OK. click .
9 In the Element Properties dialog. click . For demo purposes.
360 | Chapter 13 Structural Analytical Modelling
. and on the Option Bar. represents the vertical projection plane of the beam analytical model. 8 Click the slab. The vertical projection plane of the analytical model automatically moves to the top of the slab.
NOTE The properties for all beams of the same type should be changed. a single beam is selected 7 In the Element Properties dialog. under Analytical Model.

and on the Option Bar. 14 Click the column. and click Zoom in Region.Analytical. 13 Draw a zoom box around the column as shown. click . 11 On the Toolbar. represents the vertical projection plane of the analytical model.
The dot located at the top of the slab. and draw a zoom box around the column at grid location A3. click .
12 In an empty part of the drawing area.The vertical projection plane of the analytical model automatically moves to the top of the slab. double-click Level 2 .
Notice the green line representing the analytical model of the concrete wall is not aligned with the blue dot representing the analytical model of the column.
Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 361
.
Adjust the column to wall horizontal offset
10 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. right-click.

The horizontal projection plane for the column. double-click Level 2. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shaft located on the lower-right side of the structure as shown. and then select the column. click . for Horizontal Projection. under Analytical Model. and then click OK. select the wall. aligns with the horizontal projection plane of the wall. 16 On the Tools toolbar.
Adjust the vertical alignment of different wall types
17 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. select Auto-detect. click . 18 On the Toolbar.15 In the Element Properties dialog.
The geometry of the column and wall are now joined.
362 | Chapter 13 Structural Analytical Modelling
.

19 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view.
Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 363
.

and select Chain of Walls or Lines. The dotted green line represents reference plane 1.Notice the solid green lines are not aligned. under Analytical Model. and then click OK.
364 | Chapter 13 Structural Analytical Modelling
. select Auto-detect.
20 Move the cursor over the lower wall.
23 In the Element Properties dialog. These lines represent the vertical projection plane of the upper and lower wall analytical model. for Horizontal Projection. Check the Status Bar to verify you are selecting the chain of walls and not a single wall. click . 22 On the Option Bar. 21 Press TAB.

under Analytical Model. double-click Section 3.
The vertical projection plane for both the upper and lower walls are now aligned with vertical projection plane 1. for Horizontal Projection.
Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 365
. and on the Option Bar.
27 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click. 25 Draw a zoom box around the center of the upper and lower walls as shown. 24 In an empty part of the drawing area.
26 Click the upper wall. click
.
Adjust the vertical alignment of a wall and slab
28 In the Project Browser ➤ Sections (Building Section). and click Zoom in Region. select Plane 1. and then click OK.The vertical projection plane for the lower wall is now aligned with the vertical projection plane of the upper wall.

under Analytical Model. and then click OK.29 In an empty part of the drawing area. for Top Vertical Projection. and on the Option Bar. 31 Click the lower wall. click .
32 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Zoom in Region.
366 | Chapter 13 Structural Analytical Modelling
.
The brown line represents the analytical model of the slab. select Auto-detect. right-click. Notice the green line extends to the top of the beam. 30 Draw a zoom box around the intersection of the beam and column. and the green line represents the analytical model of the wall.

Adjust the horizontal alignment of the slab to wall
33 Click the slab.Analytical. Notice the analytical line of the wall moves with the analytical line of the slab.
36 In the Go to View dialog. and then click Open View. select Structural Plan: Level 2 . You are now in sketch mode and the slab perimeter appears in the drawing area. click .
Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 367
. 37 Select the left sketch line of the slab as shown. select Bottom of Slab. and then click OK. and on the Option Bar. 35 Click the slab. under Analytical Model. for Vertical Projection. and on the Option Bar.The vertical projection plane for the lower wall is now aligned with the horizontal projection plane of the slab.
The horizontal projection plane for the slab (brown line) is now aligned with the vertical projection plane of the wall (green line).
34 In the Element Properties dialog. click .

under Analytical Model.
368 | Chapter 13 Structural Analytical Modelling
. and then click OK. double-click Section 3.
Adjust the column to the lower wall analytical projection
44 Click the column.
The horizontal projection plane of the slab is now aligned with the exterior face of the wall. select Auto-detect. 40 On the Design Bar. click
. and on the Option Bar.
45 In the Element Properties dialog. select Auto-Detect Horizontal Projection. under Analytical Model. click .
39 In the Element Properties dialog. 41 In the Project Browser ➤ Sections (Building Section). 42 Click the lower wall. and then click OK. under Analytical Model. for Horizontal Projection. select Exterior Face. and on the Option Bar. for Analytical Slab Edge. In the Revit dialog.
43 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. and then click OK. click No.38 On the Option Bar. click .

under Analytical Model. and on the Option Bar.Analytical. 51 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. and draw a zoom box around the beam located in the upper-left corner of both
Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 369
.
Adjust the horizontal alignment of a beam
48 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. 50 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. .46 Click the lower wall. 52 On the Toolbar. and then click OK. 49 Enter ZF (this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit). Both windows will be visible in the drawing area. click
. double-click Level 3 .
The vertical projection plane of the column (blue line) is now aligned with the exterior face of the wall (green line). select Top of Wall. click views as shown. double-click Level 3.
47 In the Element Properties dialog. for Top Vertical Projection. Close any additional open windows.

do the following:
■ ■
Move the cursor over the beam. Press TAB.
■
Extend each end of the beam as shown.
.53 Click the beam. for Horizontal Projection. and then click OK. 55 In the Level 3 window.
370 | Chapter 13 Structural Analytical Modelling
. Check the Status Bar to make sure you are selecting the shape handle and not the beam. click Notice the beam is highlighted in both open views. under Analytical Model.
54 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Option Bar. select Auto-Detect. and select the beam shape handle.

Notice the beam in the analytical view remains unchanged.
Boundary Conditions | 371
. Maximize the view so it fills the drawing area.
56 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Use the project file that you saved at the end of the last exercise. you add a boundary condition to your model for use by the analysis and design software. “Boundary Conditions” on page 371.Analytical.rvt. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.
Boundary Conditions
In this exercise. double-click View 1 .
Add a boundary condition to the base of a column
1 In the Project Browser ➤ 3D Views. i_RST_SAM_Auto_Detect-in progress. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_SAM_Auto_Detect-in progress. NOTE The following modifications to the analytical model are applied to an existing project. 57 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt.

4 In an empty part of the drawing area.
11 Repeat this technique to add a fixed boundary condition to the next closest beam as shown. click Boundary Conditions.3 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog. and click Zoom in Region.
8 In an empty part of the drawing area.
6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. right-click.
372 | Chapter 13 Structural Analytical Modelling
. select Fixed. 9 Draw a zoom box around the base of one of the columns. click . 7 On the Options Bar. click Apply. 10 Click the end of the blue line (representing the analytical model of the beam) to place the fixed boundary condition. under Visibility. and then click OK. right-click. and click Zoom in Region. clear Structural Foundation. and for State. 5 Draw a zoom box around the columns located on the lower-left side of the structure as shown.

hold the SHIFT key.
Add a boundary condition to the footing
15 Enter ZF (this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit). and then click OK.12 Click one of the boundary condition symbols. select Pinned.
Notice the boundary condition now displays a pinned state symbol. 13 On the Option Bar. click . under Structural Analysis. . and click the model to rotate it until the foundation
Boundary Conditions | 373
.
14 In the Element Properties dialog. click wall is displayed as shown. press CTRL. for State. 16 On the View Toolbar. and select the other symbol.

17 On the Toolbar, click

, and draw a zoom box around the foundation.

18 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Boundary Conditions. 19 On the Options Bar, click , and for State, select Pinned.

20 Click the green line (representing the analytical model of the foundation) to place the boundary condition.

21 Click File menu ➤ Close. You can save the open file if you wish. In the next exercise, a new dataset is provided. 22 Proceed to the next exercise, “Preparing the Analytical Model to be Calculated in 3rd Party Analysis Software” on page 374.

Preparing the Analytical Model to be Calculated in 3rd Party Analysis Software
Revit Structure links to an analysis and design software, via an Application Programming Interface (API). Size changes to your model and geometric modifications to your model involving member deletion, member relocation, or member addition, that you confirm in the analysis software, are imported back into Revit Structure. All views, including structural plans, elevations, sections, and detail sheets are updated according to changes that you import into Revit Structure. In addition, some internal analysis software parameters are imported into Revit Structure.

374 | Chapter 13 Structural Analytical Modelling

Export the model to analysis software
1 Click Tools menu ➤ External Tools ➤ Send Model. NOTE The External Tools menu is only available once an approved 3rd party analysis software application has been installed. For more information, click Help ➤ Structural Analysis Partners. The application programming interface (API) starts. You can open the analysis software or write to an export file for later use. If you choose to have the API open the software and run your model, the API also returns you to your Revit Structure model and updates it. 2 Proceed to the next tutorial, “Exporting Revit Structure Files” on page 377.

Preparing the Analytical Model to be Calculated in 3rd Party Analysis Software | 375

376 | Chapter 13 Structural Analytical Modelling

Exporting Revit Structure Files

14

Your Revit Structure 2008 project can be exported into several different AutoCAD formats. In this tutorial, you learn how to export your project into both 2D and 3D formats for improved coordination with architects and engineers. You can export a 2D view (plan, elevation, section, etc.), sheet, or schedule into AutoCAD, or you can export a 3D view directly into AutoCAD Architecture. You can also export the project drawing sheets and import them as 2D images.

377

Exporting CAD Formats
In this lesson, you begin by exporting a 3D view of the structural model as a DWG format and importing the file into AutoCAD Architecture 2007. Revit Structure, maintains the properties of all structural elements as true AutoCAD Architecture objects. You then select a 2D structural plan view and export the file as a DWG format, which is imported into AutoCAD 2007. Finally, you export sheets from the project and import them into AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007 as 2D images.

Exporting the 3D Model to AutoCAD Architecture 2007
Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open i_RST_Export.rvt located in the Imperial folder. 1 In the Project Browser, expand 3D Views, and double-click 3D - Atrium.

2 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats. NOTE You can only export the 3D model in a 3D view. 3 In the Export dialog, do the following:
■ ■

Under Save in, select a folder on your local computer. Under File naming, click Short. The existing file name is automatically shortened.

When the file is opened in AutoCAD Architecture 2007, the Revit Structure model appears as shown.

Revit Structure columns, beams, and braces are converted to the corresponding type of AutoCAD Architecture structural member. 9 Select a beam as shown, and notice it is a true AutoCAD Architecture structural element.

10 Minimize the AutoCAD Architecture program. 11 In Revit Structure, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_Export-in progress.rvt. 12 Proceed to the next exercise, “Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD” on page 381

380 | Chapter 14 Exporting Revit Structure Files

Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD
Dataset
■

Continue to use the dataset i_RST_Export-in progress.rvt that was saved in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Structural Plans, and double-click Level 2.

Under Show, clear Views. Select each sheet, and click OK. Click No when asked if you want to save the settings for use in a future Revit session.

NOTE If you are exporting to a DWG file, you can flatten xrefs by selecting the Export each view or sheet as a single file option as shown. This option is automatically selected for DXF files and not available for DGN or sat files.

4 On the Export dialog, click Save. If the view was set to wireframe, a warning dialog appears. On the View’s export mode dialog, click Hidden Line Removal.

Exporting Sheets | 383

5 Close the Revit Structure file. If you wish to save the changes, navigate to a folder of your preference and rename the file.

When the sheets are opened in AutoCAD or AutoCAD Architecture, they appear as shown.

384 | Chapter 14 Exporting Revit Structure Files

About Families and the Family Editor

15

All elements in Revit Structure 2008 are “family based.” The term family describes a powerful concept used throughout Revit Structure to help you manage your data and make changes easily. Each family element can have multiple types defined within it, each with a different size, shape, material set, or other parameter variables as designed by the family creator. Even though various types within a family can look completely different, they are still related and come from a single source, thus the term family. Changes to a family type definition ripple through the project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family or type within the project. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date. In this tutorial, you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor.

385

and when and how to use it.
Standard Component Families
Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates. In addition. and roofs are examples of these types of families. generic. exceptions to this rule. The basic walls system family. foundation. You can duplicate and modify existing system families. you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are created. This makes file management much easier. You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components. the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project. Walls. The following dialog box shows how you can select a specific family template to start your family design project.
386 | Chapter 15 About Families and the Family Editor
. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit Structure and cannot be created or modified outside of the project environment. The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family.
Introduction to Families
Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an . NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another. and partition wall styles. exterior. All different types that you create are stored with the master family file. You also learn about the Family Editor. Using the Family Editor. You can either duplicate and modify an existing component family or create a new component family based on a variety of family templates.Using Families and the Family Editor
One of the many advantages of using Revit Structure is the ability to create your own families of components without having to learn a complex programming language. such as a curved beam. has wall types that define interior. you create a family within predefined templates that contain the intelligent objects needed to create the particular family type. if you create a family called wide beams that includes types with several sizes.rfa extension. Revit Structure has three types of families:
■ ■ ■
System Standard Component In-place
System Families
System families are pre-defined within Revit Structure and comprise principle building components such as walls. There are. for example. because there is only one file to track. there is another type of family that allows you to create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit Structure recognize it as a particular component type. In this lesson. floors. however. and roofs. For example. You provide the information necessary to uniquely describe the family geometry. while many more are stored in component libraries. but you cannot create new system families.

so they are useful for objects unique to that project. Family templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families. You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families. Host-based families have components that require hosts.
In-place Families
In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project. You can load them into projects. and the category that you use determines the component’s appearance and display control within the project. Standalone families include columns. and save them from a project file to your library if needed. The following illustration shows host-based openings in a wall. Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an . custom step footing.rfa extension. You create in-place families only within the current project. and also a standalone pile cap family component.
Introduction to Families | 387
. transfer them from one project to another. for example. and beam. The following illustration shows an in-place step footing.Family templates are either host-based or standalone.

Load Family command on the File menu. if you change the original family. 2 On the File menu.Adding a family to a project
1 Open or start a project. as well as the level of detail associated with that view. or you can load it using the Load From Library. Also consider any internal family libraries that may exist on the network. elevation. it should be available within the Type Selector. In this section. how to access it.
When to use the Family Editor
During the design process. you will inevitably come to a point where you need a specific component for your design. it is saved with the project. and when to use it. In the final exercise. you learned about the different types of Revit Structure families and when to use them. Families are listed in the Project Browser under their respective component category. Families store all of the necessary geometry to display the two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) versions of particular objects. In this case. In this exercise. you can drag it into the document window. how to access it. consider checking the web library and other web resources. Family element visibility can be dependent of your viewing direction. such as plan. 3 Navigate to the library or location of the family. or 3D.
Introduction to the Family Editor
You can use the Family Editor to create both real-life building components and graphical/annotation components. presume it is a bay window that you require. you learn when to use the Family Editor. you learn about the Family Editor. 2 If there isn’t a component family loaded in the project. To add a family to your project. and the general procedure for creating a standard component family. 4 Select the family file name and click Open. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. You do not have to carry the original family file along with the project. you need to reload the family in the project to see the updated family. you can search the component library loaded on your local hard drive. However. After the family has been loaded in the project. such as newsgroups.
388 | Chapter 15 About Families and the Family Editor
. There is a logical thought process that you should follow: 1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so. 3 Next.

If you find a close match.
Introduction to the Family Editor | 389
. To start a new family. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. Within the Windows® environment. and then load it into the project.rfa extension and it will open Revit Structure in the Family Editor. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. modify it as needed. it opens within the Family Editor. When the family opens. you can double-click any file with an . you should create a new component family using one of the family templates as a starting point. open it in the Family Editor. 2 Define sub-categories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. select the appropriate template. and click Open. 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch. 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior.
General procedure for creating a standard component family
1 Select the appropriate family template. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry.
How to use the Family Editor
You can access the Family Editor in several ways. click File ➤ New ➤ Family. You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously. 9 Save the newly-defined family. This will be apparent because the only Design Bar tab available is Family. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with sub-category and entity visibility settings. and click Open. you can click File ➤ Open. if you have exhausted your external resources. With Revit Structure open. 5 Finally. you should then try to find the component that most closely resembles it. navigate to a family file. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters.4 If you can’t find the component you require.

390 | Chapter 15 About Families and the Family Editor
.

you create it within the project file.rft file). create an in-place family for a step-footing. not within the Family template (. This allows you to create the family in the context of the current project.
391
. and you modify an existing family to create a custom titleblock. you learn how to create specific Revit Structure 2008 Families. you create a custom family for a metal deck component.Creating Components in the Family Editor
16
In this tutorial. When you create an in-place family. Using the installed templates.

3 Click Profiles ➤ Structural folder. Click Apply. and click Zoom to Fit.Creating Custom Families
In this lesson. and click Open.
Open the metal deck family
1 Click File menu ➤ Open. you create a custom. In the second exercise. you create a custom opening in a castellated beam family. non-composite metal deck family by adding a dovetail rib to the deck profile. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the first exercise. select 1 1/2" = 1' 0" for scale. do the following:
■ ■
Under Visibility.
4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility Graphics. 5 On the Annotations Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Modifications to the existing families are saved as a family (. click the Imperial Library folder.
Delete vertical reference planes
8 Select parameter wr as shown. 7 On the View Control Bar.
392 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor
. you modify the profile for a non-composite metal deck family by adding a dovetail rib.rft) template for use in other projects.rfa.
Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family
In this exercise. and press DELETE. and then click OK.
6 In an empty part of the drawing area. right-click. you customize 2 different families with the Revit Structure family editor. select Form Deck_non composite. click Dimensions and Reference Planes.

Move the cursor inside the profile. 9 Delete additional vertical reference planes until the view appears as shown. click Dimension.Delete the parameter on both sides of the profile. Click the angle.
Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 393
.
13 On the Design Bar. and click to place the dimension as shown. click Modify. 11 On the Options Bar. click .
12 Place a dimension for the angle as follows:
■ ■ ■
Click the horizontal reference plane.
Modify the angular reference plane
10 On the Design Bar.

15 Click the lock symbol next to the angular dimension to lock the angle to the horizontal reference plane.14 Select the angled reference plane.
Repeat this technique to add a dimension for the angle on the opposite side of the profile. 16 In an empty part of the drawing area. 17 On the View Control Bar.
394 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor
. right-click. and drag them approximately as shown. select 6" = 1' 0" for scale. and press ENTER. and click Zoom to Fit. enter 66. 18 Click the top and bottom dimensions.

click Dimension. click .
Repeat for the dimension on the opposite side. and add a dimension as shown. place the dimension under the lines as shown. and click the EQ symbol to apply equal constraints. click Ref Plane.19 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the profile base.
Sketch the dovetail reference planes
22 On the View Toolbar.
Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 395
.
Place new dimensions
20 On the Design Bar. and draw a zoom box around the top of the profile.
21 Add 2 dimensions from the center reference plane to the bottom of each side of the profile. 24 Draw 1 horizontal and 4 vertical reference planes approximately as shown. and press DELETE.
23 On the Design Bar.

The dimensions displayed in the following steps are provided for reference only and can be customized based on your requirements.
33 Repeat the previous technique to add the remaining dimensions for the dovetail as shown. 32 Select the dimension. 29 Add a dimension from the top of the profile to the dovetail horizontal reference plane as shown.
396 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor
. for Is Reference. and click the lock symbol to lock the distance to the horizontal reference plane. 31 Select the horizontal reference plane.
27 On the Element Properties dialog. enter 0' 11/32". and then click OK. click Dimension. click . 30 Press ESC. These dimensions refer to the positioning of the dovetail in relation to the profile center reference plane.
Dimension and constrain the dovetail
28 On the Design Bar. under Other. 26 Highlight the reference planes and on the Options Bar.25 Press ESC. select Not a Reference. and press ENTER.

Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 397
.
39 Using the split tool.
37 Click Modify. and click Delete Inner Segment.34 Click the EQ symbol to constrain the dimensions as shown. trace the line between the dovetail and the existing element as shown. click Lines.
Sketch the dovetail
35 On the Design Bar. 38 On the Tools toolbar click . 36 Sketch the dovetail by snapping to the intersections of the vertical and horizontal reference planes as shown.

and select wr. enter 0' 4 1/2" for wr. Click Apply. for b. click Label. 53 In the Family Types dialog.
51 On the Options Bar.
Flex the new dovetail profile
52 On the Design Bar. for a.
Notice the dovetail adjusts automatically to the new parameters. 50 Select the dimension as shown. 49 Click Apply. Under Other. enter 0' 2 1/2".
Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 399
. enter 0' 2".
■ ■ ■
Under Other.Create parameter wr
47 On the Design Bar. click Family Types. click Family Types. under Other. 48 In the Family Types dialog. and then click OK. do the following.

and then click OK. click Finish Sketch.
400 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor
. 63 On the Options Bar. click Section.
Create a section view of the slab
66 On the Design Bar. The slab is created. select Rename. Click Apply.
64 Draw a slab in the center of the drawing area. click Slab. click New ➤ Project. 55 In the Family Types dialog. The slab size should be approximately 55' 0" long by 35' 0" wide. select Structural Analysis-Default. 58 In the Choose Template dialog. double-click Level 2. and enter 2" x 5". enter 0' 2 1/2". 60 In the Project Browser. 67 Click above the slab and draw a section line through the slab approximately as shown. for Sr. click . and click Open. for a.Create new parameters
54 On the Design Bar. 57 In the New Project dialog. in the Imperial Templates folder. Under Other. click Lines. 61 On the Design Bar. for b.
Create a new project
56 On the File menu. Under Other. 65 On the Design Bar.rte. You are now in sketch mode.
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Under Family Types. Under Other. for wr. enter 0' 2". do the following. enter 0' 5". Under Other. 62 On the Design Bar. enter 0' 4". under Structural Plans. 59 In the New Project dialog. click Browse. click Family Types. click OK.

open the file from the saved folder location. select Floor: 3" LW Concrete on 2" Composite Metal Deck. select Edit for Structure. under Construction. under Sections (Building Sections). select Wireframe. 76 In the Edit Assembly dialog.
■ ■ ■
. for Deck profile. 72 On the Families Design Bar. For Detail Level. If it is not. The file should still be open. and in the Type Selector. click 74 In the Element Properties dialog. For Model Graphic Style.68 In the Project Browser. The new non-composite metal deck family is loaded into the slab project. select the slab project from the available files. double-click Section 1. do the following:
■ ■ ■
For Scale.
Under Layers. select Level 3. 70 On the View Control toolbar. do the following. select Fine. click Edit/New.
69 Select the slab. 73 Select the metal deck. Under Structural Deck Properties. If there are multiple files open. and click the new family file. select the new metal deck profile file. and on the Options Bar. 75 In the Type Properties dialog.
Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 401
. select 1/4" = 1' 0".
Apply the custom family to the metal deck
71 Click the Window menu. Click OK. click Load into Project.

Customizing a Castellated Beam
In this exercise. click the Training Files icon.
Modify the beam opening
1 On the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog.
4 Position both dialogs so the opening is visible in the drawing area as shown.
77 Proceed to the next exercise.
402 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor
.
2 Select the beam. and draw a zoom box around one of the openings in the castellated beam.rvt in the Imperial folder.The new profile is applied to the slab. you create a custom opening in a castellated beam. “Customizing a Castellated Beam” on page 402. and on the Options Bar. click 3 In the Element Properties dialog. click . Open i_RST_Custom_Beam. click Edit/New. . Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open.

you create a step footing on an existing foundation wall.7 Proceed to the next lesson.36" x 12". click Foundation ➤ Wall.
Creating In-Place Families
In this lesson. you create an in-place family in your current project rather than in the Family (.
404 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor
. select Wall Foundation: Bearing Footing . click 3D Views ➤ 3D. click the Training Files icon.
Place the foundation wall
1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.
Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family
In this exercise. Because in-place families interact with the structural model according to their assigned family category.rft) template. 3 In the Type Selector. Open i_RST_In-Place-Footing.rvt in the Imperial folder. “Creating In-Place Families” on page 404. you start with an incomplete foundation wall.

9 In the Name dialog. enter Structural Foundations 1 for Name. 11 In the Work Plane dialog. 6 On the Options Bar.
Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family | 405
. and click OK. and click OK. 8 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. and draw a zoom box around the foundation steps as shown. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 10 On the Design Bar. click Create. click Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1. 12 Press TAB.4 Click the foundation wall.
Create new family category
5 In the Project Browser. click . select Pick a plane.
7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Structural Foundations. and select the bearing footing as shown.
The footing is placed at the base of the foundation wall. and click OK.

The dimensions have been added for reference purposes only. enter -3' 0".
406 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor
.
14 Using the drawing tools provided with Revit Structure. sketch a solid extrusion as shown. for Depth.
Sketch the extrusion
13 Click the corner of the footing to start the extrusion sketch as shown.
Change extrusion properties
17 On the Design Bar.Make sure the entire footing is selected. 15 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. click Extrusion Properties. click Modify.

19 In the Materials dialog.Cast-in-Place Concrete. select Concrete . for Name.
24 On the Options Bar.
25 Click the corner of the step foundation and the extrusion as shown. click Finish Sketch.
26 Click to place a second copy of the extrusion as shown. 21 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Family Design Bar.
Copy extrusion
23 Select the extrusion. click OK. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. under Materials and Finishes.18 In the Element Properties dialog. click the value for Material. click Finish Family.
Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family | 407
. click
. and then click OK. and select Multiple.

27 Click to place a third copy of the extrusion as shown. click (Join Geometry tool).
Join extrusion elements to the footing
29 On the Options Bar. and click Multiple Join.
28 Press ESC.
408 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor
.

The titleblock has linework. and click Open. select D . text. graphics. 3 The default titleblock template consists of 4 border lines.Creating a Titleblock Family
In this lesson. 2 In the New dialog. navigate to the Titleblocks folder. and labels.
Creating a Titleblock Family | 411
.
Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet
In this exercise.rft.
Create a new family based on the default titleblock template
1 On the File menu. you draw all of the linework necessary to create a custom D-size sheet. click New ➤ Titleblock.36 x 24. you create a custom titleblock sheet based on the D-size titleblock template. You customize the titleblock with a new text style. and your project data.

and then specify the lower-right corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle. click .
Add vertical and horizontal lines
7 On the Options Bar.
12 Draw a horizontal line 3'' below the last horizontal line as shown.
8 Move the cursor over the right inside border line. and enter -1/2" for Offset. 5 On the Options Bar.
9 On the Options Bar.Sketch the inside border
4 On the Design Bar.
412 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor
.
6 Specify the upper-left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner.
.
11 Draw a horizontal line 4'' below the upper inside border as shown. click . click 10 Enter 0 for Offset. and enter 4 1/2" for Offset. click Lines. and click to draw a new vertical line. and click
.

NOTE The wide line style is not visible until the titleblock is loaded into a new project. and click to draw a new horizontal line 3/4'' above the existing line. 17 On the Design Bar.
20 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. select Wide Lines.13 Draw a horizontal line 3'' above the lower inside border as shown. 16 Zoom in on the lower-right corner of the sheet. 25 Move the cursor over the seventh horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 1/2'' below the existing line. enter 3/4" for Offset. and click to draw a new horizontal line 1/2'' below the existing line. 21 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line. 22 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line. and enter 0' 1/2" for Offset.
Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet | 413
. 19 On the Options Bar.
14 On the Design Bar. and click to draw a new horizontal line 3/4'' above the existing line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 1/2'' below the existing line. click Lines. click . and click to draw a new horizontal line 3/4'' above the existing line. and select the second and third horizontal lines. press CTRL. click Modify. select Title Blocks.
23 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Type Selector. 26 Move the cursor over the eighth horizontal line. 15 In the Type Selector. 24 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line.

2 In the Open dialog. 3 Place the image in the upper-right corner of the sheet as shown. click Text. text notes. and labels to your titleblock.
Add a company logo
1 On the File menu. you add a company logo.
The titleblock linework is now complete. click Edit/New. navigate to Training/Common.
7 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 Zoom out to view the entire sheet.
Create a new 3/8'' text style
5 On the Design Bar.
414 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor
. and click Open.27 On the Design Bar. click Import/Link ➤ Image.
Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock
In this exercise.jpg. click Modify. 6 On the Options Bar. click . select Company Logo.
4 Zoom in on the logo.

and add an address and phone number as shown. and select Bold. in the text box. click Modify. and click OK.
Add company name text
12 Draw a text box under the first horizontal line as shown. and select the last text note. and drag the text note down as shown. 18 Select the drag handle. 11 Click OK twice. click Duplicate. select Text: Text Note 1. and click outside of the text box to complete the text. under Text. 16 Draw a text box below the initial text.
17 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Name dialog.
Add company address and phone number text
15 In the Type Selector. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 14 Click outside of the text box to complete the text.
13 Enter Arch Design Inc.8 In the Type Properties dialog.
Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 415
. Press ENTER to add each new line of text. enter 3/8" for Text Size. enter 3/8" Bold for Name.

Add drawing data text
35 In the Type Selector. click .
30 In the Element Properties dialog. 32 In the Name dialog. and enter Sheet Number.
Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 417
. select Text: 3/16". and click OK. enter 3/16" for Name. click Edit/New. 29 On the Options Bar. 34 Click OK twice. enter 3/16" for Text Size. and enter Date. 36 Draw a text box in the lower-right space of the titleblock. click Duplicate. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. click Text. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. 37 Draw a text box in the next space up.27 Move the cursor down another 4''. under Text.
Create a new 3/16'' text style
28 On the Design Bar. and enter Drawn By. and click to specify the second copied text note location. 39 Draw a text box in the next space up. and enter Checked By. 38 Draw a text box in the next space up.

43 In the Select Parameter dialog.Add drawing data labels
40 On the Design Bar. The label displays a default value wrapped to 2 lines. 42 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Date field.
418 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor
. select Right and Bottom for Text Alignment. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line.
44 Select the left drag handle on the label. 41 On the Options Bar. and click to specify the label location. and click OK. select Project Issue Date. click Label.

and click OK. 57 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Sheet Number field. 46 In the Select Parameter dialog. select Drawn By.
Create a new 3/8'' label style
49 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. 45 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Drawn By field. and click to specify the label location. select Checked By. and click OK. select Label: 3/8'' Label. 54 In the Type Properties dialog. 50 On the Options Bar. enter 3/8" for Text Size. click .
51 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. enter 3/8" Label for Name.
Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 419
.NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. and click to specify the label location. under Text. click Label.
47 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Checked By field.
Add sheet number and project data labels
56 In the Type Selector. click Edit/New. 48 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click to specify the label location. 53 In the Name dialog. 55 Click OK twice.

64 In the Select Parameter dialog. select Project Name. and click OK.
63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field.
59 On the Options Bar. and click to specify the label location. click Center and Middle. and click to specify the label location. select Project Number. 61 In the Select Parameter dialog. 60 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Date field. 66 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click to specify the label location. select Client Name.58 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click OK. select Sheet Number. and click OK. 65 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field.
62 Select the left drag handle on the label. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. and click OK.
420 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor
.

text. and click OK. and select any labels that may need to be moved. under Text. click . and then adjust the width of the File Path field so that it is approximately equal to the width of the Sheet Number field. and labels are now complete.
69 In the Element Properties dialog. and click to specify the label location. 78 On the Design Bar. and click OK. select 1/16” Label. click Left and Middle. click Modify. 68 On the Options Bar.Click Modify. The titleblock graphics. 73 Click OK twice. 72 In the Type Properties dialog.
79 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training D-Size Titleblock. 70 In the Type Properties dialog. 75 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. select File Path.rfa. click Duplicate. 71 In the Name dialog. 77 In the Select Parameter dialog.
Create a 1/16” label style
67 On the Design Bar. enter 1/16" for Text Size.
Add Project Path label
74 In the Type Selector. enter 1/16" Label. so that they are all aligned. click Label.
Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 421
. 76 Place the cursor in the border area below the left side of the Sheet Number field.

select Training D-Size Titleblock.
10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Load. do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■
For Project Issue Date. For Project Status. 2 In the New Project dialog. under Other. enter In Progress. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. click . 7 Click OK. you add the titleblock that you created to a new project. enter Name for Drawn By. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar.
422 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor
. enter January 1. enter Jane Smith.rfa file. 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.Adding the Titleblock to a New Project
In this exercise. and then click OK.
12 On the Settings menu. For Project Name. and select the titleblock. For Client Name. click New ➤ Project.rte is the Template file and that Project is selected under Create new. 11 Zoom in on the lower-right corner of the sheet. verify that default. click Project Information. 2005. click Sheet. 9 On the Options Bar. select it. 5 In the Open dialog. and click Open. enter Office Building.
Modify titleblock properties
8 On the Design Bar. navigate to the location of Training D-Size Titleblock.
Load the new titleblock family into a new project
1 On the File menu. click Modify. and click OK.

enter 2005-01.■
For Project Number.
Adding the Titleblock to a New Project | 423
.
14 Click OK.
This completes the Creating a Titleblock Family lesson.

424 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor
.

Truss Building
17
In this tutorial.
425
. you learn how to use the truss building capabilities of Revit Structure 2008.

5 On the Options Bar. which creates the truss according to the layout and other parameters specified in whichever truss family type you select. click Truss. To use the Truss tool. Under Dimensions. click model as shown. click . and web members. enter 6' 0".
426 | Chapter 17 Truss Building
. bottom chord. Open i_RST_Add_Truss. 4 In the Type Selector. 2 On the View toolbar.
Add a roof truss by defining the span in plan view
1 In the Project Browser. placing them on the layout lines specified for the selected family. for Truss Height. do the following:
■ ■
Under Structural. . under Structural Plans. click the Training Files icon. for Bearing Chord.
6 In the Element Properties dialog. This lesson comprises the following truss building exercises:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Add multiple trusses to an existing project by specifying the spans Create a custom truss by modifying the brace parameters Change the shape of a truss profile by attaching it to a roof Create a custom truss family using the Family Editor Create a truss using the drafting tools provided with Revit Structure
Adding Trusses to a Project
In this exercise. and draw a zoom box around the columns on the upper-left corner of the
3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you select the truss family type and then specify the truss start point and endpoint in the drawing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Revit Structure then creates the structural framing elements as necessary to draw the truss. The lines in the layout determine the placement of the sub-elements that comprise the truss: top chord. select Howe Flat Truss: Standard. Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt located in the Imperial folder.Working with Trusses
In Revit Structure you add a truss to your structure by using the Truss tool. you add predefined trusses to multiple locations within an existing project. select Top. double-click Roof.

11 Press DELETE.
7 Click the column at grid location A1 to select the start point of the truss span. 9 On the View toolbar.
Modify the truss
10 Click the flange located at column location A2 as shown.
Adding Trusses to a Project | 427
. 12 Using the same method.■
Click OK. Close the Warning dialog that indicates the selected flange is pinned. Notice the extra flange at column locations A1 and A2 that will not be necessary for this span. delete the extra flange at column location A1. 8 Click the column at grid location A2 to select the endpoint of the truss span. click .
The truss is placed between the columns.

17 Click the column at grid location A1 as shown. under Structural Plans. click
(Copy).Copy the single truss
13 In the Project Browser.
16 On the Options bar. double-click Roof. 14 Select the truss placed in the previous steps.
428 | Chapter 17 Truss Building
. select Multiple.
15 On the View toolbar.

23 Select the truss placed between grid location A1 and A2.
Copy multiple trusses to the opposite end of the structure
22 In the Project Browser. select the remaining trusses.
21 Enter ZF (keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit).18 Click the columns at grid locations A2 and A3 to place copies of the original truss. click . under Structural Plans. 25 On the View toolbar. and then click the column at grid location E1 to select the copy endpoint as shown. 19 On the Design Bar. click (Copy). 20 On the View toolbar.
26 Click the column at grid location A1 to select the copy start point. double-click Roof. click Modify. 24 While pressing CTRL.
Adding Trusses to a Project | 429
.

Click OK.
Adding Trusses to a Project | 431
.
35 Click the top endpoint of the column at grid location B4 to place the truss as shown.■ ■
Under Dimensions. for Truss Height. enter 6' 0".
34 Click the column at grid location B1 as shown.

41 Select the flange at one end of the truss.Modify each truss
40 On the View toolbar.
Adding Trusses to a Project | 433
. click . and draw a zoom box around the end of one of the trusses as shown
.

enter 90.
Create a new truss type for the short span
1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.42 Press DELETE. 44 Using the same method. Under Bottom Chords. “Customizing Truss Parameters” on page 434. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. 3 On the Options Bar. a new dataset is supplied. for Structural Framing Type. Under Diagonal Webs. click . You can save the open file if you wish.
Apply the new truss type
9 In the Project Browser. In the next exercise. do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■
Under Vertical Webs.
Customizing Truss Parameters
In this exercise. Open i_RST_Customize_Truss_Parameters.
434 | Chapter 17 Truss Building
. click Duplicate. and repeat for the remaining trusses. for Angle. 45 Click File menu ➤ Close. select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X.
4 In the Element Properties dialog. Dataset
■ ■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. click Edit/New. click the Training Files icon. click Truss. under 3D Views. and click OK.rvt located in the Imperial folder. enter Howe Flat Truss .500. select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X. double-click 3D.500. for Structural Framing Type. 43 Close the Warning dialog that indicates the selected flange is pinned. 6 In the Name dialog. Click OK. click OK. 2 In the Type Selector. delete the flange on the opposite end of the same truss. select Howe Flat Truss: Standard.Short Span.
8 In the Element Properties dialog. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a custom truss for both the short and long spans by modifying the truss type parameters. 7 In the Type Properties dialog.

10 On the View toolbar. 13 On the View toolbar.
Customizing Truss Parameters | 435
. click 14 Enter ZF.Short Span. click as shown.
. draw a zoom box around one of the short trusses.
12 Using the same method. . select Howe Flat Truss: Howe Flat Truss . and then select the truss
NOTE Check the Status Bar to make sure you are selecting the truss and not a chord or web. change the remaining short trusses to the new type. The truss changes to the new type. 11 In the Type Selector.

24 On the View toolbar.
Apply the new truss type
23 In the Project Browser. select Howe Flat Truss: Standard.500. 19 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. enter Howe Flat Truss . and click OK. 17 On the Options Bar.
18 In the Element Properties dialog. click as shown. 20 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate. Click OK. draw a zoom box around one of the long trusses. under 3D Views.500. double-click 3D.Roof Span. . select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X. select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X.
22 In the Element Properties dialog. do the following:
■ ■ ■
Under Vertical Webs. click Truss. for Structural Framing Type. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. Under Diagonal Webs. for Structural Framing Type. click OK.Create a new truss type for the roof span
15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click . 16 In the Type Selector. and then select the truss
436 | Chapter 17 Truss Building
.

Roof Span. select Howe Flat Truss: Howe Flat Truss . .
Customizing Truss Parameters | 437
. click 28 Enter ZF. 27 On the View toolbar. change the remaining long trusses to the new type. The truss changes to the new type. 25 In the Type Selector.NOTE Check the Status Bar to make sure you are selecting the truss and not a single truss flange.
26 Using the same method.

29 Click File menu ➤ Close. You can save the open file if you wish. In the next exercise, a new dataset is supplied. 30 Proceed to the next exercise, “Modifying the Shape of a Truss” on page 438.

Modifying the Shape of a Truss
In this exercise, you change the shape of a truss profile by attaching it to an existing roof. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open i_RST_Truss_Change_Shape.rvt located in the Imperial folder.

Select all trusses
1 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click 3D. 2 On the View toolbar, click , draw a zoom box around a truss on the upper-left corner of the structure, and then select the truss as shown.

438 | Chapter 17 Truss Building

3 Click Edit menu ➤ Select All Instances. All instances of the truss will be highlighted.

Attach the roof
4 On the Options Bar, click 5 Select the roof as shown. (Attach/Detach Top Chord).

Modifying the Shape of a Truss | 439

The top chords, vertical webs, and diagonal webs of each truss will attach itself to the shape of the roof.

6 On the Design bar, click Modify.

View the custom truss
7 Select the roof. 8 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. 9 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around a roof truss as shown.

Notice the shape of the top chord and structural webs are modified to match the roof profile. 10 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. You can save the open file if you wish. In the next exercise, a new dataset is supplied. 12 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Custom Truss Family” on page 441.

440 | Chapter 17 Truss Building

Creating a Custom Truss Family
In this exercise, you use the Revit Structure Family Editor to create a custom truss family. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open i_RST_Truss_Custom_Family.rvt located in the Imperial folder.

Open the truss family
1 Click File ➤ New ➤ Family. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. 3 Open Structural_Trusses.rft located in the Imperial folder.

Sketch truss webs
13 On the Design Bar, click Truss Web. 14 Click the intersection of the bottom chord and the first vertical reference plane to set the start point of the first truss web as shown.

442 | Chapter 17 Truss Building

15 Snap to the intersection of the top chord and reference plane as shown.

16 Using the same method, add remaining truss webs to complete the pattern as shown.

17 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Save the new truss family
18 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

Creating a Custom Truss Family | 443

19 In the Save As dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Save in, navigate to a folder of your choice. For File name, enter Custom_Truss. For Save as type, select Family Files (rfa). Click OK.

Load the truss into the project
20 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 21 In the Load into Projects dialog, select i_RST_Truss_Custom_Family.rvt, and click OK. You are now in the project file.

Place the custom truss
22 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 2. 23 On the Design Bar, click Truss. 24 In the Type Selector, select Custom_Truss. 25 Click the column at grid location A1 to establish the start point of the truss. 26 Click the column at grid location A4 to establish the endpoint of the truss as shown.

27 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click 3D.

444 | Chapter 17 Truss Building

28 Repeat the same method to place additional trusses as shown.

29 Click File menu ➤ Close. You can save the open file if you wish. In the next exercise, a new dataset is supplied. 30 Proceed to the next exercise, “Building a Truss with Drafting Tools” on page 445.

Building a Truss with Drafting Tools
In this exercise, you open a new project and create the top and bottom chords using the beam tool, create column grids, and a framing elevation. Finally, you add braces to form the steel truss.

Create a new project
1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 2 In the New Project dialog, click Browse.

Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 445

3 In the Choose Template dialog, in the Imperial Templates folder, select Structural Analysis-Default.rte, and click Open. 4 In the New Project dialog, click OK.

The dimensions are displayed for reference purposes only. 18 Place a second horizontal reference plane above the first. 19 Click the dimension, and enter 15' 0".

Place vertical reference planes
20 On the Design Bar, click Ref Plane. 21 Snap to the center of the left column and draw a vertical reference plane that extends beyond the top horizontal plane as shown.

22 Press ESC.

Place multiple reference planes using the array tool
23 Select the reference plane on the left column as shown.

Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 447

24 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

25 Click the left vertical reference plane to identify the array start point. 26 Drag the array to the right, and snap to the center of the right column to identify the array length. 27 Enter 7 for array count, and press Enter.

The array is complete.

Place top and bottom chords
28 On the Design Bar, click Beam. 29 In the Type Selector, select W-Wide Flange: W12 x 26. 30 On the Tools toolbar, select 3D Snapping. 31 Using reference planes as a guide, create the top and bottom chords of the truss by placing beams as shown.

448 | Chapter 17 Truss Building

When placing beams, make sure you snap to the intersections of the reference planes.

Place braces
32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Brace. 33 In the Type Selector, select W-Wide Flange: W12 x 26. 34 Using the vertical reference planes as a guide, create cross-braces by placing braces as shown.

When placing braces, make sure you snap to the intersections of the reference planes.

Fix corner joint
35 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the upper-right corner of the truss as shown.

Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 449

39 Select the vertical ref plane.36 On the Design Bar. and sketch a vertical ref plane as shown. click Ref Plane.
450 | Chapter 17 Truss Building
. then select the edge of the top chord as shown. click
.
38 On the Tools toolbar. 37 Snap to the outer surface of the brace.

under 3D Views.
42 Click File menu ➤ Save.
View the truss
41 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D. The completed truss is displayed.
Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 451
. 43 Save the file to a folder location of you choice.40 The edge of the top chord will align with the vertical brace as shown.

Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option).Creating Multiple Design Options
18
When working with a building model. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs.
In this tutorial. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. Using design options. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client.
453
.

2 In the Design Options dialog. After you and the client agree on the final design. you can have multiple sets of design options. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option.rvt. click Training Files. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. For example. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. In the final exercise of this lesson. In the second exercise. and open Imperial\i_Urban_House.
Creating the Structural Design Options
In this exercise. the only available command is to create a new option set. With the second option. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. After you create a design option. In addition. At any time in the design process. you can edit it. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. each with multiple design options. click Design Options ➤ Design Options.Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project
You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. In the left pane of the Open dialog. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. In this particular case. and delete the unwanted options from the project. under Option Set.
In the first exercise in this lesson. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. and each option set can have multiple schemes. Dataset
■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. you design each of the structural options. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. make your final design decision. you set up multiple design option sets.
454 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options
. The client has asked you to create various options. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. click New. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 3" round columns and 2" round bars.
Create first design option
1 On the Tools menu.

Constrain Copy Multiple
The Copy command is a two-click process. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. the roof and structure systems must work together. click 12 On the Options Bar. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. 6 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar.TIP In this exercise. therefore. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. expand Floor Plans. and click Close. By selecting Multiple. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. click Edit Selected. or add a dimension string between the columns. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). TIP To center the middle column. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. 4 In the Project Browser. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. 11 On the Edit toolbar. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. In the following illustration. expand Views (all). Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to.
Creating the Structural Design Options | 455
. In this case. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. each is constructed for interchangeability. 5 On the View menu. and the third column centered between the two. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. select:
■ ■ ■
. add three columns.
9 On the Design Bar. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. 3 Select Option 1 (primary). click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. click Modify. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. click Column. 7 In the Type Selector. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. select Round Column: 03" Diameter. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls.

17 Zoom out and. When you are finished. using the same technique.
456 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options
. Because of the size of the columns. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one.
A copy of the three selected columns is added.TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. click
.
15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. they are difficult to see in this view.
16 Zoom in around the notch construction.
18 On the View toolbar.

Next. 24 Select the Beam you added previously.
25 On the Edit toolbar.
23 On the Design Bar. Zoom in on the upper right column. The first click specifies the beam start point. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. In it. Adding a beam is a two-click process.Notice the 12 columns that you added. you add the beams that span the columns. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps:
■ ■ ■
Zoom in on the upper-left column. 20 On the Basicstab of the Design Bar. 21 In the Type Selector. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint.
Use the following illustration as a guide. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. double-click TOP OF CORE. select Round Bar : 2". click Beam. click
. under Floor Plans. 19 In the Project Browser. The second click specifies the end of the beam.
Creating the Structural Design Options | 457
. click Modify. and click at its center to set the beam start point.

29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. click
. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. move down to the next set of columns. zoom into the left column. and click the center point.
458 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options
.
28 Zoom out.
30 On the View toolbar. select:
■ ■ ■
Constrain Copy Multiple
27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. and select the center of the column to add a copy.26 On the Options Bar.

47 Under Roofing.
53 In the Project Browser.
Design the second structural design option
49 In this section of the exercise. and click OK.
460 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options
. name the option Sunscreen. Under Now Editing. 52 Click Close. 48 Under Option.
50 In the Design Options dialog. This allows you to more easily manage the project. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. under Structure. select Beam. double-click ROOF TERRACE. 51 Under Edit. When finished. it will resemble the following illustration. select Option 2. you create the second design option. select Edit Selected. under Floor Plans. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. click Rename. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed.

select Roof Beam. The second click represents the plane that is moved.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 56 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 61 On the Design Bar.
Creating the Structural Design Options | 461
.
58 On the Tools menu.
60 After aligning the beam. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. click Component. click Align. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. Refer to the following illustration.

on the Edit toolbar. The first click sets the move start point. click 63 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■ ■
.62 Select the beam and.
Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain
Using the Array tool requires two clicks.
65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. Click to indicate the end point of the move. The second click represents the move end point.
462 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options
.

Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. you set up multiple design option sets.
66 On the View toolbar.rvt. click Finish Editing. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory.
Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. 69 Click Close. That is because the brackets option is set to primary.
67 On the Tools menu. name the file. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets.
Creating the Structural Design Options | 463
. you need this file in its current state. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. each with multiple design options to pick from. i_Urban_House-in progress. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. Notice that even before you close the dialog. click Save As. 70 On the File menu. In this exercise. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. click
. which is visible by default. and click Save. 68 In the Design Options dialog.

The second roofing system. do so now. select Louvers (primary). 8 In the Type Selector. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. delete them after the rafter is in place.
2 On the Tools menu. 6 In the Project Browser. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. Under Now Editing. is constructed of 2" x 10" rafters and 2" x 6" louvers. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial.
464 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options
. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. click Component.
Create the first roofing design option
1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. 10 Referring to the following illustration. click Edit Selected. In the next exercise. expand Floor Plans. 4 Under Edit.the other for beams. expand Views (all). and double-click TOP OF CORE. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you design each of the roofing options. under Roofing. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. 3 In the Design Options dialog. With the second option. 5 Click Close. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. You should have named it i_Urban_House-in progress. open it now.
Creating the Roof System Design Options
In this exercise. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. place the rafter 3' 0" inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 3'. If you need to add dimensions.rvt. The first option. select Rafter 2 x 10. Sunscreen. a Louver system.

Select 2nd for Move To. specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■
Clear Group and Associate.
14 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. under Other. 13 On the Options Bar.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. click Array.
15 On the Edit menu. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. 16 On the Options Bar. 12 Select the rafter you added previously.
You are creating an array of five rafters that are 3' 3" apart. click . click Modify.
Creating the Roof System Design Options | 465
. enter 38' 6" for Length. Select Constrain. Enter 5 for Number. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point.

Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created. you do not need to type the foot and inch markers. enter 3' 3" .
Add the louvers to the design option
19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. For example. when the listening dimension displays.18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. you can enter 3 3.
466 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options
. The space separates feet and inches. click Component. rather than entering 3' 3". and press ENTER. TIP When entering a dimension value.

click the Edit menu. under Other. and click OK. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. when the listening dimension displays. click Modify. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam.
24 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 Move the cursor vertically downward. 26 On the Options Bar. enter 1’.
25 With the louver still selected. and select the louver you just placed. and.
Creating the Roof System Design Options | 467
. enter 17' 6 1/2" for Length. specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■
Clear Group and Associate. Select Constrain. Enter 34 for Number. select Louver 2 x 6. Select 2nd for Move To. and press Enter.20 In the Type Selector.
22 On the Design Bar. and click Array. 23 On the Options Bar. click .
27 For the array starting point.

under Roofing. under Edit. click
.
The louver roof system is complete. and then click Close. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. 34 In the Project Browser. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. click Finish Editing. expand Elevations. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. select Sunscreen. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option.
468 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options
. click Edit Selected. 33 Under Editing. and double-click West.
29 On the View toolbar.Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 1' 0" apart. 31 In the Design Options dialog.
Create sunscreen roof system
32 In the Design Options dialog.
30 On the Tools menu.

37 In the Work Plane dialog. then you can modify it through the dimension. and click OK. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. click . click Properties.
42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. You will fix this in a later step. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. Under Constraints. the top of the next column on the right. Click OK. Select the right arc. Under Constraints. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the dataset specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. specify the following:
■ ■ ■
Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. 41 Select the top of the left column.36 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. 40 On the Options Bar. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool.
This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. enter -19' 0" for Extrusion End. 39 On the Design Bar. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. and the third point defines the arc. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. Therefore. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible.
45 Click OK. The roof sketch must be a continuous line.
Creating the Roof System Design Options | 469
. 46 On the Tools menu. click Trim/Extend.
NOTE As you sketch the arcs. enter 1' 0" for Extrusion Start. The first two points define the ends of the line. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. click Lines. 43 On the Design Bar. In this case. then the center arc. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion.

you need this file in its current state. under Views (all). was constructed of 2" x 10" rafters and 2" x 6" louvers.
48 On the Design Bar. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. right-click {3D}.
You have completed the sunscreen roof system. a Louver system. 50 On the Tools menu. and last options. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. tertiary. The second roofing system. and click Rename. 51 In the Design Options dialog. 49 On the View toolbar. After exploring the combinations.
Create new views for each design option
1 In the Project Browser. The first option. In this exercise. click Save. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs.
The louver roof system is complete. Sunscreen. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. click Finish Sketch. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. under 3D Views. 52 On the File menu. and delete the discarded design options. under Views (all). you designed each of the roofing options. and then click Close.
470 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options
.
Managing Design Options
In this exercise.The arcs should connect. make it part of the building model. 2 In the Project Browser. secondary. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. click Finish Editing. click . Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. you select a design. do so now. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. under Edit. expand 3D Views.

4 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). and click Rename. under 3D Views. click the Design Options tab. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.
Managing Design Options | 471
. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. and click OK. click the Design Options tab. and click OK. enter Primary Option. Rename the three copies as follows:
■ ■ ■
Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option
6 In the Project Browser. click Visibility/Graphics. double-click Primary Option. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. click Visibility/Graphics. and click Duplicate.3 In the Rename View dialog.
10 In the Project Browser. 9 Click OK. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. 13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. 5 Right-click each of the copies. 11 On the View menu. under 3D Views. double-click Secondary Option. under Views (all). 7 On the View menu.

Because the client has selected the design option. but should be accepted as part of the building model. 30 Under Option Set. 27 In the alert dialog. click Yes. click Yes. 23 In the Design Options dialog. 31 In the alert dialog. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. click Delete to remove the views that used options. select Beam. select Make Primary. 33 In the Design Options dialog.
Managing Design Options | 473
. double-click Primary Option. click Accept Primary. In this case. 29 Select Roofing. 22 On the Tools menu. the current primaries are no longer options. 26 Under Option Set. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. click Close. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. the beam option becomes part of the model. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. under Structure. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. In your design options. click Delete. 25 Select Structure. 24 Under Option. This was the client choice for structural. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. since you no longer need them. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. An alert is displayed. The set is deleted.At this point.

you selected a design. made it part of the building model. and deleted the discarded design options.The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. click Save. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations.
474 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options
. In this exercise. After exploring the combinations.
35 On the File menu.

Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates:
■ ■
A campus plan that contains links to several structures. In the final lesson. You position the building models on the site plan. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. In these situations. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. and manage the links throughout the project. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. Comparison of alternatives on a site. This maximizes efficiency. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area.
475
. modify their visibility.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates
19
Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus.
■
In this tutorial. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. performance.

One building model is a condominium.Linking Building Models
In this lesson. and the other is a townhouse.
Linking Building Models from Different Project Files
In this exercise. You link two building models to the project. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. You position the building models on the site.
Automatic placement options:
■
Center-to-Center: Revit Structure places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Structure 2008 to automatically place it. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. By shared coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed.
Placement options when linking building models
1 When you link a building model in a project. modify their visibility. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence.
■
476 | Chapter 19 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates
. you open a project in which only site components have been developed. this option will place the link at a predefined location. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files.
■
Origin-to-Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Structure model. NOTE The center of a Revit Structure model is the center of the model geometry.

this system is not exposed to the user. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. in the Model Linking folder that you created. you can do so. click Open. right-click.
Manual placement options:
■
Cursor at origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor.
■
In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 On the File menu. “Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models” on page 492.rvt. and click OK. click Training Files. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. 6 Repeat the previous four steps for the following files:
■ ■
c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex
7 Open the Model Linking folder.
■ ■
Navigate to the Model Linking folder. 3 On the File menu. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer.
Link condo complex into site project
9 On the File menu. and click Properties. Cursor at center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. with write permission. This option is grayed out.
Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 477
.
This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. c_Condo_Complex. however. click Open.
4 On the File menu.
Save training files to different folder
2 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. select the three files. and save the file there. Otherwise. NOTE Revit Structure projects have an internal coordinate system. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. click Close. All three files now reside. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. and open Common\c_Site. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only.RELATED See the lesson. Select c_Site. 8 Clear Read-only. click Save As.
■ ■
Cursor at base point: Not applicable for linked Revit Structure Files. c_Townhouse.

and double-click Level 1. expand Views (all). click Import/Link ➤ Revit.
Move the condo complex building model
14 Select the linked building model. The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model.
10 In the Project Browser.
13 Click Open. expand Floor Plans. select Automatically place. Under Automatically place.
11 On the File menu.
478 | Chapter 19 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates
. select Origin to origin. Notice the blue detail lines. Under Positioning.■
Click Open. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. 12 In the Add Link dialog:
■ ■ ■
Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex.

click . The linked model moves as one object. 16 For the move start point.
Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 479
. 15 On the Edit toolbar.
The Move command requires two clicks.
17 For the move endpoint. Standard move commands work with linked building models. click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it. The second click specifies the move endpoint. click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. Linked Autodesk Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex. similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects.After you select it.rvt is displayed in the Type Selector. The first click specifies the move start point.

18 On the View menu.
480 | Chapter 19 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates
.
Rotate the townhouse
22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it. and select c_Townhouse. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. select Origin to origin.
Link the townhouse building model
19 On the File menu.After you specify the location to move to. the linked file is displayed within the confines of the blue detail lines. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. select Automatically place.
21 Click Open. The townhouse building model is displayed above the site model. Under Automatically place. 20 In the Add Link dialog:
■ ■ ■
Navigate to the Model Linking folder. Under Positioning.

23 On the Edit toolbar. when the vertical line displays. and click to specify the end of the rotation.
25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise. click to specify the rotation start point. 24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and. you first specify the rotation start point.
To rotate an object. and then click to specify the end of the rotation. the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise.
Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 481
. In this case. click
.

Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse. click . 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point.
This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model.The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration.
28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint.
Move the townhouse
26 On the Edit toolbar.
482 | Chapter 19 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates
.

31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point. and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees.
The Copy command works much like the Move command.The townhouse is located within its required footprint. click Rotate. and the second click specifies the copy-to point. click .
Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 483
. select the upper-right corner of the townhouse. 30 For the starting point. A copy of the townhouse is displayed on the right side of the site project.
32 On the Edit menu. The first click specifies the start point.
Copy the townhouse
29 On the Edit toolbar.

37 On the View toolbar. for Name. you modify the elevation of the townhouses.
38 On the File menu.
35 In the Element Properties dialog. you need this project file open and in this view.NOTE After you rotate the townhouse. under Identity data. enter Townhouse A. you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. click . In this exercise. 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B. use the Move command to make any adjustments. 34 On the Options Bar. you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development.
484 | Chapter 19 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates
. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation.
Repositioning Linked Building Models
In this exercise. When you originally linked the files. you linked two separate Revit Structure 2008 models into a site model. and click OK. click Save. In this exercise. After linking the files. In the next exercise. 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left. if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. they were placed too low within the site topography. click .

Modify the vertical position of the townhouses
1 On the View toolbar.
4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. If you have not completed the previous exercise. 3 In the Project Browser. the tooltip and status bar display the name of the linked file. hold the Shift key down and spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. expand Elevations. 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that. This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface. under Views (all).
2 Using the Dynamic View tool. and double-click South.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. click . when it highlights.
Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. do so before continuing. 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project.
Repositioning Linked Building Models | 485
.

double-click North. align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project. you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan. TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. under Elevations.
486 | Chapter 19 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates
. Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment. This would over-constrain the model. 7 On the Tools toolbar.
8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. and then select the plane that you want to align.
11 Return to the South elevation view. 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. and click to select it.
Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. When using the Align command. press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. 9 In the Project Browser. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. click . and click to select the line. you first select the plane you want to align to.In the steps that follow. In this case.

detail level. double-click South. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. As you can see. click Visibility/Graphics. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files.
Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility
In this exercise. After you link an Revit Structure 2008 project file within another project. In the next exercise.
15 On the File menu. and the halftone settings for each linked project. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view. click
.
14 Using the Dynamic View tool. click the Revit Links tab. 4 Under Visibility.
Modify visibility settings
1 In the Project Browser. If you have not completed the previous exercise. you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view. click Save. hold the Shift key down and spin the model until it resembles the following illustration.
12 On the View toolbar. each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project. display settings.rvt.Both townhouses should be at the proper level. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. the defaults are set to By host view for all options. click 13 On the View toolbar. When you link a file. do so before continuing.
Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 487
. you need this project file open and in this view. 2 On the View menu. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. under Elevations. you can independently control the visibility settings. In this exercise. . Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. expand c_Townhouse. Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. you modify how the linked files display within the host project.

If the Basics page is set to Custom.
Apply halftone
13 In the Project Browser. scroll down and clear Levels. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. expand c_Townhouse. click Visibility/Graphics. clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex. 10 Click OK. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. By linked view. 8 For Annotation Categories. 12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project.rvt.rvt. double-click Level 1. click OK.
488 | Chapter 19 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates
. The townhouse level lines still are displayed in the remaining elevation views. and click OK. click the Revit Links tab. 16 Under Visibility. 14 On the View menu. click By Host View. under Floor Plans. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses are no longer displayed. 9 Under Visibility.
NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only.5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse. click Custom. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.rvt. select <Custom>. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. or Custom. then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View.

27 Under Display Settings. you can also apply halftone to individual categories. select Custom.
Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 489
. Using the Custom option. no detail level changes are required. under Visibility. click Visibility/Graphics. 24 By default. You can click the value for Detail Level. medium. 28 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. on the Basics tab. or fine. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. 23 In the Model categories list. you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis.
Detail levels of a linked file
18 On the View menu.rvt. select c_Townhouse. and then set the detail level to coarse.
Modify display settings of linked files
26 You can use display settings to control the view range. 25 Click OK. select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view.rvt. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings. click the Revit Links tab. On the Revit Links tab. you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. click By Host View. phase. and phase filter of a specific link. click Custom for the Townhouse link. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. By selecting custom under Model Categories. 22 Click the Model Categories tab. the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View.Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. With linked files. under Display Settings. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. In this case. 20 For c_Townhouse. select <Custom>. Notice both townhouses are displayed in halftone.

notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute. 2 In the Manage Links dialog. click Manage Links. In the next exercise. demolished. you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. you need this project file open and in this view. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed. However. 29 Select By linked view for View range. 3 Under Path Type. In most cases. They supply information regarding the links. click Save. a connection to the linked project continues to exist. With the Show All filter applied. In a shared coordinate environment. and Saved Path fields are read only. you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project.
Unload and reload links
1 On the File menu. there are situations. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. As links are moved to new locations in the host project. you manage the linked files. After you link an Revit Structure 2008 project into another project.By default. the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified. this is preferable. the link is maintained. You learn more about this in the next lesson. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location. all new. you should use a relative path rather than an absolute.
Managing Linked Building Models
In this exercise. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. click OK. In general. In this exercise. where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified. Notice the Loaded. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it. those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened. do so before continuing. existing. the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. 30 Click OK. In this case. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. 32 On the File menu. on a sloped site for instance. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. In this case. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory. The default path type is Relative. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Locations Not Saved.
490 | Chapter 19 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates
. All other components are grayed out. If you have not completed the previous exercise. click the Revit tab.

it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. click Yes. both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset. In general. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects. 7 Click OK. Notice that the condo complex link is no longer displayed in the host project. In the Add Link dialog. you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated. 5 Click Unload. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. select c_Condo_Complex. In these cases. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. select Specify.
Managing Linked Building Models | 491
. under Open Worksets.4 Under Linked File. you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. the link is not loaded.rvt. When you initially place the link. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. If you choose not to open that workset. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn.
■
■
■
TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file. 6 At the confirmation prompt. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. However.
TIP In the Manage Links dialog. To do this. you should consider the following:
■
Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model. go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command.

you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside. you are establishing a shared origin point. When Revit project views are exported to DWG. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location. you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. In essence. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. 10 In the Save As dialog. leave the project file open in its current view. If you have not completed the previous lesson. When used in conjunction with model linking. When you share coordinates between projects. it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects.
NOTE This lesson requires the completion of the lesson “Linking Building Models” on page 476.
Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models
In this lesson. and save it as an RVT file. and the resulting project files. name the file Site_Project. expand Revit Links. In this exercise. you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files.
492 | Chapter 19 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates
. do so before continuing. click Save As.
9 On the File menu.8 In the Project Browser. right-click c_Condo_Complex. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson. In the next lesson.rvt. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise. If you intend to complete the next lesson now. and click Reload. project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog.

Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. If you have not completed the lesson. This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt.
Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates | 493
. In this case. The host file consists primarily of site components.Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates
In this exercise. Dataset
■ ■ ■
On the File menu. click Open. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data. If you have closed the project. the host project coordinates are used. you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. “Linking Building Models” on page 476. you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. Select Site_Project. do so before continuing. When you are working in the host project. you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. When you link an Revit Structure 2008 project into another project (the host project). open it before continuing.rvt and click Open.
Publish coordinates
1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. and the resulting project files. the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson.

you need this project file open and in this view. and Lot C. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host. select Location 1. As indicated in the Status Bar.
4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog.2 On the Tools menu. click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. this location is not saved outside of the host project. 5 On the Design Bar. but can have multiple additional locations. and click OK. it is placed at a specific location. if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project. However. 3 In the drawing area. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. Lot B. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. These three locations can be named Lot A. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project.
Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates
When an Revit Structure 2008 model is linked into a host project. click the Condo Complex. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host.
494 | Chapter 19 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates
. notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Structure is waiting for you to select another link. then the location becomes saved in the linked file. On the Status Bar. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to.

Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 495
. and click OK. click to select it. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 In the Rename dialog. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files.In this exercise. click Not Shared for Shared Location. notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A. you have only two choices:
■ ■
Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use. you specify and save the two townhouse locations. under Instance Parameters. click Rename.
2 On the Options Bar. a dialog is displayed telling you to reconcile the coordinates. enter Lot A for New. click
. 9 In the Select Location dialog. Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models.
3 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click OK.
Specify a townhouse location
1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1. . under Instance Parameters. When constraining a link to a location. when the edges highlight. 4 Under Value. even though both models originate from one linked file. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. move the cursor over the left townhouse and. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. do so before continuing. changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file.
Constrain a link to a specific location
11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. click Change.
12 On the Options Bar. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog:
■ ■
Select Publish the shared coordinate system. This is a one-time operation. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location. If you have not completed the exercise.
6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. Record the current position as a location. click Reconcile. notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. click Not Shared for Shared Location. You also relocate the shared origin of the project. click
13 In the Element Properties dialog. After a link instance is assigned a shared location.

click OK. click Duplicate. select the second option. you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. 25 In the Manage Links dialog. a warning is displayed. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. Notice the OK button is still not active. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B.
Relocate a project
29 On the View menu. By relocating a project. You are given the opportunity to save the new location. When you relocate a project. make sure Lot B is selected. select Save. or cancel the action. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. and the left townhouse resides at that location. This is a two-click process. enter Lot B for Name. 22 In the Manage Links dialog. you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. and then select the townhouse project. 23 Click Save Locations. Notice the OK button is not active. click Manage Links. The first click specifies the move start point. Record current position as. the active location position is moved. and click OK. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. and click OK. Because Lot A is currently in use. it is not automatically saved within the linked file. click OK. 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once. 15 In the Choose Location dialog. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. ignore the warning. you cannot redefine its location. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. notice the Locations Not Saved checkbox for the townhouse project is no longer checked. notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. select Move instance to. 30 On the Tools menu. The second click specifies the move endpoint. 19 In the Select Location dialog. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. and click OK. You created the Lot A location in previous steps. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol. When you create a location. 14 In the Choose Location dialog. To explicitly save a location.
Save locations
21 On the File menu.
496 | Chapter 19 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates
. When you release the mouse button. 16 Click Change. although it may appear that the linked files are moving.In the Choose Location dialog. click the Revit tab. 26 Click OK.

In this exercise. you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin. select Save. 34 On the File menu. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects.
Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 497
. and click OK. 36 On the File menu. click Undo to return the origin to its original position. click Save.
Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Structure. NOTE In the following exercise.
33 On the Edit menu. you work in one of the linked projects. click Close.32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog.

2 On the File menu. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial.Working with a Linked Building Model
After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared. click Manage Place and Locations. it is placed automatically within the host project. if other models were linked into the same host. Dataset
■ ■ ■
On the File menu. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. Select c_Townhouse and click Open. you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location. Click Open. the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file. Under Positioning. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. under Floor Plans. 3 In the Add Link dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■
Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial.rvt file.
Because this building model only has one named location.rvt file. the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project. In this exercise. If you have not completed the exercises. click Open. select By shared coordinates. double-click 1st Floor.
The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. you could link them in and have them retain their correct position. Select c_Condo_Complex. In addition. 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model. you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on.
Link a project
1 In the Project Browser. When opening the linked file.
498 | Chapter 19 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates
. Also.
Change the active location
5 On the Settings menu. do so before continuing. The current active location is Lot A.

2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file.
Manage locations
1 On the Settings menu. click Duplicate. enter Lot C. you manage the shared locations. you worked within a project that is linked within another project. 3 In the Name dialog. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes.Notice that Lot A is the current active location.
Managing Shared Locations
The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. 7 Click OK. click OK.
NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. you need this project file open and in this view. you can select Lot C if necessary. If you have not completed the exercises. you create a new location. In the host file. click Manage Place and Locations. under Graphics. In the next exercise.
Managing Shared Locations | 499
. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. In this exercise. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B. orient a view to true north. 7 Zoom to Fit.
Orient a view to true north
5 On the View menu. and click Make Current. do so before continuing. click View Properties. and click OK. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. In this exercise. select True North for Orientation. 6 Select Lot B. and click OK.

Dataset
■ ■ ■
On the File menu.
Scheduling Components of Linked Files
In this exercise. 10 On the File menu.
500 | Chapter 19 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates
. you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files.Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates. In this exercise. Select Site_Project. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin.rvt and click Open. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files.
Report shared coordinates
8 On the Tools menu. On the Options Bar. You can save the file if you wish. click Open. 9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area. click Close. If you have not completed the exercise. do so before continuing. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin. you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin.

6 Add the remaining fields in the following order:
■ ■ ■
Family and Type Comments Cost
7 Select Include elements in linked files.
Select the fields to display in the door schedule
4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click OK. click the Fields tab. select Doors. 5 Under Available fields. select Count. under Category.
2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Schedule/Quantities.
Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 501
. and click Add. 3 In the New Schedule dialog.Create a door schedule
1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view.

click Close. 11 In the Schedule Properties box. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping.
Sort schedule data
9 In the Project Browser.8 Click OK.
Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Properties. 13 On the File menu. 14 On the File menu. and then click OK twice.
502 | Chapter 19 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates
. click Save. You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components. the schedule lists the total count for each door type. clear Itemize every instance. right-click Door Schedule.
In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. under Other. you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type. 12 Select Grand totals. expand Schedules/Quantities. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. select Family and Type for Sort by. In this exercise. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. You have completed this tutorial.

you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. complete with schedules. and create plan views for each phase. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. You then create schedules for the phased steelwork and three-dimensional views of the phased construction and place them on a drawing sheet for a specific phase. you work with a building information model that requires renovation. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. In this tutorial. In the lesson and exercises that follow. demolish existing construction. beams. You create new phases.Project Phasing
20
In any project. For the client. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. assign new building model elements such as steelwork (columns. and then add new building model elements. You customize the display of phased work to highlight demolition work.
503
. In the second exercise. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. You create new phases. braces and footings) to phases.

and a non load-bearing brick panel wall for a new building to be constructed north of the galleria.Using Phasing
In this lesson. as well as a covered walkway. you renovate a building to convert it to a shopping mall. Phase 1 (south): Includes new steelwork and footings for the existing building. assigning building elements to the appropriate phase:
■ ■
Existing: Includes the original brick-clad building with structural walls and non load-bearing internal partitions. the galleria. footings. a floor slab. Phase 2 (north): Includes new steelwork.
■
Existing phase
Phase 1 (south)
504 | Chapter 20 Project Phasing
. You create and manage three project phases. Also includes demolition of all internal walls for the existing building.

The finished sheet
Phasing Your Model
In this exercise. You create a new sheet on which you place the schedules and two views of the building model. and modify graphic overrides to highlight demolition work.Phase 2 (north)
After you add phases to the project. click the Training Files icon. use phase filters to control what displays in each phase. Dataset
■ ■ ■
On the File menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Open.
Phasing Your Model | 505
. you begin with all the building elements drawn as new construction. You create new phases for the project timeline. you create structural schedules for a specific phase of the project. After you assign building elements to phases. you create new phase-specific views. Open the c_STR_Project_Phasing.rvt file located in the Common folder. The default structural project template has two phases: Existing and New Construction.

and the Phase Demolished value is None. and double-click Floor. click the New Construction field. two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. You can also use the Demolition tool 7 Click Cancel. notice that the Phase Created value is New Construction. click Modify to clear the command. Demolition work is represented by a black dashed line. then new building elements are assigned to Phase 1. Every building element has a Phase Created and a Phase Demolished value so you can assign a creation and a demolition phase to new work. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. to select building elements for demolition. TIP Available phases and view phase settings can be changed in a project template so they are available for each new project. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. or temporary) are visible in this phase. 10 In the Phasing dialog box. if a view is assigned to a Phase 1 setting. the current phase linework is displayed as black. expand Views (all). 5 Select any of the exterior walls. This phase assignment is controlled by a Phase setting within the view properties.Verify the current phase is New Construction
1 In the Project Browser. click . For example. expand Floor Plans. A phase view can show work in the current phase and work from previous phases in the project timeline.
When you create a new structural project. on the Project Phases tab. By default. The Show All filter means that all building model elements (new. while previous phase linework is displayed as gray. 4 Click Cancel.
Add and edit phases
9 On the Settings menu.
In the Element Properties dialog box. under Phasing. These values let you assign creation and demolition phases in a timeline. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. As you add new elements to the building model. demo. click Phases.
506 | Chapter 20 Project Phasing
. They can also be added or edited in an existing project at any time. 2 On the View menu. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. Any new elements that you add to this view are assigned the New Construction phase value. click View Properties. 6 On the Options Bar. existing.

13 Click in the Description fields for each phase. and click OK. All building objects that were assigned to New Construction are now assigned to Phase 1 (south) because you changed the phase name. is visible in this view. and click Select All Instances. click After. right-click one of the rectangular footings. There are now three phases in your project: Existing. which means that work assigned to Phase 1 (south).
Assign selected building elements to the Existing phase
15 In the Project Browser. demo. 18 Select Show New for Phase Filter. All of the building elements in the project are currently assigned to Phase 1 (south).
Phasing Your Model | 507
. click Hide/Isolate.
20 In the drawing area. and click Hide Object. 21 On the View Control Bar. existing earlier phases. scroll down the list of Instance Parameters until you see the Phasing heading. click View Properties. or temporary work (created and demolished in same phase). you will see a visual confirmation of the change as the building elements disappear from the view. 16 On the View menu. so Phase 1 and Phase 2 occur after the Existing phase. The phases are on a timeline with later phases lower on the list. as you change selected building elements to the existing phase. and double-click 3D. Now you are seeing only work that is new to Phase 1 (south) of the project. With the phase Filter set to Show New. 12 Under Insert. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. The Phase value is Phase 1 (south) and the Phase filter is Show All. and enter Phase 2 (north) under Name. You do not see a change in the graphics because all the building elements are new to Phase 1 (south). and enter the following text:
■ ■ ■
Existing: Existing building Phase 1 (south): Existing building with new steelwork and demolished walls Phase 2 (north): New building with steelwork and exterior panel wall
14 Click OK. expand 3D Views.
19 Click
and click Spin to adjust your view as shown. Phase 1 (south).11 Enter Phase 1 (south). and Phase 2 (north).

click
. click . This filters out the steelwork. as shown. are selected and are displayed in red. click Orient ➤ Top. 28 On the View menu.
24 On the Options Bar. The continuous footing foundations.
25 In the Filter dialog box.
22 On the View menu.
27 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Orient ➤ Southeast.The footings are hidden and cannot be selected. clear Structural Columns and Structural Framing. walls. under Phasing. select Existing for Phase Created.
508 | Chapter 20 Project Phasing
. and click OK. and openings. and click OK. which are the building elements that comprise the existing building. 26 On the Options Bar. 23 Use a crossing window to select the existing building. and previously you hid the rectangular footings to make sure they couldn’t be selected.

the walls. Only elements new to Phase 1 (south) are displayed. the slab. and click Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. under Phasing. All of the structural elements are still assigned to Phase 1 (south). 31 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Show All for Phase Filter. under Phasing.
35 On the Options Bar. 32 Click OK. and the footings north of the galleria. click
. click Orient ➤ Northeast.
The building elements that you assigned to the Existing phase are no longer displayed in the drawing. click Hide/Isolate. and click OK.
36 In the Element Properties dialog box. 33 On the View menu. select Phase 2 (north) for Phase Created. 34 Use a selection window to select the structural elements. 30 On the View menu.29 On the View Control Bar.
Phasing Your Model | 509
. Now you can see the Existing phase displayed with gray linework in the view. click View Properties. click Orient ➤ Top. 37 On the View menu.

You have reassigned building elements to three phases. Because of this time relationship. click View Properties. shows as black. the building is displayed as shown. 42 In the Project Browser. and click Rename.Because the active phase is Phase 1 (south) and the phase filter is set to Show All. and click OK. and temporary) are shown in the same timeline. under Phasing. 44 Repeat the process to create a view named Phase 2 (north)
Manage the phases for a view
45 In the Project Browser. double click Phase 1 (south). Because this is a phase-specific view. The line style of the walls and openings are displayed as black. You now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and for Phase 1. select Phase 1 (south) for the Phase value. 40 Click No. double-click Existing. and click OK. a graphic override is used to make “older” existing elements use the gray line style. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. it requires separate plan views for the Existing. it might be desirable to show previous phases or demolition. right-click Copy of Existing. 46 On the View menu. 48 In the Project Browser. new. under Phasing. 41 In the Project Browser. 43 In the Rename View dialog box. You can see the earlier existing phase because the phase filter is set to Show All. under Floor Plans. you modify phase and phase filter properties to determine which phase is shown and which building elements (existing. In a phase such as Phase 1. click View Properties. right-click Existing. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. enter Phase 1 (south). demo. 50 In the View Properties dialog box. and click OK. under Floor Plans. 47 In the Element Properties dialog box. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. which will include planned demolition. The line style of the new work. You do not see future phases such as Phase 2 (north). and click Duplicate.
Create phase-specific plan views
38 In the Project Browser. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. enter Existing.
510 | Chapter 20 Project Phasing
. Because this is a renovation project. 39 In the Rename View dialog box. Phase 1 (south) with demolition. and click Rename. and Phase 2 (north) project phases. under Floor Plans. You see work for Phase 1 (south) and the existing phases. 49 On the View menu. in phase 1. After you create the views. right-click Floor. Phase 1 (south) occurs after existing construction. select Existing for Phase. and click OK.

That is because the openings are wall-hosted elements.
The cursor is displayed as a hammer. 55 In the Element Properties dialog box. When you demolish the host. Notice that the openings display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. select the interior walls one at a time. select Phase 2 (north) for the Phase value. Because the Phase value is Phase 1 (south) the walls are demolished in this phase. demo. select Overridden. 63 Click on the Demolished line color and change it from black to red. New. click View Properties. under Demolished. click the Phase Filters tab. 53 In the Project Browser. Demolished. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. under Phasing.
View graphic overrides
62 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. under Floor Plans. The default phase filters are displayed. The line style of the current phase is displayed as black and previous phases are displayed as gray. Demo Red. and Temporary. click New. and enter Demo Red. click . Graphic overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status: existing.
Phasing Your Model | 511
. it is displayed as a dashed line. 58 In the Phasing dialog box. Existing. new or temporary. double-click Phase 2 (north). click Filter 1. 52 Referring to the walls displayed as dashed lines in the following illustration. 61 For the Filter Name. however. 59 In the Phasing dialog box. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override to highlight the demolished walls in red.Demolish the interior walls
51 On the Tools toolbar. you demolish all elements hosted by it.
Create a custom phase filter
57 On the Settings menu. 54 On the View menu. 60 Under Filter Name.
As you click each wall. In this case. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements. 56 Click OK. and select Show All for Phase Filter. click Phases.

and click Rename. right-click 3D and click Duplicate. 79 In the Project Browser. 83 Select Coordination for Discipline. and Show All for Phase Filter. Phase 2 (north). 74 In the Element Properties dialog box. 81 In the Element Properties dialog box. double-click Existing.
Manage the phases for the 3D views
72 In the Project Browser. 82 In the Element Properties dialog box. and the Show All phase filter includes the override for demolition. 68 Click OK. shows as black.
Apply the Demo Red graphic overrides to a view
65 Under Floor Plans. Phase 1 (south) occurs after existing construction. 76 Under Graphics. You can see the earlier existing phase because the phase filter is set to Show All. which will show both architectural and structural building elements. Do this three times so you have three copies. under Phasing. Phase 1 (south). under Phasing. under 3D Views. the demolished walls are displayed as red. The line style of the walls and openings are displayed as black. on the View menu. 75 On the View menu. under Graphics. 70 Right-click on each of the copies. 71 Name the views Existing. select Demo Red for Phase Filter to show work that is demolished with the red line color from the graphic overrides. Because of this time relationship. 73 On the View menu. select Phase 1 (south) for Phase. 80 On the View menu. 66 To assign as specific phase filter to a view. under Phasing. select Existing for the Phase value.
Create phase-specific 3D views
69 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click View Properties. select Shading for Model Graphics Style. 78 Click OK. The override settings for Show All and Demo Red are the same. The line style of the new work.
512 | Chapter 20 Project Phasing
. under 3D Views. select Shading for Model Graphics Style. This displays both architectural and structural building elements. a graphic override is used to make “older” existing elements use the gray line style.64 Click OK twice. click View Properties. double-click Phase 1 (south). under 3D Views. 67 In the Element Properties dialog box. 77 Select Coordination for Discipline. click View Properties. click View Properties. in phase 1. Because you changed the override. double-click Phase 1 (south).

framing. you create column. Open the i_STR_Project_Phasing_Schedules file located in the Imperial folder. click the Training Files icon.84 Click OK. In this exercise. you can do so at this time or you can continue in this file for the next exercise. assigning Phase 2 (north) as the Phase.
The finished sheet
Dataset
■ ■ ■
On the File menu. click Open. You finished the exercise by creating 3d phased views suitable for a client presentation. You create a new sheet on which you place the schedules. you created a building model with three distinct phases and created three plan views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase.
Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules | 513
.
Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules
In this exercise.
85 Repeat steps 81 . and footing schedules for a single phase of a project. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. You created a custom phase filter with graphic overrides to show demolition work in red. as well as two views of the building model.84 for the Phase 2 (north) view. 86 If you wish to save this file.

4 Under Available Fields. Enter Columns . click Schedule/Quantities. do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■
Under Category. Select Grand totals.
Create a structural framing schedule for Phase 1 (south)
6 On the Design Bar. Select Phase 1 (south) for Phase. Select Length for Then by. Select Phase 1 (south) for Phase. click the Fields tab. Click OK. click Schedule/Quantities.
514 | Chapter 20 Project Phasing
.Create a structural column schedule for Phase 1 (south)
1 On the View tab of the Design bar.
8 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. and do the following:
■
Select Family and Type for Sort By.
You can drag a column grid line to adjust the width of a column. and do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Select Family and Type for Sort By. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■
Count Family and Type
10 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. Click OK. 9 Under Available Fields. 7 In the New Schedule dialog box. 5 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Structural Framing.Phase 1 for Name. Enter Framing . Click OK.Phase 1 for Name. select Structural Columns.
3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. click the Fields tab. 2 In the New Schedule dialog box. do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■
Under Category. select the following fields. Clear Itemize every instance. select the following fields. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■
Count Family and Type Length
TIP Press and hold CTRL to make multiple selections under Available Fields.

19 In the Sheet Title dialog box. Click OK. Next. and do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■
Select Family and Type for Sort By. Click OK. right-click the new sheet.
Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules | 515
. Select Grand totals. select the following fields. you drag the schedules and project views onto the sheet.Phase 1 for Name. Enter Footings . do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■
Under Category. Clear Itemize every instance. click Schedule/Quantities 12 In the New Schedule dialog box. 17 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. and click Rename.
Create a sheet and then add views and schedules
16 In the Project Browser.
13 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■
Count Family and Type
15 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab.
Create a footings schedule for Phase 1 (south)
11 On the Design bar. select Structural Foundations. Select Phase 1 (south) for Phase.Structural for Name. Click OK. and click New Sheet. expand Sheets (all). enter Phase 1 . click OK. right-click Sheets (all).■ ■ ■
Select Grand totals. Use the following illustration as a guide as you complete the steps to create your sheet. click the Fields tab. 18 In the Project Browser. Clear Itemize every instance. 14 Under Available Fields.

and move the column controls to adjust column width. drag each of the three schedules onto the sheet. and drag Phase 1 (south) onto the sheet. expand Floor Plans. drag Phase 1 (south) onto the sheet. 21 Under 3D views.
In this exercise. and click to place it. 23 On the sheet. select each schedule one at a time. you created three custom structural schedules for a specific project phase and placed them on a sheet.20 In the Project Browser.
516 | Chapter 20 Project Phasing
. 22 Expand Schedules. and click to place them. and click to place it.

and how to use plan regions within floor plans and reflected ceiling plans.Viewing
21
In this tutorial.
517
. You learn how to access and create building model views and how to change the visibility of building components and annotations within views. how to control fill pattern colors. you learn to create and customize views of building information models. you learn how to change the visibility of detail components. More specifically.

click
. Dataset
■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. and double-click East. sections.rvt. on the Standard toolbar. The current file name is displayed in the Project Browser title bar.
Exploring the Building Model
In this exercise. click Training Files.Viewing a Building Model
In this lesson. expand Views (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Elevations.
Open an elevation view of the building model
1 On the left side of the drawing area. A new view displays a wireframe view of the east elevation view of the building model. and open Imperial\i_Viewing_Exercise. and three-dimensional (3D) views. you learn to create and customize user-defined views of a building information model. Both hidden lines and window tags display in the east elevation view. including elevation and three-dimensional views. and learn how to control the visibility of building components and annotations within views. locate the Project Browser. you learn how to access different views of the building model. You also learn how to control the visibility of different building components and annotations within building model views.
You create elevations.
518 | Chapter 21 Viewing
. The Project Browser is displayed by default between the Design Bar and the drawing area.
2 In the Project Browser.
TIP If the Project Browser does not display.

the east elevation. click Visibility/Graphics. The default name of the view is {3D}.
Create a 3D view of the building model
8 On the View toolbar. This change is applied only to the active view. and click Hidden Line. scroll down and clear Window Tags.
The 3D view is displayed in a new viewing window. click the Annotation Categories tab. click Model Graphics Style. The east elevation view displays with hidden lines. 6 Under Visibility.
Turn off the display of window tags in the elevation view
4 On the View menu. The window tags are no longer displayed in this view. This change is applied only in this elevation view.Display the elevation view with hidden lines
3 On the View Control Bar. Notice that window tags continue to display in the view. 7 Click OK. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides for Elevation: East dialog.
Exploring the Building Model | 519
. This hides the lines that show through to the exterior of the elevation view. click .

click X to close the view. and expand 3D Views. The view follows the movement of the cursor.
NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. Move the mouse to pan the view.
.
12 Press and hold CTRL.
NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. right-click {3D}.9 On the View toolbar. you can enable zoom mode by rolling the middle wheel. 18 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. click
to reorient the view. Notice that the view continues to display with hidden lines and no window tags. double-click My 3D View. and notice that the cursor displays as a magnifying glass This indicates that you are in zoom mode.
10 Move the cursor to the drawing window and notice that it now displays as a hand This means you are in pan mode. . You can pan. Notice that the view name is updated in the title bar of the viewing window and in the Project Browser. you can enable pan mode by pressing and holding the middle wheel button down. zoom.
520 | Chapter 21 Viewing
. and spin the building model by clicking the appropriate button in this dialog. enter My 3D View. 15 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 11 Pan the view by clicking and dragging the cursor in the drawing area. and click OK. 17 In the upper right corner of the viewing window. expand Views (all). 16 In the Rename View dialog. 13 View the Dynamic View dialog in the lower left corner of the screen.
Save the current 3D view
14 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views.

the new view named 3D View 1 is displayed by default in a perspective view. expand Floor Plans. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.
Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 521
. you create a perspective view of the building model with a camera. eye height. Cameras define the eye point. “Creating a Perspective View with a Camera” on page 521. outside of the dimension lines. Specify the second point in one of the rooms in the building. 3 Add the camera to the view by specifying two points: one for the camera position and the other for the camera target point:
■ ■
Specify the first point in the top right corner of the drawing. click Camera.19 Proceed to the next exercise. and distance from the target. and click View. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. right-click in the Design Bar. i_Viewing_Exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.
After you specify the second point (the view target). as shown in the following illustration. and double-click Level 1.
Creating a Perspective View with a Camera
In this exercise. expand Views (all).
Create the perspective view
1 In the Project Browser.rvt.

click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. and sideways to see how the view changes. click Dynamically Modify View. 5 On the View menu. Move the cursor up. Move the cursor up and down in the view to move the cursor forward and backward. down. select the blue control grips on the sides of the crop region and move them out.
8 To move the camera eye position higher or lower:
■ ■ ■
Click Dolly and move the cursor into the perspective view.
9 To move the camera forward and backward in the view:
■ ■ ■
Click Forward/Back and move the cursor into the perspective view.
Change the camera projection settings
6 On the View menu. 7 In the Dynamic View dialog. You can use the walkthrough controls in this dialog to move the camera position and change the view. Press and hold the left mouse button. Press and hold the left mouse button.4 To resize the view to see the entire floor model.
522 | Chapter 21 Viewing
. click the Walkthrough tab located at the bottom of the dialog.

11 Adjust the view as shown in the following illustration.
13 On the View menu. Four views of the model display in the drawing area. and target
12 On the Window menu. You may need to reposition the view with the other controls. Press and hold the left mouse button. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. Move the cursor side to side in the view to rotate the view.
Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 523
.10 To rotate the camera around the target:
■ ■ ■
Click Turn and move the cursor into the perspective view. height.
Change the camera position. click Tile.

16 In the Project Browser.
524 | Chapter 21 Viewing
. The camera and the view direction of the camera are displayed in the appropriate views.
15 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D View 1. right-click 3D View 1.14 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. under 3D Views. and click Show Camera. The border of the window that contains the Level 1 view highlights. double-click Level 1.

and click Element Properties.
18 Change the target and eye elevation of the camera by modifying its properties:
■ ■
Select the camera in My 3D View. and move it to another location.
■
3D View 1 immediately updates to show the change. In the Element Properties dialog.17 In My 3D View. under Camera.
Use a section box to clip the model
19 On the View toolbar.
3D View 1 should update immediately after you move the target point of the camera. right-click. select the camera target point (the magenta grip). enter 50' 0" for Eye Elevation and 5' 6" for Target Elevation. Click OK.
Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 525
. click to create a new 3D view. TIP The updated view depends on the location of the camera before you change the elevation values.

and click OK.
22 On the View menu. select Section Box. A section box is displayed around the model. click View Properties. under Extents.
21 Rotate the view as shown in the following illustration.
526 | Chapter 21 Viewing
. 23 In the Element Properties dialog.
24 Click the section box.20 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style. and click Shading.

27 Proceed to the next exercise. i_Viewing_Exercise.The section box highlights and grips are displayed on its faces.
Sketch a section line in a plan view
1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and rotate the section box around the model.
26 Click and hold the rotation tool. “Creating a Section View” on page 527. you create a section view by sketching a section line in a plan view. double-click Level 1. and maximize this view.
Creating a Section View
In this exercise. as shown in the following illustration.
Creating a Section View | 527
. expand Floor Plans. A rotation tool is also displayed. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.
25 Select and move the lower right grip on the section box closer to the model.

double-click the section head. click Modify. and double-click Section 1. click Section. or in the Project Browser.
View the section
5 To view the section.2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and then click to the right of the lower right wall to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. 4 On the Design Bar. expand Sections. The box represents the extents of the section view as well as the viewing direction of the section.
528 | Chapter 21 Viewing
. 3 Click to the left of the left wall of the building model.
Notice a dashed green box with blue grips is displayed on the section line.

Notice the change in the view direction. and select and move the section depth grip under the lower wall. Notice the change in section depth. select Floor Plan: Level 1. click Modify.
9 On the Design Bar. You may need to zoom closer to the walls in order to see the fill pattern.
Creating a Section View | 529
. double-click Level 1. 14 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 6 In the Project Browser. and click Find Referring Views. right-click. Control arrows are displayed near the section tag. 7 In the Go To View dialog.
Change the view direction of the section
11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 12 Select the section line.NOTE Fill pattern is dependent on the zoom ratio. 10 Double-click the section head to display the section view. and click Open View. and drag the section depth grip below the middle horizontal wall as shown in the following illustration. 15 Double-click the section head to display the section view. 13 Click the control arrows to flip the section view. 8 Select the section line. select the section view.

a by default. “Creating Elevation Views” on page 530.
Add an elevation symbol
1 In the Project Browser. and double-click the elevation symbol arrow. you learn to create an elevation view in a project by adding an elevation symbol to a plan view. click Elevation. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 Without clicking in the drawing area. An elevation symbol displays at the end of the cursor. under Floor Plans.rvt.
530 | Chapter 21 Viewing
.
View the elevation
6 To view the new elevation. Notice that the elevation symbol arrow points to the nearest wall as you move through the building model. double-click Level 1. place the cursor inside the building facing the lobby entrance.
Creating Elevation Views
In this exercise.
5 On the Design Bar.
4 To create an elevation view of the building lobby. Make sure the elevation symbol is pointing towards the lobby doors. and click. click Modify. zoom in. You may need to adjust your zoom settings to see the elevation symbol.16 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. move the cursor around the building model. i_Viewing_Exercise. The elevation is named Elevation 1 .

the plan regions cannot overlap each other.b. or pattern. double-click Level 1. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Save As. double-click Elevation 1 . If you create more than one plan region in a file. and you cannot control their visibility. you work with a split-level building model that requires a different view range than the rest of the view. indicating the possible elevation views that you can create. Elevation 1 .
11 If you want to save your changes. line type. Do not select the arrow. Elevation 1 . 12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 8 Select the center of the elevation symbol.
Creating a View Plan Region
In this lesson.b.
10 In the Project Browser.a. The elevation symbol is displayed with four check boxes. although they may have coincident edges. line color. Plan regions are closed sketches that you can create in floor plan and reflected ceiling plan (RCP) views only. 9 Select the box shown in the following illustration to add a new elevation view. on the File menu. The check mark in the right box indicates the current elevation view. Plan regions do not work with linked Revit Structure files. under Elevations.
Creating a View Plan Region | 531
.7 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.

refer to the online Help for more information.
Dataset
■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Floor Plans. you create a plan region in the Level 1 floor plan of the following building model. The cut plane height of the view range for this view is 4' 0" . and double-click Level 1. click Training Files.If you are not familiar with view ranges in Revit Structure. In the following illustration. and open Imperial\i_Plan_Region. you can display the stepped portion of the walls in the Level 1 floor plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog.
Because the stepped portion of the walls in the building model is above the cut plane height in the Level 1 floor plan view. so you can view the height of the walls and windows.
532 | Chapter 21 Viewing
. expand Views (all).
By creating a plan region in the view with a different cut plane height. it does not display in the Level 1 floor plan. The stepped portion of the project walls and windows are not displayed because the cut plane does not intersect any of the model geometry above this height. the south elevation is also displayed.
Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan
In this exercise.rvt.
View the Level 1 floor plan
1 In the Project Browser.

The plan region displays as a dashed green line. Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the bottom right. click .
■ ■ ■
Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the top left.
Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan | 533
. and the view depth plane. view range. When you select the plan region. and click View. Press ESC to end the command. You use the view range property to control the cut plane. click Lines.Add a plan region to view the stepped portion of the model
2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. right-click in the Design Bar.
■ ■
On the Design Bar. the top and bottom clip planes. 3 In the Level 1 view. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. click Plan Region. click Finish Sketch. which is similar to the view range for plan views. sketch the plan region using the blue tick marks for guidance:
■
On the Design Bar. On the Options Bar. Plan regions have a single property. the line turns red.

The following illustration demonstrates how the level 1 floor plan view is being viewed with the plan region.4 Select the plan region. and then click OK twice. This means that the plan region view is going to cut all geometry at 9 feet above Level 1. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. top and bottom clip planes. under Extents. you specify that the level used to define each plane (cut plane. click Modify. 8 Click Apply. enter 12' 6" for the Top Offset. 7 Because the top clip plane value cannot be set lower than the cut plane. 9 On the Design Bar. click Edit for View Range. By selecting Parent View’s Level. The Level 1 floor plan should display as shown in the following illustration. select Parent View’s Level (Level 1) for Cut Plane. 6 In the View Range dialog. right-click.
534 | Chapter 21 Viewing
. and enter 9' 0" for the cut plane Offset. and view depth) in the view range is the same as the level used to define the corresponding plane in the parent view.

on the File menu.
Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan | 535
. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Save As.10 If you want to save your changes. 11 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

536 | Chapter 21 Viewing
.

to place and render decals to create signs. and to create walkthroughs of your building information model.
537
.Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs
22
In this tutorial. you learn to use the AccuRender® Radiosity and Raytrace features in Revit Structure 2008 to create rendered interior and exterior views of your building information model. AccuRender is the rendering engine incorporated into Revit Structure that is used to produce rendered views. billboards. and posters.

After you create the perspective view. change the material of the front terrace of the building from the default material to asphalt. you select a scene that defines the model environment. define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions on the front curtain wall.
When you complete these changes.
In this exercise. you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a building model and render it with the AccuRender Raytrace feature. the floor. and create the perspective view that you want to render.
538 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs
.
You learn to create and apply materials to a building model. add realistic three-dimensional trees to the building site. you raytrace a region of the building that includes the exterior wall. and then raytrace the view to produce the final rendered exterior view. You also learn to create a new material and apply it to a building component. and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.
Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model
In this exercise.Rendering an Exterior View
In this lesson. You work with a building model that already has material applied to it. you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. you:
■ ■ ■
change the texture of the brick material applied to the exterior walls of the building.

click Materials. click Edit for Structure. right-click in the Design Bar. Verify that the material defined for the exterior finish layer (Layer 1) of the building model is Masonry . select System Family: Basic Wall for Family. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar.
3 On the Options Bar. click
. and open Imperial\i_Cohouse. and click Edit/New.
4 In the Element Properties dialog. click Training Files.Dataset
■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. select Masonry .Exterior .Brick.
View the finish material of the exterior walls
1 Verify that the 3D view of the townhouse building model is displayed. 9 Under AccuRender. under Name.
Change the brick texture of the exterior wall finish material
7 On the Settings menu. verify that Co-house . click Wall. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click next to Texture to display the Material Library.Brick on CMU is displayed for Type.rvt. 6 Click Cancel three times to return to the 3D view of the building model without making any changes to the exterior finish at this time. 8 In the Materials dialog.
2 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Type Properties dialog.Brick. under Construction. and click the tab in the context menu.
Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 539
.

12 Click OK twice. select Polished. 19 Click OK four times. and click . expand Masonry and click Brick. 11 Under Name. under _accurender.
24 In the Material Library.
540 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs
. Polished and click OK. 25 Under Name. select Carib. 23 Under AccuRender.A preview of the brick texture that is currently assigned to the walls is displayed in the right pane of the Material Library. under Name. 28 Select one of the curtain wall mullions on the exterior face of the building. expand Metals. You can view the new brick texture when you raytrace a region of the building in a later step.
14 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. click Modify and select the terrace in front of the building.Asphalt. click Materials. under Name. click Edit for Structure._12".Running. 10 In the left pane of the Material Library dialog. click Duplicate. for Layer 2. 16 In the Type Properties dialog.
17 In the Edit Assembly dialog. and click Aluminum. 22 In the New Material dialog. under Construction. enter Aluminum. under _accurender. 27 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Materials dialog. select Site . click in the Material field that contains Default Floor.
. and click 15 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify.Plain. 21 In the Materials dialog. verify that Floor : Floor 3 displays in the Type Selector. click next to Texture to display the Material Library.
Change the material of the terrace from the default material to asphalt
13 On the Design Bar. 26 Click OK twice.
Define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions
20 On the Settings menu.

press TAB to cycle your selection through different building model components. click in the Material field. and then click . and click OK. and draw the rectangular region shown in the following illustration.
Raytrace a region of the building to view the material changes that you made
34 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. click Region Raytrace. 32 In the Materials dialog. floor.
30 In the Element Properties dialog. 37 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. This completes the changes in materials and textures that you make for the building model. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. When Curtain Wall Mullions: Rectangular Mullion displays in the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen. under Materials and Finishes. Make sure the region includes the exterior walls. Polished. 33 Click OK three times. click
. select Exterior under Type. select Aluminum.
29 On the Options Bar. verify that New is selected. select the curtain wall mullion again. click No.
Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 541
.TIP If you do not select the curtain wall mullion on the first selection.
36 In the Scene Selection dialog. 35 Move the cursor over the building model. under Name. and curtain wall mullions to which you made material changes. click Edit/New.

click Display Model to end the Region Raytrace command and redisplay the building model in hidden line wireframe. and double-click 1st Flr.
Adding Trees to the Site
In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and curtain wall mullions are rendered (this takes a few moments).rvt.
542 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs
. expand Floor Plans. the leaves of the trees display as indicated by the season and location specified in the render scene settings.
In a later exercise. “Adding Trees to the Site” on page 542.
Add red maple trees to the site
1 In the Project Browser. you place two different types of trees on the building site. i_Cohouse. producing a photorealistic effect. expand Views (all). Cnst.
38 On the Design Bar. when you render an exterior view of the model. floor. 39 Proceed to the next exercise.The portion of the building that you selected is raytraced and the materials that you changed and applied to the exterior walls.

Create a new type of tree. click Site Component.
Adding Trees to the Site | 543
. and add it to the site
6 On the Design Bar. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.2 Zoom out so you can easily view the area surrounding the building model. and click Site Component. select any of the deciduous trees. 7 In the Type Selector. click Modify. Available tree types are listed in the Type Selector by their Latin names. 4 In the Type Selector. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. select Tree . Continue to place trees until you have added several red maples to the building site as shown in the following illustration. 5 Move the cursor to a location on the building site. and click .Deciduous : Acer Rubrum 30'. The tree that you selected in this step is a red maple. and click to place a tree. and click Site. right-click in the Design Bar.

click Duplicate. Black. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.
544 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs
. under Identity Data. 12 In the Plant Library. and click OK twice. and click OK. 13 Under Name. and click Deciduous. The black oak is shorter than the red maple trees that you added to the site. under Other.
Creating a Perspective View
In this exercise. select Oak. and place two black oak trees.
Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. enter 22' 0" for Plant Height. as shown in the following illustration. click Edit/New. enter Black Oak. 10 In the Name dialog. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render.rvt. 16 Move the cursor to the building site. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. and then click display the Plant Library.8 In the Element Properties dialog. “Creating a Perspective View” on page 544. i_Cohouse. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. click in the Value field for Plant Name. 15 Under Other. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. expand Trees and Shrubs. and click OK. select Black Oak for Type Comments. under accurender. to
17 Press ESC to end tree placement.

2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point:
■ ■
Specify the first point on the site facing the building to position the camera.
3 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the perspective view displays as in the following illustration.
The new perspective view is displayed. Specify the second point in front of the building facade to define the target point of the camera.Place a camera in the first floor view
1 With the 1st Flr. click Camera. on the View tab of the Design Bar. Cnst.
Creating a Perspective View | 545
. view open.

Cnst.
6 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. view. and click Show Camera. The camera position is displayed in the 1st Flr. The red triangle represents the FOV (field of vision) angle and the back clipping plane of the view. Cnst.
546 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs
. 5 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. expand 3D Views.Modify the camera position and back clipping plane in the perspective view
4 In the Project Browser under Views (all). right-click 3D View 1 (the default perspective view name). double-click 1st Flr.

and click Rename. 8 In the Rename View dialog.rvt. under 3D Views.
Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View | 547
.
Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and environment settings that you use to render the view. right-click 3D View 1. lighting.
Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View
In this exercise. enter Exterior. you select a scene and specify time. i_Cohouse. place. date. double-click Exterior.7 In the Project Browser. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. “Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View” on page 547.
Display the perspective view
1 In the Project Browser under 3D Views.

click OK to accept the existing scene (Scene 1). and click Sun. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. 8 Under Time. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. click the Solar Angles tab. 6 Select By Date.
548 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs
. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view.
Select the render scene settings
2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog.You must define a scene because this is the first time settings are being applied to this view. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. click Settings. and drag the slider to set the time to 2:30 PM. 7 Under Date. 5 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. enter 10 (October) for Month and 5 for Day. under Scene Settings. Time. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to adjust the minutes precisely.

click Site. click Capture Rendering. click Raytrace. 13 Enter . 21 Click OK twice. MA. select Grass. click . 18 Click Material. 26 On the Design Bar. 16 In the Environment dialog. under Scene Settings. click No.
Render the perspective view
24 On the Design Bar. 10 Click in the Cities list. 19 In the Material Library. 20 In the Name list. select Good for Quality.
Save the rendered view
29 On the Design Bar. 15 In the Render Scene Settings dialog.) 14 Click OK.9 Click the Place tab. 23 Under Raytrace Settings. The rendered exterior perspective view is displayed.20 for Cloudiness.00 (many clouds. select Autumn for Plant Season. 12 Click the Settings Tab.
Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View | 549
. under _accurender. The rendered view is saved in the project and can be accessed from the Project Browser. 11 Scroll down. USA. 27 On the Options Bar. and select Boston. and click OK. under Background Color. Dark. click Image Size. 17 Under Advanced. and enter bo. under Scene Settings. select Ground Plane. and click OK. 25 Enter 150 for Resolution. 22 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. The Ground Plane tab displays.
28 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. Rye. This setting produces a level of cloudiness in the sky that ranges from 0 (no clouds) to 1. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. click Environment.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name.30 On the Design Bar. you add ArchVision realpeople (RPC people) to the floor plan of the second floor. and double-click Exterior to display the rendered view of the townhouse that you saved. and finally. Cnst. i_Cohouse. click Display Model to end rendering and redisplay the wireframe perspective view of the building model. 32 If you want to save this exercise.
Rendering an Interior View
In this lesson. RPC people are represented by a circle in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view.
Redisplay the rendered view
31 In the Project Browser under Views (all). you render an interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. define the view and render scene settings. use both Radiosity and Raytracing to render the view.
550 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs
.
Adding RPC People
In this exercise. you add two RPC people to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. on the File menu.rvt. “Rendering an Interior View” on page 550. expand Floor Plans. and double-click 2nd Flr. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. expand Renderings.
To create the rendered scene. click Save As.
Open second floor plan to display the interior scene that you will render
1 In the Project Browser under Views (all).

select RPC Female : Cathy. 4 In the Type Selector.
3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 6 Click to place Cathy to the right of the sofa and below the table.6 to select and place RPC Male : Alex to the right of Cathy and facing up and to the left (northwest).
Adding RPC People | 551
. select Rotate after placement.2 Zoom in on the left side of the living room as shown. click Component. and then move the cursor to rotate her so she is facing up and to the right (northeast). 7 Repeat steps 4 . 5 On the Options Bar.

Creating the Interior Perspective View
In this exercise.
552 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs
. click Camera.
Add a camera
1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.
Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. “Creating the Interior Perspective View” on page 552.8 Proceed to the next exercise. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point:
■
Specify the first point on the floor plan facing the table and RPC people to place the camera. i_Cohouse.

■

Specify the target point of the camera in front of the corner of the table.

The interior perspective is displayed, but you must adjust the field of vision and far clipping plane to display more of the view.

Resize the perspective view
6 On the Options Bar, click the dimensions for Size. 7 In the Crop Region Size dialog, under Size, enter 9" for Width, enter 7" for Height, and click OK. 8 In the Project Browser under 3D Views, right-click 3D View 1, and click Rename. 9 In the Rename View dialog, enter Interior, and click OK.

554 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view
10 On the View toolbar, click to display the 3D view of the building model.

11 On the View menu, click Shading to view the effects of the section box when you add it. 12 On the View menu, click View Properties. 13 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, select Section Box, and click OK. A section box is displayed around the building model. 14 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the section box. Grips are displayed on the section box.

15 Select and move the section box grips until only the room that you added RPC people to and that you want to render is visible.

Creating the Interior Perspective View | 555

This process allows you to limit the geometry that will be rendered when you create a rendering of your interior view. By limiting the geometry, you reduce the rendering time.

16 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a New Render Scene” on page 556.

Creating a New Render Scene
In this exercise, you create a render scene to specify the time, date, place, and environment settings used to render the view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, i_Cohouse.rvt.

Select the render scene settings
2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar, click Settings. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog, select New, and enter Interior Scene for Name. 4 Under Type, select Interior, and click OK. 5 In the Render Scene Settings dialog, under Scene Settings, clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view, and click Sun. 6 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog, click the Solar Angles tab. 7 Select By Date, Time, and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. 8 Under Date, enter 6 (June) for Month and 6 for Day. 9 Under Time, verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected, and drag the slider to set the time to 8:30 PM. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to precisely adjust the minutes. 10 Click the Place tab. 11 Click in the Cities list, and enter bo. 12 Scroll down, and select Boston, MA, USA. 13 Click the Settings tab. 14 Click Save, specify a file location and name for the scene settings, and click Save. 15 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog, click OK. 16 In the Render Scene Settings dialog, under Scene Settings, click Environment.

556 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

17 In the Environment dialog, on the Main tab, under Background Color, verify that Automatic Sky is selected. 18 Under Advanced, select Ground Plane. The Ground Plane tab displays. 19 Click Material. 20 In the Material Library, under accurender, click Site. 21 In the Name list, select Grass, Rye, Dark. 22 Click OK twice. 23 In the Render Scene Settings dialog, under Use View’s Section Box, select {3D}. 24 Under Scene Settings, select Summer for Plant Season, and click OK. 25 Proceed to the next exercise, “Defining Daylights and Rendering the View” on page 557.

Defining Daylights and Rendering the View
In this exercise, you define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall and render the view. When you define daylights for the curtain wall panels, you allow sunlight to pass through the panels when you render the view. You can select families with transparent materials, such as windows and doors, as daylight sources. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, i_Cohouse.rvt.

Define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall
1 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D}. The 3D view of the building model with the section box is displayed.

2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar, click Daylights. 3 Select the curtain wall on the second floor (Walls: Curtain Wall; Curtain Wall 1).

6 In the Radiosity Information dialog, click OK. The radiosity process, which can take several minutes, begins. Light bounce is calculated for each individual light. When radiate completes, the following rendered view is displayed. The RPC people do not display in the view until you raytrace them in the next steps.

7 On the Design Bar, click Raytrace. 8 On the Options Bar, select Medium (150 dpi) for Resolution, and click The raytraced perspective view is displayed and now includes the RPC people. .

9 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 10 Close the exercise file. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial, you rendered an exterior and an interior view. You learned to use both the Radiosity and Raytracing features included in the AccuRender render engine.

558 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Creating and Recording Walkthroughs
In this lesson, you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Structure 2008. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default, but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view.

Creating and Editing a Walkthrough
The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path, which is the path that a camera will follow through your building model. Usually you define the walkthrough path in a plan view, but you can also define it in a 3D, elevation, or section view. The walkthrough path is a spline, and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. In a plan view, you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path.

Recording a Walkthrough
After you create a walkthrough, you can record the walkthrough by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player independent of your Revit Structure software. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI, you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough:
■ ■ ■ ■

IMPORTANT If you record your walkthrough AVI with the AccuRender display option, you must select or define a scene.

Creating a Walkthrough
In this exercise, you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse.

You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse, proceeds through the dining room, and ends in the far corner of the living room. Dataset
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Townhouse.rvt.

Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 559

NOTE Some Imperial values are used by default in this exercise. If you prefer to use Metric values, click Settings ➤ Project Units, and change unit formats as desired.

Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click 1st Floor. The floor plan of the first floor of the townhouse is displayed. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Walkthrough. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar, right-click in the Design Bar, and click the tab in the context menu. 3 On the Options Bar, verify that Perspective is selected to create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room, and click to specify the start point, or the first key frame, of the walkthrough. 5 Specify four additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown in the following illustration.

6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room, on the Options Bar, click .

Edit and play the walkthrough
7 In the Project Browser under Views (all), expand Walkthroughs, and double-click Walkthrough 1.

560 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed, surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown in the following illustration. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same.

8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. If it is not, select the crop boundary. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. 9 On the Options Bar, click the dimensions for Size to change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog, enter 16" for Width and 9" for Height. 11 Under Change, verify Field of view is selected, and click OK. 12 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x), and select the crop boundary.

13 On the Options Bar, click Edit Walkthrough. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of 300 frames in the walkthrough. 14 Click .

Creating a Walkthrough | 561

15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog, enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60, and click OK. 16 On the Options Bar, enter 1 for Frame, and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame).

17 Click

.

The walkthrough plays. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time, press ESC. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing, proceed to the next exercise, “Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position” on page 562.

Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position
In this exercise, you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, c_Townhouse.rvt.

Change the properties of the camera
1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans, double-click 1st Floor. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor.

2 On the Options Bar, click

.

3 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, clear Far Clip Active, and click OK. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera.

The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room.

5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip), and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown in the following illustration. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location.

6 On the Options Bar, select Path for Controls. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. You can move any camera target or key frame position.

Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 563

7 Click the third key frame position, and drag it to the location shown in the following illustration.

Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made
8 In the Project Browser, under Walkthroughs, double-click Walkthrough 1. 9 On the Options Bar, click Edit Walkthrough, and then click to play the walkthrough.

10 Proceed to the next exercise, “Recording the Walkthrough” on page 564.

Recording the Walkthrough
In this exercise, you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI. When you export the walkthrough, you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe, hidden line, shaded, shaded with edges, or with AccuRender raytracing. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, c_Townhouse.rvt. 1 On the File menu, click Export ➤ Walkthrough. 2 In the Save As dialog, specify a path and a file name for the AVI. 3 Under Output Length, specify 15 for Frames per Second. 4 Under Format, select <Shading> for Display mode, and click Save. 5 In the Video Compression dialog, select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system for Compressor, and click OK. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. If you are unsure of what option to use, the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. It produces files that are larger than compressed files, but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. The AVI is recorded. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walk-through from the location that you specified in step 3, without opening Revit Structure 2008.

564 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

click Save As. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 8 If you want to save this exercise. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. on the File menu. reducing the size of the image.7 Try creating other walkthroughs. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. perhaps to 6” wide x 4” height. specifying the number of frames. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second.
Recording the Walkthrough | 565
. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds.

566 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs
.

gutters. and soffits to the roofs that you create.Roofs
23
In this tutorial. you learn how to add fascia. In addition. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Structure 2008.
567
.

and double-click Level 1.
568 | Chapter 23 Roofs
. You do not need to create the work plane. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. click Training Files.rvt. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. and mansard roofs.
Dataset
■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK. and open Imperial\i_Roofs. including hip. 4 Click OK. shed. expand Floor Plans. 1 In the Project Browser. Before you can sketch the roof profile. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. In this lesson. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion.
You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise.
2 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage.
Creating an Extruded Roof
In this exercise. verify that Section: Section1 is selected.Creating Roofs
In this lesson. expand Views (all). gable. select Name. you learn to create several different types of roofs. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 In the Go To View dialog. verify Level 3 is selected for Level.

This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.
10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. and so on).
Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. click the blue square on the witness line.
9 Sketch a similar reference plane 1'6" to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. centerline. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. click Ref Plane. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 1'6'' to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face.
Creating an Extruded Roof | 569
.The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof.

570 | Chapter 23 Roofs
. 13 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 1'6" below Level 2. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. select Chain. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections.
15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. sketch the roof profile.
Next. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. click Lines.

and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. press TAB.
Creating an Extruded Roof | 571
.
Next.
The roof should resemble the following illustration.The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. 19 On the Tools toolbar. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls.
20 Select the breezeway roof edge. 17 On the Tools toolbar. click .
18 Select the edge of the roof.
16 On the View toolbar.
Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. click . click
to display the model. and then select the exterior face of the wall.
Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately.

click Modify. expand Views (all).
27 Proceed to the next exercise. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. 21 In the Project Browser. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof.
You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof.
572 | Chapter 23 Roofs
.
26 On the View toolbar. click
to view the completed breezeway roof in the model. press CTRL. When you complete the roof.
Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint
In this exercise. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. and double-click Section 1.
24 On the Options Bar. expand Sections (Type 1). 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof.. click Attach for Top/Base. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. and select the second wall.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, i_Roofs.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3. 2 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 3 On the Options Bar, clear Defines slope, and enter 1' 0'' for Overhang. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Pick Walls. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls, press TAB, and then verify that a dashed green line displays to the exterior side of the walls.

6 Click to select all the walls. Next, sketch the chimney opening. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Lines. 8 On the Options Bar, click .

9 Using automatic snaps, sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face.

Next, add new slope lines to the roof. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Modify. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. 13 On the Options Bar, select Defines Slope. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration.

15 On the Options bar, select Defines Slope. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Roof. 17 When you see the informational dialog, click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 18 On the View toolbar, click to view the new roof in the model.

19 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint” on page 574.

Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint
In this exercise, you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, i_Roofs.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2.

574 | Chapter 23 Roofs

2 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 3 On the Options Bar, select Defines slope, and enter 2' 0'' for Overhang. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Pick Walls. 5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. Verify that a dashed green line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls.

Next, close the roof sketch. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Lines. 7 On the Options Bar, clear Defines Slope, and click .

8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building, using the following illustration for guidance.

Next, trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch.

9 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

10 On the Options Bar, verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 11 To trim the first line segment, select the left vertical slope definition line, and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building.

Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 575

Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep.

12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections.

Next, raise the roof 2' above the current level. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Roof Properties. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. 14 Under Constraints, enter 2' 0'' for Base Offset From Level, and click OK. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Roof. 16 On the View toolbar, click 17 Click to display the model.

to use the Dynamic View tool to view the back of the house.

Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof.

18 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof, click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar, and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof.

576 | Chapter 23 Roofs

21 Click

to use the Dynamic View tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof.

22 Using the same method that you used previously, join the two remaining walls to the roof. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. Next, use the Join Roof command to fix the roof.

23 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

24 Select the edge of the hip roof, and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs.

The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration.

25 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint” on page 577.

Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint
In this exercise, you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, i_Roofs.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2.

Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 577

2 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Pick Walls. 4 On the Options Bar, clear Defines Slope, and enter 1' 0'' for Overhang. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way, press TAB, and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. Verify that a green dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls.

6 On the Options Bar, enter 0' 0'' for Overhang. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch.

Next, trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch.

8 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

9 On the Options Bar, verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 10 To trim the first line segment, select the left vertical roof line, and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. 11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections.

Next, you add a slope-defining line. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. 13 On the Options Bar, select Defines slope.

578 | Chapter 23 Roofs

Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker.

14 Enter 6" for the rise value to change the roof slope, and press ENTER.

15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Roof Properties. 16 Under Constraints, enter -2' 0'' for Base Offset From Level, and click OK. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Roof to complete the roof. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 19 Click 20 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. to use the Dynamic View tool to rotate the model.

21 Proceed to the next exercise, “Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof” on page 579.

Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof
In this exercise, you add slope arrows to the shed roof. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, i_Roofs.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click 3D. 2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. 3 On the Options Bar, click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2. 5 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region, and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. Before you can add slope arrows, you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. To help locate the position of each split, you need to add two reference planes. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Ref Plane. 7 On the Options Bar, click , and enter 2' 0'' for Offset.

8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch.

Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 579

9 On the Tools menu, click Split Walls and Lines. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration.

Next, change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. 11 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. 12 On the Options Bar, clear Defines Slope. Next, add two new slope arrows. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Slope Arrow. 14 On the Options Bar, verify is selected.

15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line:
■

Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays, and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head.

■

16 Repeat steps 13 - 15 to add the second slope arrow. Begin the tail at the right reference plane, and move the cursor to place the arrow. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps.

17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Modify. 18 Press CTRL, select both slope arrows, and click 19 Under Constraints, select Slope for Specify. 20 Under Dimensions, enter 6'' for Rise/12", and then click OK. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Roof to complete the roof. .

580 | Chapter 23 Roofs

22 Click

on the View toolbar to display the model.

NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof, use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. 23 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Mansard Roof” on page 581.

Creating a Mansard Roof
In this exercise, you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it.

Dataset
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Mansard_Roof.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations, and double-click North. Notice the model has four defined levels:

In the next steps, you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify. 3 Select the roof and, on the Options Bar, click .

4 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3.

6 On the View toolbar, click

to display the model.

Creating a Mansard Roof | 581

Next, create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. 7 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3.

8 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Lines. 10 On the Options Bar, click , and then select Defines slope.

11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff.

12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Modify. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines, press TAB, and select the remaining three lines. 14 On the Options Bar, click .

15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Dimensions, enter 3'' for Rise/12", and click OK. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Roof. 17 On the View toolbar, click to display the model with the complete mansard roof.

582 | Chapter 23 Roofs

18 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

Creating a Mansard Roof | 583

584 | Chapter 23 Roofs

you create a model group for a typical kitchen. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose.
585
.Grouping
24
Using the grouping functionality in Revit Structure 2008. or with those working on a different project. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. all instances in the building model are updated. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. You can also nest groups within other groups. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. place. In this tutorial. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. For example. you not only simplify their placement. you also simplify the modification process. and modify repetitive units. By grouping objects. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group.

and typical office layouts. You mirror one instance of the group. and open Imperial\i_Groups-Condominium. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan.Creating. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. In this exercise. you add the new model group to a previously created group.rvt. expand Views (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. In another exercise. Dataset
■ ■
Click File menu ➤ Open. When you make changes to a nested group. The new group is considered nested within the host group. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. After you create a model group. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. expand Floor Plans.
2 Enter ZR. the host group is also updated automatically. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes.
Creating and Placing a Group
In this exercise. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. and Nesting Groups
In this lesson. hotel rooms.
586 | Chapter 24 Grouping
. and double-click First Floor. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position.
Create a group for the typical kitchen layout
1 In the Project Browser. Modifying.

Creating and Placing a Group | 587
. click
(Group).
5 In the Create Model Group dialog.
4 On the Edit toolbar.3 Draw a selection box around the kitchen. enter Typical Kitchen. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. and click OK.

expand Model.
Place instances of the group
9 In the Project Browser. right-click Typical Kitchen.Change the origin point for the group
6 In the drawing area. click Modify.
7 On the Design Bar. Zoom flyout. 8 On the View toolbar.
588 | Chapter 24 Grouping
. and click Create Instance. select the center control for the group origin. under Groups. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. click Zoom To Fit.

11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. click
(Mirror). 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group.
12 On the Design Bar.
Creating and Placing a Group | 589
.
14 On the Edit toolbar. click Modify.10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan.

clear Copy.
18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. and on the toolbar.15 On the Options Bar. 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. click
(Rotate).
17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell.
590 | Chapter 24 Grouping
.
The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan.

21 On the Zoom flyout. click Modify. one mirrored. as shown.19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. and one rotated.
Creating and Placing a Group | 591
. click Zoom To Fit. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation.
20 On the Design Bar.

Modifying a Group
In this exercise. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. name the file i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. and click Save. press TAB to highlight the wall. and click to select it. you make changes to an instance of a group.Save the dataset
22 On the File menu.
592 | Chapter 24 Grouping
. When you finish editing.rvt. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Save As. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory.
Modify visibility of elements in a group
1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair.

and click 4 Move the cursor over the door.
This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. and click to select the door. press TAB. and click to select the wall. click Modify.
NOTE To display an excluded element.
Modifying a Group | 593
. press TAB.
5 Click
(Exclude group member). select the element.
(Include group member).
7 Click
(Exclude group member).
8 On the Design Bar.3 Click
(Exclude group member).
6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall.

and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. select Bifold-4 Panel : 48'' x 84''. click Zoom To Fit. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. 13 In the Type Selector. 10 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. click Wall.
594 | Chapter 24 Grouping
. 11 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. Zoom flyout.
Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances
18 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. click Modify. All other elements in the model are grayed out.
17 On the View toolbar. click Edit Group. 15 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet.Add elements for a unique condition
9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Door. In edit group mode. move the cursor to the left. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. 19 Select the Typical Kitchen group. 20 On the Options Bar. clear Tag on Placement. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall.
12 On the Design Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

22 In the drawing area. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. under Constraints. 24 On the Design Bar. 23 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. for Unconnected Height. enter 3' 4''. click Finish. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening.
25 Select the opening. 28 In the group editor toolbar. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. click Modify. move the cursor up. 27 For Base Offset. and click OK.21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top.
Modifying a Group | 595
. click Properties. enter 7'.

click Edit Group. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group.
Nesting Groups
In this exercise. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. which acts as the host. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.
596 | Chapter 24 Grouping
. under Floor Plans. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group.
Add elements to an existing group
1 If necessary. 4 In the group editor toolbar.rvt. double-click First Floor. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. click (Add to Group). in the Project Browser. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group.
3 On the Options Bar. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. you add the Typical Kitchen group.29 Click File menu ➤ Save. created in an earlier lesson.

click Finish. select the Typical Kitchen group. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group.
7 In the group editor toolbar. and each of the bifold doors.
Nesting Groups | 597
. 8 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. select the wall between the folding doors. double-click Second Floor.
6 Press TAB.5 In the drawing area.

and create an attached detail group containing the tags. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model.
Draw a filled region
1 In the Project Browser. such as text. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. In the next exercise. you add door tags to a group. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model.
Creating a Detail Group
In this exercise.
Working with Detail Groups
In this lesson.rvt. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. double-click First Floor. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. such as door and window tags. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. and filled regions. under Floor Plans. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation.
598 | Chapter 24 Grouping
. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group.10 Click File menu ➤ Save.

5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. click to draw a rectangular region. click Filled Region.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. and select a point below the left elevator. 4 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch.
7 On the Design Bar.
Creating a Detail Group | 599
.
6 Move the cursor down and to the left.

17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. and select the note and the filled region. and on the Design Bar. click Modify. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. click (Group). click to add an arc leader.
600 | Chapter 24 Grouping
. as shown. click Text. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. 14 On the Edit toolbar. 12 Enter Tile. 16 In the drawing area.
10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point.
Create a detail group
13 Press and hold CTRL.Add a text note
8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK.
15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. 9 On the Options Bar.

you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. it cannot be added to a group in the same manner that a drawing component can be added. click Modify 23 On the Zoom flyout. click Modify. click Zoom To Fit.
Add a group instance to a different drawing view
19 In the Project Browser. 21 In the drawing area. double-click Second Floor. click to place the detail group. under Floor Plans.
Using Attached Detail Groups | 601
. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.
22 On the Design Bar. and click Create Instance. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. under Groups.rvt. Because the detail group contains variables. 20 In the Project Browser. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save.18 On the Design Bar. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile.
Using Attached Detail Groups
In this exercise. expand Detail.

double-click First Floor.Place door tags
1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 4 Place door tags in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit.
Create an attached detail group
6 In the drawing area. 3 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. click Tag ➤ By Category. clear Leader. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. draw a selection box around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. as shown:
5 On the Design Bar.
602 | Chapter 24 Grouping
.

click Place Detail. click Check None.
10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog.
Place a detail group in another group instance
12 In the Project Browser. click
(Filter Selection).
Using Attached Detail Groups | 603
. and click OK. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. click (Group). 14 On the Options Bar. for Attached Detail Group Name. 9 On the Edit toolbar. double-click Second Floor. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit.7 On the Options Bar. and click OK.
8 In the Filter dialog. 13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit.
11 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. select Door Tags. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached.

therefore.rvt. under Groups\Model. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog.15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. and click OK.
17 Click File menu ➤ Save. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. 3 For File name. In this case.
604 | Chapter 24 Grouping
. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit.
Save a group to a library
1 In the Project Browser. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. click Modify.
Saving and Loading Groups
In this exercise. 16 On the Design Bar. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. and click Save. click Desktop.
Saving and Loading Groups
In this lesson. and click Save Group. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. When you load the group from the library into a new project. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. verify that Same as group name is selected.

select 2 Bedroom Unit. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group.
Saving and Loading Groups | 605
. click OK.
Convert group instance to a linked file
14 Select the group. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. 12 On the Design Bar. click Link. click Use Existing. 5 In the New Project dialog.Load the group in a new project
4 On the File menu. A warning dialog is displayed. 17 On the Design Bar.rvt. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. and expand Model. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. expand Groups. click Training Files. and click OK.rvt. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. for Create new.
13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. verify that Project is selected. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. click New ➤ Project.
Place an instance of the loaded group
9 In the Project Browser. accept the default template file. browse to the Desktop. and click Create Instance. and click Open. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. click Modify. click Modify. When a group is converted to a link. and on the Options Bar.

18 In the Project Browser. verify that Attached Details is selected only.
Convert the linked model to a group
19 In the drawing area. and click OK. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click Bind. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. click Remove Link. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project.rvt file is added as a link to the project. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. select the linked Revit model. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 23 In the confirmation dialog.
606 | Chapter 24 Grouping
. expand Revit Links. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. 24 In the message dialog. 20 On the Options Bar. click OK. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. and the link is removed. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project.